Skip to main content

Full text of "Microscopic illustrations of living objects, their natural history, &c. &c."

See other formats


NEW  WORKS 

ON 

JMtaoSroptr  &timct  &  Natural  iMtitoxu, 

Pi-blished  byWHITTAKER  and  CO. 


Just  published,  in  8vo.  price  8s.  fid.  boards,  the 

NATURAL  HISTORY 

ANIMALCULES; 

CONTAINING 

DESCRIPTIONS  OF  ALL  THE  KNOWN  SPECIES  OF  INFUSORIA  : 

WITH 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  PROCURING  AND  VIEWING  THEM. 
Illustrated  by  upwards  of  300  Magnified   Figures  on  Steel. 

TO  WHICH   IS  APPENDED, 

DR.  EHRENBERGS  CLASSIFICATION. 


By    ANDREW    PR1TCHARD,    Esq.    / 


Handsomely  bound  in  cloth,   7s.  (id. 

C  OLOURED    IMPRESSIO  X  s 

OF 

ENGRAVINGS 

FROM  THE 

NATURAL   HISTORY   OF   ANIMALCULES. 


THE 

MICROSCOPIC    CABINET 

OF 

SELECT  ANIMATED  OBJECTS 

WITH 

A  DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  JEWEL  AND  DOUBLET  MICROSCOPES, 
TEST  OBJECTS,  &c. 

TO    WHICH    A  HE    SUBJOINED, 

MEMOIRS  ON  THE  VERIFICATION  OF  MICROSCOPIC  PHENOMEM  v 

AM)    AN    EXACT  METHOD  OF  APPRECIATING   THE 

QUALITY  OF  MICROSCOPES  AND  BNGISCOPES. 

By  C.  R.  GORING,  Ml) 

The  whole  illustrated  by  coloured  Plata  and  Woodcuts,  price  IBs. 


New  Works  on  Microscopic  Science  and  Natural  History . 


Lately  published,  price  8s.  6d. 

THE   MICROGRAPHIA. 

Contents: —  History  and  Description  of  Reflecting  Microscopes — On  Micro- 
meters, and  their  Use — Monochromatic  Illumination — Solar  Engiscopes, 
and  the  Exhibition  of  Tests  by  them  —  On  trying  Microscopes  and 
Engiscopes  against  each  other,  with  Rules  for  ascertaining  their  compa- 
rative merits — On  Eye-Pieces — Illustrations  of  Angular  Aperture — On 
the  most  improved  Construction  and  Management  of  Solar  and  Gas 
Microscopes — Cuvier's  Method  of  dissecting  Objects  in  Fluids — On  a  new 
and  simple  fine  Adjustment  for  Microscopes — On  making  Drawings  of 
Inanimate  Microscopic  Objects,  by  F.  Bauer,  Esq.  F.R.S.  &c. — On  a  new 
Method  of  Illuminating  Objects,  by  the  Rev.  J.  B.  Reade,  M.A. 

By  C.  R.  GORING,  M.D.  and  A.   PR1TCHARD. 


Also,  price  One  Shilling, 

A  LIST  OF  2000  MICROSCOPIC  OBJECTS 

WITH 

REMARKS  ON  THE  CIRCULATION  IN  ANIMALS  AND  PLANTS 
THE  METHOD  OF  VIEWING  CRYSTALS  BY  POLARIZED  LIGHT,  &c. 

FORMING 

A    GUIDE 

FOR 

SELECTING  AND  LABELLING  SUBJECTS 

OF 

NATURAL   HISTORY,   BOTANY,   AND    MINERALOGY, 

FOU THE 

MICROSCOPE. 


Price  2s. 

OF  THE 

ORDERS,  FAMILIES,  AND  PRINCIPAL  GENERA 

BRITISH    INSECTS, 

ARRANGED  IN  CONFORMITY  WITH  THEIR  ORGANIZATION, 

AND    PRINTED   ON    ONE    SIDE    ONLY,   TO   SUIT   FOR 

LABELLING   CABINETS. 


MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS, 


London : 

Wilson  &  Son,  Printers 

57,  Skinner  Street. 


MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS 

OF 

LIVING  OBJECTS, 

THEIR    NATURAL    HISTORY,    %c.    %c. 


WITH  RESEARCHES 

CONCERNING  THE  MOST  ELIGIBLE  METHODS  OF  CONSTRUCTING 

ffl\tvo$topt$, 

AND  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  USING  THEM. 
By  C.  R.  GORING,  M.D. 


A  Neiv  Edition,  emended  and  enlarged. 


By  ANDREW  PRITCHARD,  M.R.I. 

HON.    MF.M.  SOC.  ARTS,  EDIN.  ;    AUTHOR    OF    "  NATURAL  HISTORY  OF  ANIMALCULES, 

&C.   Aft 


LONDON: 
WHITTAKRR  AND  CO.  AVE-MARIA  LANE. 

1838 


O PINION S 

OK 

SCIENTIFIC   JOURNALS 

OV  THK  FIRST  RDITION  OK  THE 

MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


"  Impressed  as  we  are  with  the  high  importance  of  this  branch  of  science, 
and  with  the  great  value  of  the   improvements  which   these  gentlemen  have 

introduced,  we  looked  forward  with  the  most  sanguine  expectations and 

have  now  no  hesitation  in  stating  it  as  our  opinion,  that  Dr.  G.  and 
Mr.  P.  have  both  accomplished  their  difficult  tasks  with  the  greatest  success. 
The  coloured  engravings  are  executed  in  such  a  masterly  manner  that  they 
will  themselves  bear  to  be  seen  by  the  microscope." 

Brewster's  Edinburgh  Journal  of  Science. 

"  The  present  publication  cannot  fail  to  recommend  itself  generally,  for  it 
is  associated  with  elaborate  descriptions  and  beautiful  coloured  engravings  of 
a  variety  of  diverting  and  popular  objects." — Journal  of  the  Royal  Institution. 

"  The  notices  of  natural  history  in  the  volume  before  us  are  well  arranged  ; 
the  coloured  engravings  are  executed  with  the  most  perfect  fidelity  ;  'and  the 
entire  work  will  afford  a  high  treat  to  the  curious  admirer  of  nature."  —  Atlas. 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  PUBLIC  PRESS 


MICROSCOPIC    CABINET. 


"  This  is  an  exceedingly  curious  and  interesting  work  ;  the  plates  are  marvellous." 

Spectator. 

"  We  earnestly  recommend  the  Microscopic  Cabinet  both  to  the  general  and  the 
scientific  reader,  as  an  original,  a  valuable,  and  an  ingenious  work." 

London  and  Edinburgh  Philosophical  Magazine. 

"  We  are  presented,"  in  the  Microscopic  Cabinet,  "  with  engravings  of  the  most 
beautiful  or  remarkable  water-insects,  and  are  moreover  informed  of  their  history,  habits, 
and  anatomical  conformation.  We  have  also  directions  as  to  the  use  of  the  instru- 
ments employed  in  these  researches,  and  a  full  description  of  Mr.  P.'s  new  microscope. 
*  *  *  We  cannot  speak  ton  highly  of  the  finished  coloured  engravings  ;  they  are 
equally  remarkable  for  the  fidelity  and  the  beauty  of  their  execution.  A  mere  inspec- 
tion of  these  would  be  sufficient  to  create  a  taste  for  the  study  of  a  department  of 
philosophy  which  certainly  is  inferior  to  none  in  the  interest  it  is  calculated  to  create, 
or  the  elegance  of  form  and  the  harmony  of  adaptation  which  it  presents  to  the  view." 

New  Monthly  Magazine. 

"  This  work  may  be  termed  a  practical  treatise  on  the  present  state  of  Microscopes. 
In  the  descriptive  portion,  valuable  information  is  imparted  on  the  structure  and  habits 
of  those  most  interesting  creatures,"  Animalcules,  Crustacea,  and  Insects  ;  "  and  for 
procuring-,  feeding,  preserving,  and  the  best  mode  of  examining  them,  useful  directions 
are  given."  Magazine  of  Natural  History. 

"  This  work  selects  a  variety  of  living  objects  that  have  never  been  before  described, 
and  depicts  faithfully  many  others  that  have  hitherto  been  most  incorrectly  represented. 
The  descriptions  are  most  elaborately  written  in  a  plain  and  familiar  style." 

Monthly  Magazine. 

"  A  vast  variety  of  practical  information,  popularly  detailed,  is  diffused  throughout 
the  work  ,  and  the  whole  is  illustrated  by  a  number  of  very  beautiful  plates.  *  *  * 
It  is  decidedly  the  most  practical  and  satisfactory  treatise  on  the  microscope  that  it  has 
hitherto  been  our  good  fortune  to  have  met  with."  London  Medical  Gazette. 

"  This  is  a  very  complete  and  interesting  work."  Athenarum. 

"  Many  of  the  descriptions  of  the  structure  and  habits  of  animals,  as  observed  by  our 
Author,  will  be  found  curiously  interesting.  The  style  in  which  the  work  is  got  up  is 
very  creditable,  and  the  illustrations  extremely  good  and  copious." 

London  Medical  and  Physical  Journal. 

"  The  lovers  of  natural  history  will  derive  both  gratification  and  instruction  by  the 
perusal  of  this  work."  Register  of  Arts. 

"  This  is  a  beautiful  volume,  which  must  be  deeply  interesting  to  those  engaged  in 
the  study  of  natural  history.  The  plates  are  well  delineated,  beautifully  coloured,  and 
afforded  at  a  reasonable  rate.  It  is  impossible  to  speak  in  too  high  terms  of  its  execu- 
tion." London  Medicul  and  Surgical  Journal. 

"  Some  of  the  best  executed  plates  and  cuts  that  we  have  seen  on  the  subject.  We 
have  no  doubt  that  the  present  volume  will  go  far  to  supply  a  desideratum  ;  and  not 
least  as  to  the  due  appreciation  of  microscopes,  perfection  in  the  qualities  of  which  is 
obviously  essential  to  the  just  characterization  of  the  insect  tribe." 

Gentleman' 's  Magazine. 

"  The  greater  part  of  this  volume  is  taken  up  with  descriptions  of  the  economy  and 
nature  of  aquatic  insects,  Crustacea,  and  animalcules,  written  in  a.  popular  style,  without 
any  scientific  display  of  terms  to  perplex  the  general  reader,  and  is  illustrated  by  some 
admirably  coloured  engravings,  of  whose  beauty  and  fidelity  we  can  bear  witness." 

National  Omnibus. 

"  The  Microscopic  Cabinet  will  essentially  aid  the  cause  of  science."  Atlas. 

"  This  is  a  valuable  work  for  scientific  men,  and  of  great  assistance  to  the  student  of 
botany  or  natural  history."  Bell's  Old  Weekly  Messenger. 

"  The  Microscopic  Cabinet  is  a  work  which  does  almost  infinite  credit  to  its  authors, 
and  is  certainly  by  far  the  most  valuable  contribution  which  has  been  made  to  micro- 
scopic science  in  modern  times."  Mechanics'  Magazine. 


PREFACE. 


At  the  period  of  the  publication  of  the  first  edition 
of  this  work  in  1829,  microscopes  on  the  new  prin- 
ciple had  only  just  sprung  into  being,  and  some 
apology  for  a  treatise  upon  an  instrument  which 
then  apparently  had  little  but  novelty  to  recommend 
it,  might  have  been  thought  requisite;  since  that 
time,  however,  its  application  to  the  sciences,  and 
the  pleasure  derivable  from  it  as  a  source  of  amuse- 
ment, have  rendered  this  unnecessary. 

It  will  be  found  that  the  present  arrangement 
of  the  papers  is  different  to  what  it  was  in  the  first 
edition,  that  having  been  suited  to  their  being'  pub- 
lished in  numbers,  which  occasion  being  done  away 
with,  Dr.  Goring's  are  now  placed  together,  and 
with  them  the  description  of  his  instrument. 

In   the   first  chapter  of  this  volume  the  reader  is 


10  PREFACE. 

furnished  with  a  brief  sketch  of  the  uses  of  the 
microscope,  and  its  various  improvements.  This 
appeared  to  be  preferable  to  commencing-  with  the 
original  Exordium,  on  account  of  the  progress 
microscopic  science  has  made  in  public  opinion,  and 
the  enlarged  view  which  is  now  taken  with  respect 
to  the  microscope.  As,  however,  there  are  many 
persons  who  desire  and  expect  to  meet  with  the 
Exordium  in  the  present  edition  of  this  work,  it 
has  been  deemed  advisable  to  give  it  entire  in  the 
Appendix,  with  Dr.  Goring's  corrections. 

The  three  succeeding  chapters  are  appropriated 
to  a  description  of  certain  living  microscopic  objects; 
and  containing,  as  they  do,  some  remarkable  parti- 
culars relating  to  the  wonderful  metamorphoses 
which  these  creatures  are  ordained  to  undergo,  it 
is  confidently  hoped  they  will  not  be  deficient  in 
interest  or  instruction. 

The  remaining  portion  of  the  volume  contains  an 
account  of  the  mechanical  construction  of  the  micro- 
scope and  its  apparatus;  and  since  we  have  no 
other  work  devoted  to  this  branch  of  the  subject, 
affording  to  all  persons  possessing  this  instrument 
such  practical  instructions   as   are   absolutely  neces- 


.    PREFACE.  1 1 

sary  for  the  right  using1  and  managing  of  it,  it  is 
fairly  presumed  that  this  will  be  serviceable.  These 
instructions,  it  may  be  as  well  to  mention,  are  not 
confined  to  any  particular  sort  of  microscope,  but 
are  purposely  drawn  up  in  general  terms,  in  order 
that  some  profitable  information  may  be  gleaned 
from  them,  in  the  management  of  any  microscope 
whatever,  no  matter  what  may  be  its  optical  con- 
struction. 

From  the  rapidity  with  which  one  improvement 
has  succeeded  another,  it  is  necessary,  in  order  to 
come  at  a  right  conclusion  as  to  the  relative  merits 
of  the  productions  of  different  artists,  to  take  the 
time  at  which  their  instruments  were  fabricated 
into  consideration ;  for,  should  some  of  them  have 
been  made  three  or  four  years  before  the  others, 
the  latter  will  in  all  probability  excel  the  former; 
whereas,  had  a  comparison  been  instituted  between 
the  simultaneous  productions  of  the  artists,  the  result 
might  have  been  quite  the  reverse. 

In  the  explanation  I  have  given  of  that  remarkable 
instrument,  the  Polarizing  Compound  Microscope,  it 
will  be  found  that  I  have  gone  somewhat  minutely 


12  PREFACE. 

into  detail  respecting  it ;  and,  with  a  view  of  render- 
ing' it  as  available  as  possible,  have  printed  in  the 
Appendix  Mr.  Talbot's  highly  interesting  papers 
upon  the  polarizing  properties  of  crystals.  Although 
this  is  in  itself  almost  a  new  instrument,  a  great 
deal  has  already  been  accomplished  by  its  means, 
and  a  great  variety  of  the  hidden  phenomena  of 
nature  most  beautifully  displayed. 

The  kind  consideration  bestowed  upon  the  first 
edition  by  men  the  most  distinguished  in  science, 
who  had  turned  their  attention  to  this  subject,  and 
the  interest  now  so  generally  felt  in  microscopic 
researches,  induce  me  to  hope  that  the  present 
volume — a  large  portion  of  which  has  been  re- 
written, expressly  that  it  should  contain  the  latest 
improvements — will  be  favourably  received. 

ANDREW  PR1TCHARD. 

102,  Fleet  Street,  London. 


CONTENTS. 


Page 
Preface    9 


CHAPTER  I. 

Introductory  Remarks  on  the  Application  of  the  Micro- 
scope to  the  Sciences,  with  an  Account  of  its  recent 
Improvements 17 

CHAPTER  II. 

On  the  Larva  and  Pupa  of  a  Straw-coloured  Plumed  Culex 
or  Gnat    50 

CHAPTER  III. 

On  the  Larva  and  Crysalis  of  a  Day-Fly 61 

CHAPTER  IV. 

On  the  Larva  of  a  Species  of  British  Hydrophilus 70 

CHAPTER  V. 

On      the     Terms     employed    in     Microscopic     Science — 

With  a  Description  of  the  Vertical  Microscope -  ;i 


31  2  3  4 


14  CONTENT?. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

Page 

A  Description  of  the  Achromatic  Microscope,  together  with 
its  Apparatus,  and  the  mode  of  using  it  :  — 

Round  Stand  Microscope — Solid  Tripod -stand  Microscope — 
On  selecting  Magnifying  Powers — Candle- holder,  Shade,  and 
Condenser — Spring  Double-Stage — Moveable  Stages — Spring 
Phial-Holder — Polarizing  Microscope — Apparatus  for  Dis- 
secting— Simple  Lenses  mounted  in  imitation  of  Achromatics 
— Garden  Clamp  for  the  Microscope — Steadying  Rods — Camera 
Lucida,  for  Drawing— Micrometer  Eye-pieces— Method  of 
Viewing  Moveable  Fluids  in  the  Cavities  of  Crystals — Concave 
Specula,  Silver  Cups,  &c. — Stops,  or  Diaphragms — On  View- 
ing Transparent  Objects  by  Daylight — On  Viewing  Bodies  by 
Intermitting  Light — Black  Ground  Illumination  for  Transpa- 
rent Objects — On  Viewing  Opaque  Bodies  by  Oblique  Reflected 
Light — Method  of  determining  the  Forms  of  Minute  Bodies — 
On  Viewing  the  Currents  in  Fluids  during  Evaporation 85 


CHAPTER  VII. 

Practical  Remarks  on  Microscopes  for  viewing  and  drawing 
Aquatic  Larvae,  &c. — By  C.  R.  Goring,  M.D 146 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

Whether  there  is  a  best  possible  way  of  constructing  the 
Stand,  or  Mounting,  &.c.  of  Microscopes  (the  specific 
purpose  or  purposes  to  which  they  are  to  be  applied 
being  first  determined) — By  C.  R.  Goring,  M.D 150 


CHAPTER  IX. 

Description  of  Dr.  Goring's  Operative  Aplanatic  Engiscope  168 


CONTENTS.  15 


CHAPTER  X. 

Manner  of  Observing  with   and  Managing  the  Operative 
Aplanatie  Engiscope  :  — 

General  Observations— Method  of  Mounting  for  viewing  Inani- 
mate Transparent  Objects  by  pure  intercepted  Daylight — 
Method  of  Mounting  for  viewing  Transparent  Objects  by 
Artificial  Light — Mode  of  Mounting  for  viewing  Diaphonous 
Bodies  by  reflected  Daylight,  either  in  a  horizontal  or  vertical 
position — Way  of  Viewing  Crystallizations  of  Salts  and  various 
Chemical  Actions— Way  of  Mounting  for  Transparent  Living 
Objects — Method  of  Mounting  the  Diamond  and  Sapphire 
Microscopes  for  Transparent  Objects — Opaque  Objects  — 
Method  of  observing  Opaque  Objects  by  Daylight,  plain  or 
condensed — Silver  Cups  or  Specula — Mounting  for  Dissections, 
&.C.— Mounting  the  Diamond  and  Sapphire  Microscopes  for 
Opaque  Objects — The  Amician  Catadioptric  Engiscope. — By 
C.  R  Goring,  M.D 


Page 


17!> 


APPENDIX 


No.  1. 

On  the  Optieal  Phenomena  of  certain  Crystals. — By  H.  F. 

Talbot,  Esq.  F.R.S 213 

No.  2. 

Further  Observations  on  the  Optical  Phenomena  of  Crystals. 

— By  II.  F.  Talbot,  Esq.  F.R.S. 219 

No     :). 
Exordium.— By  C.  R.  Goring,  M.D 232 

No.    I. 
Swammerdam's  Method  of  Dissecting  and  Preparing  Objects 
for  the  Microscope '211 


ERRATA. 

Page  87,  lines  1  and  14,  for  Chapter  VIII.  read  Chapter  IX. 
—    93,  line  10,  for  Chapter  VII.  read  Chapter  VIII. 


CHAPTER    I. 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS 


APPLICATION  OF  THE  MICROSCOPE  TO  THE  SCIENCES,  WITH 
AN  ACCOUNT  OF  ITS  RECENT  IMPROVEMENTS. 


"  THERE  IS  PROBABLY  NO  BRANCH  OF  PRACTICAL  SCIENCE  WHICH  HAS 
UNDERGONE  SUCH  ESSENTIAL  AND  RAPID  IMPROVEMENTS  AS  THAT  WHICH 
RELATES  TO  THE  MICROSCOPE.  IT  HAS  BECOME  QUITE  A  NEW  INSTRUMENT 
IN  MODERN  TIMES,  AND  IT  PROMISES  TO  BE  THE  MEANS  OF  DISCLOSING 
THE  STRUCTURE  AND  LAWS  OF  MATTER,  AND  OF  MAKING  AS  IMPORTANT 
DISCOVERIES  IN  THE  INFINITELY  MINUTE  WORLD,    AS  THE  TELESCOPE  HAS 

done  in  that  which  is  infinitely  distant." — Sir  David  Brewster*. 


Whtlst  the  mind  dwells  with  the  highest  admiration  on 
the  rapid  advances  which  are  daily  and  hourly  being1 
made  in  the  pursuits  of  science,  we  are  recalled  almost 
naturally  to  what  is  perhaps  one  of  the  most  important 
considerations  connected  with  this  deeply  interesting 
subject, — namely,  how  it  is  that  we  are  thus  enabled  to 
make  discovery  after  discovery  into  the  inexhaustible 
treasures  of  Nature,  and  by  the  help  of  what  machinery 
it  is  that  we  are  making  this  astonishing  progress.  To 
investigate  the  genius  and  faculties  of  the  human  mind, 
the  primum  mobile  in  devising  all  that  is  great  and  all 

*  Encyclopaedia  Britannica,  7th  edit.  art.  Microscope. 
C 


18  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

that  is  valuable,  would  fall  within  the  province  of  the 
profound  metaphysician,  rather  than  that  of  the  practical 
man  of  science  ;  but  to  elucidate  the  methods  by  which 
genius  is  aided  in  its  high  researches  after  truth,  and  in 
conducting  those  researches  to  their  desired  proficiency, 
although  an  occupation  of  a  much  humbler  grade  than 
the  other,  is  one,  nevertheless,  that  is  by  no  means  insig- 
nificant, or  devoid  of  interest. 

Thus,  for  example,  an  illustration  of  the  improvements 
effected  in  the  optical  construction  of  the  telescope,  by 
which  the  astronomer  may  attain  to  a  more  perfect  know- 
ledge of  the  celestial  bodies — by  which  he  may  discover 
worlds  beyond  worlds  innumerable,  and  read  the  laws  by 
which  all  those  worlds  are  governed — cannot  be  deemed 
either  unimportant  or  uninteresting.  The  invention  of 
this  beautiful  instrument  gave  a  powerful  impulse  to  the 
human  mind  towards  the  study  of  astronomy,  and  every 
improvement  since  made  upon  it  has  laid  open  new 
sources  of  knowledge  in  that  science,  and  created  a 
greater  zest  for  its  acquisition.  Even  the  splendid  dis- 
coveries of  the  immortal  Newton  on  the  theory  of  the 
Moon,  until  verified  by  the  observations  of  a  Flamstead, 
by  means  of  astronomical  instruments,  could  not  be 
received  as  the  actual  laws  which  govern  that  satellite. 
Even  since  these  great  discoveries,  which  carried  the 
mind  of  man  into  the  immensity  of  the  heavens,  and 
gave  him  a  far  more  extended  idea  of  the  creative  power 
than  any  thing  could  possibly  have  given  him  before, 
what  has  not  the  astronomer  been  able  to  effect  through 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  19 

the  vast  perfection  to  which  the  telescope  in  more  recent 
times  has  heen  brought  ?  I  need  only  mention  the  dis- 
covery of  the  aberration  of  light ;  the  resolution  of 
nebula?  and  of  the  double  stars  ;  the  motions  of  these 
binary  systems,  and  their  subservience  to  the  same  law 
of  gravitation  as  governs  the  solar  j  the  position  and 
direction  of  the  latter  in  space:  —  I  might  mention  many 
others,  all  equally  important — all  marvellously  grand ! 

And  so  with  respect  to  the  Microscope  in  aiding  to  ex- 
tend our  knowledge  of  the  economy  of  this  planet.  Every 
improvement  in  this  instrument  has  developed  some  im- 
portant feature  in  the  structure  and  design  of  the  almost 
infinitely  varied  organized  beings  of  our  earth.  The 
achromatic  principle,  which  was  at  once  adapted  to  the 
telescope  with  the  most  astonishing  success,  did  not 
produce  the  same  happy  result  on  its  first  application  to 
the  microscope.  The  recent  discovery  of  Dr.  Goring, 
that  the  penetration  of  this  instrument  was  dependent 
upon  the  angle  of  aperture,  or  the  number  of  rays  of 
light  collected  by  the  object-lens  from  every  point  on  the 
surface  of  the  object,  was  requisite  for  the  accomplish- 
ment of  this  desirable  purpose.  By  thus  applying  the 
achromatic  corrections  and  those  for  sphericity  to  this  in- 
strument, it  has  now  been  perfected,  and  elevated  to  a 
grade  nowise  inferior  to  the  telescope.  The  fruits  of 
this  discovery  are  fast  pouring  in  upon  us,  and  promise 
to  yield  a  rich  and  most  abundant  harvest.  We  will  al- 
lude cursorily  to  some  of  those  which  have  been  reaped 
already  ;  a  few  only  will  suffice  to  shew  their  importance; 


20  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

and  to  claim  for  the  microscope  a  high  rank  among" 
optical  instruments. 

The  fact  is,  that  since  the  modern  improvements  the 
microscope  has  undergone,  it  is  being  brought  to  the 
assistance,  and  is  at  the  present  time  furthering  the  pro- 
gress of  almost  every  branch  of  natural  science.  To  the 
Geologist  it  may  be  said  to  be  a  new  instrument.  But  what 
has  it  not  even  now  effected  for  him  ?  In  his  study  of  or- 
ganic life  and  structure,  it  has  unfolded  to  him  the  pre- 
cise characters  of  divers  animals  and  plants  which  inha- 
bited and  clothed  our  earth  in  ages  which  have  long 
passed  away.  Look  at  the  discoveries  of  Agassiz  on  the 
fossil  creatures  of  the  deep  !  By  a  microscopic  investi- 
gation of  such  portions  of  them  as  have  withstood  the 
destructive  power  of  time,  namely,  their  scaly  covering, 
he  has  been  able  so  to  group  and  class  them,  that  the 
characters  and  habits  of  the  genera  belonging  to  each  dis- 
tinct era  are  clearly  demonstrated.  A  microscopic  exa- 
mination also  of  the  testaceous  remains  of  sundry  Ento- 
mostraceans  found  in  slate-clay  formations,  now  ele- 
vated much  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  prove  them  to 
have  been  at  some  time  or  other  imbedded  in  the  waters. 
And  the  Naturalist  may  even  determine  by  his  inspection 
of  the  shell,  whether  the  species  were  the  inhabitants  of 
fresh  or  salt  water,  and  consequently  whether  the  strata 
themselves  were  the  indurated  beds  of  the  sea,  or  of  some 
river  or  lake. 

The  most  perfect  animal  remains  which  the  microscope 
has  disclosed  to  us,  are  the  various  loricated  Infusoria 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  21 

of  the  division  Bacillaria*.     These   minute  creatures  are 
so  inconceivably  numerous  that  they  cover  many  miles 
of  surface  with  several  feet  of  thickness ;  as  instanced 
in  the  polishing-slate  and  rotten-stone  of  Bohemia.     In 
Tuscany  whole  mountains  consist  almost  entirely  of  the 
silicified  shells  of  these  creatures ;  thus  combining  with 
each  other  in  infinite  numbers,  to  counterbalance,  as  it 
were,  their  individual  minuteness,  and  to  teach   the  un- 
thinking this  useful  lesson,  that  Nature,  in   all  her  ope- 
rations, is  never  employed  in  vain,  and  that,  what  are  ap- 
parently her  most  insignificant  productions,  fall  not  be- 
neath the  notice  of  the  profoundest  inquirer  after  truth. 
To  the  Botanist  the  aid  of  the  microscpoe  is  indispen- 
sable.    In  the  investigation  of  our  fossil-flora,  what  does 
it  not  exhibit  to  us  !     How  beautiful  and  delicate   is  the 
structure  of  the  envelope  of  some  of  the  fossil-fruits ;  those, 
for  instance,  of  our  London  clay,  when  viewed  under  this 
instrument!     And  how  important  is  it,  that,   by  its  assis- 
tance, we  can  determine  with  accuracy  the  natural  orders, 
genera,  and  sometimes  the  very  species  of  the  trees  and 
plants  of  former  epochs  !     How,  beyond  all  question,   is 
now   demonstrated   the   vegetable   origin   of  our  coal  ! 
Preserved  within  a  bituminous  lump  of  coal,  which  has 
been  deposited  for  thousands  of  years  deep  in  the  bowels 
of  the  earth,  you  may  discern  not  only  the  woody  fibre, 
its  arrangement,   and   the    disposal     and   form  of   the 
medullary  rays,  but  even  the  most  delicate  of  the  vege- 
table organs,  such  as  the  spiral  vessels  and  the  beautiful 

*  See  Natural  History  of  Animalcules,  page  b'.K 


22  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

terminations  of  those  vessels  !  These  are  as  distinctly 
discoverable  as  in  the  finest  preparations  of  a  recent  plant. 
And  what  can  be  more  amusing  and  instructive  than  the 
examination  of  the  silicified  woods,  when  formed  into 
sections  no  thicker  than  the  paper  of  a  Bank-note? 
Thus  rendered  pervious  to  light,  the  organic  structure  of 
the  wood  becomes  plainly  distinguishable.  And  ema- 
nating from  this,  what  can  be  a  more  interesting  subject 
than  the  inquiry  into  the  mode  in  which  the  silicifying 
process  has  been  carried  on — by  which  the  constituent 
elements  of  the  inmost  and  minutest  portions  are  changed 
—whilst  their  form  and  situation  and  colour  remain  the 
same  ?  In  investigating  also  that  extinct  genus  of  plants, 
the  Lepidodendra,  a  similar  idea  is  raised  in  the  mind,  as 
to  what  must  have  been  the  particular  state  of  the  earth 
with  respect  to  atmosphere  and  temperature  at  the  pe- 
riod of  their  growth,  and  what  the  changes  which  have 
since  taken  place,  in  order  to  bring  it  to  its  present 
condition. 

In  our  physiological  inquiries  into  the  animal  and 
vegetable  productions  of  the  present  time,  the  assistance 
of  the  microscope  is  essentially  requisite.  When  Dr. 
Harvey  made  his  grand  discovery  of  the  circulation  of 
the  blood,  and  first  lectured  upon  it,  in  St.  Bartholo- 
mew's Hospital,  in  1619,  he  was  ridiculed,  and  lost  his 
practice,  through  maintaining  what  was  then  supposed 
to  be  so  absurd  and  wild  a  theory.  The  idea  was 
suggested  to  his  mind  by  reflecting  on  the  valves  of  the 
heart  and  veins,  which  were  evidently  so  planned  as  to 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS.  23 

allow  a  fluid  to  pass  but  one  way.  All  the  philosophical 
reasoning,  however,  of  this  celebrated  man  could  not 
establish,  what  appears  to  us  so  plain  a  truth,  until  it  was 
evidenced  in  the  circulation  of  cold-blooded  animals  by 
means  of  the  microscope,  and  thus  placed  beyond  a 
doubt.  Discerning,  as  we  can  do,  the  very  forms  of  the 
globules  of  that  fluid,  as  they  flow  through  the  capillaries 
from  the  arteries  to  the  veins,  in  obedience  to  the  laws 
impressed  upon  them  by  the  Almighty  Creator — viewing 
this  most  sublime  phenomenon,  by  which  life  itself  is 
diffused  throughout,  and  sustained  in  every  part  of  the 
system — who  can  resist  conviction  of  the  great  truth  ? 

Nor  is  it  a  matter  of  less  importance  in  a  scientific 
point  of  view,  or  less  interesting,  that  by  the  same 
means  we  can  perceive  the  fibrous  structure  of  the 
muscles  and  nerves,  the  form  and  arrangement  of  the 
canals  by  which  the  internal  cavities  of  the  bones  are 
lubricated  and  nourished,  the  glandular  structure  of  that 
beautiful  and  complex  apparatus  by  which  the  secretions*1 
are  carried  on — all,  and  each  of  these,  requiring  but  the 
aid  of  one  of  our  improved  microscopes  to  render  them 
distinctly  visible.  Again  :  how  admirably  developed  by 
means  of  the  microscope  are  the  curious  and  complex 
structures  of  the  eyes  of  insects,  the  crystalline  lenses  of 
those  of  fish,  birds,  &c.f  and  many  of  the  other  parts  of 
the  visual  organs];.     The  eye — that  useful  and  delightful 


*  Nouvelles  Rccherches  sur  la  Structure  de  la  Peau,  par  M.  Breschet. 
I  Philosophical  Transactions,  1833. 
I  Sec  Langentoeck  ou  the  Lye. 


24  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

portion  of  us  which  furnishes  all  the  endless  variety  of 
objects  from  which  we  derive  so  great  enjoyment — 
resembles,  in  its  peculiar  formation  and  arrangement,  an 
achromatic  optical  instrument.  And  if  we  descend  to 
the  lower  classes  of  animals — nay,  I  would  hardly  say 
lower,  lest  some  perhaps  might  imagine  that  in  their 
small  forms  they  do  not  evince  as  much  perfection  as  is 
discoverable  in  beings  of  a  higher  scale,  and  have  not 
all  the  functions  which  are  necessary  to  life  as  full  in 
operation  as  even  man  himself— if  we  enter  upon  an 
investigation  of  their  minute  structures,  we  can  deter- 
mine absolutely  nothing  without  the  microscope ;  and 
our  knowledge  of  the  very  existence  of  many  highly- 
organized  and  active  creatures  is  wholly  dependent 
upon  it. 

Vegetable  organography,  upon  which  the  modern 
botanist  depends  so  much  for  his  systematic  arrangement, 
and  with  which  the  student  is  so  greatly  interested  and 
amused,  owes  almost  its  very  existence  to  the  microscope. 
This  observation  will  be  found  to  apply  in  an  especial 
manner  both  to  the  cellular  and  vascular  tissues  of  plants. 
The  membranous  cellules  of  cellular  tissue  are  some- 
times not  more  than  1- 1000th  of  an  inch  in  diameter; 
and  those  of  the  ordinary  size  are  about  1 -200th  or 
l-300th.  How,  then,  is  it  possible  that  we  could  become 
acquainted  with  their  forms  and  arrangement  but  by  the 
aid  of  the  microscope?  And  so  with  respect  to  vascular 
tissue  :  it  is  absolutely  indispensable  toward  acquiring 
an  accurate  knowledge  of  the  structure  and  forms  of 


INTRODUCTORY   REMARKS.  25 

these  membranous  tubes,  and  of  the  spiral  or  annular 
fibre  which  surrounds  them. 

A  knowledge  of  the  fructification,  if  I  may  so  express 
myself,  of  that  numerous  and  curious  class  of  plants,  the 
Acrogens,  could  not  be  obtained  without  it ;  nor  could 
the  existence  of  many  of  them,  such  as  the  Fungi, 
Lichens,  Algae,  and  some  of  the  Musci,  be  proved.  By 
its  powers  even  the  ashes  of  vegetables  may  be  seen  to 
contain  the  decisive  characteristics  of  organic  structure ; 
and  the  long-debated  question  of  the  antiquarian,  as  to 
whether  the  "  fine  linen  of  Egypt,"  in  the  times  of  the 
Pharaohs,  were  of  linen  or  cotton  fibre,  seeing  the 
latter  is  now  indigenous  to  that  country,  is  for  ever  set 
at  rest. 

In  many  of  the  larger  portions  of  plants,  such  as  the 
cuticle  of  their  leaves,  the  stomata,  &c.  which  require 
but  a  shallow  magnifying  power  to  display  them,  there 
is  as  great  a  difference  manifested  when  these  are  viewed 
under  an  achromatic  microscope,  or  under  the  old  com- 
pound, as  is  perceptible  between  the  most  highly-finished 
miniature,  where  the  most  delicate  features  and  even 
the  down  on  the  skin  are  correctly  depicted,  and  the 
mere  black  and  white  profile,  where  we  see  but  the  rude 
contour  of  the  face.  Surely,  then,  as  works  of  art 
merely,  instruments  which  can  effect  so  much  as  this 
are  justly  entitled  to  a  due  share  of  consideration  even 
from  the  most  refined  and  polished  minds. 

In  the  foregoing  remarks  on  the  application  of  the 
microscope   to  botanical    purposes,    I  have    given    the 


26  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

reader  only  a  general  outline  ;  to  enter  upon  any  thing 
like  details  would  of  necessity  extend  an  introductory 
chapter  of  this  description  far  beyond  its  proper  bounds. 
I  may,  nevertheless,  be  permitted  to  make  use  of  one 
example  by  way  of  illustration.  But  how  shall  I  select 
one  where  the  materials  suited  to  construct  it  are  so 
superabundant,  and  where  they  all  present  so  many 
points  of  interest  ?  It  will  be  readily  admitted  that  this 
is  by  no  means  an  easy  choice.  I  will  limit  my  obser- 
vations, however,  to  a  single  microscopic  slider,  and  see 
what  instruction  is  derivable  from  it.  Suppose  this 
slider  to  contain  some  sections  of  a  recent  or  fossil  wood ; 
for  instance,  three  specimens  or  shavings  of  such  ex- 
treme tenuity,  that  if  they  were  exposed,  they  would  be 
wafted  away  on  the  slightest  breeze.  Let  them  be 
weighed,  and  they  will  not  exceed  a  grain.  Hand  them 
to  the  chemist,  and  he  can  only  prove  to  you  that  their 
primary  constituents  are  oxygen,  hydrogen,  carbon,  &c. 
and  in  so  doing  he  will  destroy  them.  What,  then,  does 
an  inspection  of  them  under  the  microscope  reveal  ?  It 
will  tell  you,  in  the  first  place,  whether  they  grew  up, 
like  our  forest  trees,  by  yearly  additions  to  the  outside  of 
their  woody  centres,  or  by  internal  accessions,  like  most 
of  the  productions  of  the  tropics.  It  will  tell  you 
whether  their  leaves  were  veined  or  not — whether  their 
embryos  were  dicotyledons  or  monocotyledons — whether 
the  trees  from  which  they  were  cut  had  branches  or  not — 
and,  if  they  had,  whether  these  were  thick  and  sturdy, 
like  the  boughs  of  the  oak  ;  or  thin  and  flexible,  like  the 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  2J 

branches  of  the  fir  tribe.  It  will  tell  you  whether  the 
wood  might  be  easily  cleft  asunder,  like  deal;  or  would 
sooner  break,  like  beech  ;  whether  it  was  elastic,  like  the 
pine — so  admirably  suited  for  the  masts  of  ships;  or,  like 
the  stubborn  oak,  would  rather  snap  than  yield  to  the 
wind.  These  are  some  of  the  ordinary  properties  deve- 
loped by  the  microscope. 

Again,  in  taking  a  more  minute  physiological  survey, 
our  information  will  be  by  no  means  less  complete.  For 
these  same  specimens  will  disclose  to  us,  under  the 
microscope,  the  form  and  arrangement  of  their  woody 
fibres,  the  disposition  of  their  barks,  the  beautiful  struc- 
ture of  the  tubular  receptacles,  by  which  their  secretions 
have  been  carried  on  and  their  growth  promoted.  In 
short,  so  much  will  be  revealed  by  them  in  this  manner, 
that  the  actual  distinction  between  a  wild  and  a  culti- 
vated tree  may  be,  in  some  cases,  clearly  traced.  "  Thus, 
in  the  cultivated  cherry,  the  plates  of  the  medullary  rays 
are  very  thin,  the  adhesions  of  them  to  the  bark  are  very 
slight,  and  hence  a  section  of  the  wood  of  that  plant  ex- 
hibits a  pale,  smooth,  homogeneous  appearance ;  but, 
in  the  wild  cherry,  the  medullary  plates  are  much  thicker, 
they  adhere  to  the  bark  by  deep  broad  spaces,  and  are 
arranged  with  great  irregularity,  so  that  a  section  of  the 
wood  of  that  variety  has  a  deeper  colour,  and  a  twisted, 
knotty,  very  uneven  appearance*." 

Should  they  be  specimens  of  endogenous  woods  (ver- 

*  Lindley's  Botany,  page  241. 


28  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

tical  sections  of  which  I  have  at  some  expense  and 
trouble  lately  introduced,)  what  a  volume  of  instruction 
may  be  derived  from  them  !  whilst  the  exquisite  beauty 
and  lace-like  form  of  the  transverse  cuttings  will  bid  de- 
fiance to  every  attempt  at  describing  them  ! 

In  order  that  this  class  of  microscopic  objects  may  be 
rendered  as  useful  as  possible,  it  may  not  be  unimportant 
to  suggest  that  collections  of  thin  sections  of  woods  should 
be  selected  according  to  the  natural  arrangement  of 
plants.  In  the  cases  I  have  lately  mounted,  an  example 
is  given  from  all  the  principal  groups  ;  and  where  the 
genera,  in  any  natural  Order,  are  very  dissimilar,  two 
specimens  are  taken,  for  the  purpose  of  instituting  a 
comparison  between  them. 

I  need  hardly  mention  how  essential  is  the  aid  of  the 
microscope  to  the  Mineralogist  in  determining  the 
crystalline  structure  of  a  body.  In  the  study  of  crys- 
tallography, which  science  may  be  said  to  have  been  for 
a  long  time  almost  at  a  stand-still,  a  very  extensive  field 
of  research  appears  to  be  now  opening  by  the  adaptation 
of  polarized  light  to  a  microscopic  examination  of  minute 
crystals,  thus  eliciting  a  great  variety  of  curious  and 
beautiful  properties,  entirely  unknown  to  the  world  be- 
fore. This  subject  being  as  yet  completely  in  its  infancy,  it 
would  be  unfair  to  expect  an  elucidation  of  it  at  the  present 
time.  To  convey,  however,  some  general  idea  to  the  reader 
of  the  additional  degree  of  interest  which  attaches  to  the 
phenomena  of  crystallization  by  this  happy  contrivance,  it 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  29 

is  only  necessary  to  state,  that  we  have  now  displayed 
to  us  minute  crystals,  with  a  brillancy  and  richness  of 
colouring  that  is  quite  inconceivable.  We  see  the  smallest 
difference  in  their  thickness  marked  by  some  exquisite 
change  of  colour  ;  whilst  the  beautiful  black  cross  in  the 
circularly  arranged  crystals  of  zanthate  of  ammonia,  and 
the  cross  with  the  coloured  rings  in  the  compound  of  phos- 
phoric acid  and  borate  of  soda,  &c.  &c.  excite  our  admi- 
ration beyond  all  bounds.  These  newly-discovered  phe- 
nomena, after  a  patient  investigation,  may  lead  to  results 
highly  interesting,  and  of  great  importance  to  science. 

By  a  simple  modification  of  its  polarizing  apparatus, 
the  microscope  becomes  of  great  value  in  investigating 
some  of  the  physical  properties  of  matter  :  it  is  capable 
of  being  constituted  a  complete  polariscope,  and  made  to 
exhibit  the  phenomena  of  polarization  in  plates  of  crystals 
cut  perpendicular  to  their  axes  ;  for  instance,  the  coloured 
rings,  the  black  cross,  the  tints  of  unannealed  glass,  of 
amethyst,  &c. 

When  relaxing  from  the  stern  pursuit  after  the  exi- 
gencies of  life,  where,  perhaps,  we  may  have  been  in- 
dustriously labouring  to  benefit  the  -condition  of  our- 
selves or  families,  what  a  delightful  and  inexhaustible 
source  of  amusement  is  ever  open  to  us  where  a  good 
microscope  is  at  hand  !  It  is  not  always  an  easy  task  to 
find  innocent  amusement :  to  find  it  blended  with  im- 
provement is  to  find  it  indeed.  We  may,  it  is  true,  be 
entertained  by  the  veriest  trifles  in  life,  but  we  shall  soon 
grow  weary  of  them  ;  and  even  the  converse  of  intimate 


30  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

acquaintances  at  times  becomes  vapid  and  dull.  A  re- 
creation, to  last  beyond  an  hour,  must  be  made  to  instruct 
as  well  as  to  amuse  \  it  must,  to  a  certain  extent,  be 
commensurate  with  what  a  rational  and  intelligent  mind 
is  in  quest  after,  or  we  shall  speedily  be  thrown  upon 
our  resources  to  find  out  a  new  one.  A  good  micro- 
scope, as  I  have  said,  is  a  never- failing  source  of  amuse- 
ment. Were  we  permitted  to  draw  a  comparison  be- 
tween it  and  that  grand  and  noble  instrument,  the  tele- 
scope, we  should  be  compelled  to  admit  that  it  possesses 
very  many  advantages  even  over  that  instrument  in  this 
respect.  We  can  use  it  at  all  times  and  seasons,  and  that 
with  the  greatest  facility.  We  can  invite  our  friends  to 
pass  an  evening  with  us  in  being  gratified  with  its  per- 
formance, without  any  fear  of  encountering  a  disappoint- 
ment. Not  so,  however,  with  the  telescope.  A  few  nights 
only  throughout  the  year  are  what  we  may  term  good  for 
astronomic  purposes,  and  over  these  few  we  can  exercise 
no  control.  Our  friends  may  be  invited — they  may  assem- 
ble— and  the  weather  may  prove  so  inauspicious  as  to 
render  the  finest  instrument  in  the  world  of  no  avail.  And 
even  on  the  clearest  night,  when  all  our  expectations  are 
raised  to  the  highest  pitch,  the  wind  may  suddenly  shift, 
so  as  to  occasion  the  greatest  interruption  ;  so  that,  per- 
haps, the  very  means  we  have  taken  to  expand  and  ele- 
vate our  notions  of  the  infinite  wisdom  and  power  of  the 
Divine  Being,  may  terminate,  through  some  mishap,  in 
ruffling  our  minds,  and  causing  an  effect  the  very 
opposite  to  that  we  had  designed  to  produce. 


INTRODUCTORY   REMARKS.  31 

The  valetudinarian  dare  not  seek  his  pastime  from  the 
employment  of  the  telescope ;  were  he  to  do  so,  his 
career  would  soon  be  stopped,  inasmuch  as  his  remain- 
ing out  exposed  to  a  few  cold,  damp  nights,  would  at 
once  prove  fatal  to  him.  And  even  those  who  are  in  the 
full  enjoyment  of  health  may  suffer  very  materially  by 
prolonging  their  observations  with  a  view  of  attaining  to 
some  proficiency  in  astronomical  pursuits  ;  to  say 
nothing  of  the  inconvenience  it  occasions  by  breaking  in 
upon  that  regularity  which  is  so  essential  to  the  comfort 
and  happiness  of  life.  To  the  professed  astronomer  these 
remarks  are  not  of  course  addressed  ;  with  him  such  dif- 
ficulties as  these  do  not,  and  ought  not,  to  have  any 
weight.  My  object  was  to  institute  something  like  a 
comparison  between  the  telescope  and  the  microscope 
as  to  their  capability  of  affording  rational  amusement  to 
the  generality  of  mankind,  when  it  is  desirable  to  be- 
guile a  vacant  hour,  and  where  our  whole  time  is  not  at 
our  own  disposal.  In  making  out  my  case  in  favour  of 
the  microscope  in  this  respect,  I  may  be  allowed  to  refer 
the  reader  to  such  proof  as  is  afforded  by  the  subjects 
treated  of  in  the  first  three  chapters  of  this  work. 

"  These,"  saysDr.  Goring,  whenspeakingoflivingobjects 
viewed  under  the  microscope,  "  experience  has  shewn  to 
excite  the  strongest  emotions  of  pleasure  and  satisfaction 
in  the  great  mass  of  observers  of  all  ranks,  whom  I 
have  always  found  to  be  most  delighted  by  comparatively 
large  living  objects,  seen  with  medium  powers.  In  fact, 
they  seem  to  afford  the  same  sort  of  gratification  with  a 


32  MTCROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATrONS. 

menagerie  of  living  wild  beasts  on  the  large  scale  ;  and 
most  certainly  many  of  them  wonderfully  emulate  the 
ferocity,  voracity,  cunning,  and  cruelty  of  the  mammalia. 
They  prey  on  each  other,  and  fight  with  a  degree  of 
determined  obstinacy,  not  inferior  to  that  of  any  beings 
whatever.  They  have  likewise  a  thousand  diverting 
pranks  and  humours,  quite  peculiar  to  themselves.  In 
addition  to  these  amiable  and  amusing  qualities,  they 
possess  such  a  high  degree  of  transparency,  that  their 
unique  and  beautiful  internal  machinery  is  as  clearly 
perceptible  as  if  they  were  made  of  glass  ;  so  that,  with- 
out any  dissection,  we  can  unravel  all  the  mysterious 
workings  of  their  nature ;  such  as  the  circulation  of  the 
blood,  the  pulsations  of  the  heart,  the  peristaltic  motion 
of  the  intestines,  and  the  play  of  every  muscular  fibre. 
This  property  of  transparency  is  not  possessed  by  any 
other  living  beings  with  which  I  am  acquainted,  except 
the  Animalcula  infusoria.  I  may  observe,  that  no  perfect 
insects  present  so  many  facilities  for  adaptation  to  the 
microscope,  or  can  be  so  easily  preserved  and  managed; 
so  that  the  larvse,  &c.  appear  to  me  peculiarly  and  ex- 
clusively devoted  to  the  consideration  of  microscopists*." 
Having  now  given  a  brief  outline  of  the  uses  to  which 
the  microscope  may  be  applied,  we  will  proceed  to  con- 
sider those  practical  improvements  which,  in  modern 
times,  the  instrument  itself  has  undergone,  and  which, 
step  by  step,  have  at  length  brought  it  to  its  present 
high  state  of  perfection. 

*  Exordium,  first  edition,  p.  6. 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS.  33 

Microscopes  may  be  classed  under  two  denomina- 
tions, simple  and  compound. 
The  simple  microscope  presents  an  object  to  our  view 
under  a  greater  angle  than  that  which  it  is  seen  under 
when  viewed  by  the  naked  eye  ;  whence  it  is  that  the 
impression  is  derived  of  it  being  amplified  or  magnified. 
The  amount  of  this  amplification  will  be  in  precisely  the 
same  ratio  as  that  when  a  person  is  seen  at  different 
distances  from  us  :  the  nearer  he  is,  the  greater  is  the 
angle  he  will  be  viewed  under ;  and  so  vice  versa. 
Hence  it  is,  that  a  lens  which  will  admit  of  an  object 
being  placed  within  one  inch  of  it,  will  amplify  twice* 
as  much  as  another  the  focal  length  of  which  is  two 
inches.  This  quality,  viz.  the  focal  length  of  a  lens,  or 
its  power  of  admitting  an  object  within  a  definite  distance, 
so  that  it  may  be  distinctly  visible,  is  obtained  by  giving 
to  the  surface  of  any  transparent  medium  (say  glass)  a 
spherical  or  other  curved  figure.  Now  it  will  be  evident 
that,  on  account  of  the  curvature  which  is  thus  given, 
the  rays  of  light  which  proceed  from  any  given  point  in 
an  object  to  the  middle  of  the  lens  will  pass  in  a  more 
direct  course  through  it  (assuming  the  lens  to  be  convex) 
than  those  which  proceed  from  the  same  point  to  the 
outside  or  edges ;  and  consequently  the  former  will  be 
less  refracted  or  bent  in  their  passage  than  the  latter. 
All  the  rays,  therefore,  after  permeation,  will  not  proceed 
towards  the  same  point  in  the  axis  of  the  lens,  but 
crossing  it  at  different  distances  they  will   enter  the  eye 

*   Sec  Mirrofjrapliifi,  pnero  63< 
D 


34  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

confusedly,  and  produce  a  nebulous  or  indistinct  impres- 
sion of  the  magnified  object.  This  defect  is  commonly 
designated  spherical  aberration.  Another  obstruction  to 
perfect  vision  is  occasioned  by  the  effect  produced  upon 
the  light  itself,  when  passing  from  one  medium  into 
another  of  different  density.  Light  (say  common  white 
light)  is  a  compound  of  coloured  lights,  which  are  not 
equally  refrangible ;  that  is,  some  of  the  colours  are 
more  powerfully  acted  upon  by  a  refracting  body  than 
others  ;  so  that  a  white  ray,  when  it  enters  a  lens,  is  more 
or  less  broken  up  and  separated  into  its  coloured  con- 
stituents, which  gives  a  semblance  of  colouring  to  the 
object  Ave  are  viewing.  This  defect  is  termed  chromatic 
aberration,  or  dispersion. 

These  two  great  defects  are  to  be  obviated  in  con- 
structing a  microscope.  Until  within  a  few  years,  the 
lens  of  a  simple  microscope  consisted  of  a  single  piece  of 
glass  made  into  a  curved  form,  or  a  spherule.  In  order 
to  increase  its  magnifying  power,  i.  e.  in  order  to  admit 
an  object  being  placed  very  near  the  lens,  so  that  it 
might  be  viewed  under  a  greater  angle,  Di  Torre, 
Leeuwenhoek,  and  others,  constructed  lenses  of  spherules 
of  exceeding  minuteness — some,  it  is  recorded,  with  a 
focal  length  of  not  more  than  1 -700th  or  1-  800th  part  of 
an  inch.  This  method  of  obtaining  high  magnifying 
powers  was  attended  with  so  much  inconvenience  in 
practice  that  it  counterbalanced  all  the  advantages  which 
would  otherwise  have  resulted  from  it.  Whilst  the 
obstructions  to  vision  just  mentioned,  viz.  spherical  and 


INTRODUCTORY   REMARKS.  35 

chromatic  aberration,  were  obliged  to  be  remedied  in 
a  low  power  by  placing  a  diaphragm  or  stop  behind  the 
lens,  so  as  to  reduce  the  aperture ;  by  which  means  so 
much  of  the  light  transmitted  by  the  lens  was  cut  off,  that 
the  delicate  structure  of  an  object  was  hardly  visible  for 
want  of  light. 

The  calculations  of  Euler  and  other  mathematicians 
were  soon  directed  towards  finding  out  such  forms  for 
single  lenses  as  would  occasion  the  minimum  quantity 
of  aberration.  Still,  the  microscope  derived  but  little 
practical  advantage  from  their  investigations  ;  and  the 
reason  of  it  I  apprehend  was  this :  their  formulae  were 
all  calculated  for  lenses  of  very  small  angular  aperture, 
whilst  the  goodness  of  a  lens  for  the  microscope  depends 
upon  the  opposite  extreme. 

In  1824,  in  consequence  of  Sir  D.  Brewster's  remarks 
on  the  diamond,  I  commenced  making  lenses  of  precious 
stones*.  These,  when  the  stones  are  clear,  free  from 
flaws,  and  from  double  refraction,  are  the  most  perfect 
single  magnifiers  we  at  present  possess. 

From  the  period  just  named,  a  new  era  sprang  up  in 
the  history  of  the  microscope.  In  1829|,  Dr.  Wollaston 
sent  forth  to  the  world  his  doublet  lens,  which  consisted 
of  two  plano-convex  glasses.  This  invention,  the  result 
of  experiment,  caused  a  most  astonishing  alteration  for 
the  better  in  the  constructing  of  microscopes.  It  sug- 
gested the  idea  of  employing  more  than  one  glass  in 

*  See  Microscopic  Cabinet,  chap.  14. 
t  Philosophical  Transactions,  1830. 


36  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

constituting  a  deep  magnifier  ;  and  the  consequence  was, 
that  we  had  soon  devised  for  us  a  triplet,  composed  of 
three  plano-convex  lenses,  which  is  by  far  the  most 
perfect  construction  employed  in  simple  microscopes. 
I  may  remark,  however,  that  the  use  of  these  compound 
magnifiers  is  limited  to  the  examining  of  delicate  trans- 
parent objects  which  admit  of  being  brought  almost  in 
contact  with  the  lens.  I  may  mention  another  improve- 
ment, though  perhaps  rather  prematurely,  viz.  that  the 
achromatic  object-glass  may  be  used  as  a  simple  micro- 
scope, and  with  very  great  advantage  when  the  magni- 
fying power  is  moderate*. 

We  now  proceed  to  consider  the  improvements  which 
have  been  made  in  compound  microscopes.  The  com- 
pound, unlike  the  simple  microscope,  in  which  we  look 
through  the  magnifier  at  the  object  itself,  is  furnished 
with  a  second  magnifier,  designated  the  eye-piece,  through 
which  the  sight  is  directed,  not  to  the  object,  but  to  an 
image  of  it,  which  has  been  magnified  by  the  first  lens, 
or,  as  it  is  called,  the  object-ylass.  Now,  we  have  noticed 
that  the  best  magnifiers  of  simple  microscopes  are  in  fact 
compounds,  being  composed  of  two  or  three  lenses  ;  but 
yet  they  have  not  the  double  action  of  a  compound 
microscope,  even  should  it  be  composed  of  only  two 
lenses.  Dr.  Goring,  however,  to  prevent  any  confusion 
arising  between  the  one  and  the  other,  proposed  the 

*  See  Chapter  X. 


INTRODUCTORY  RKMARKS.  37 

name  of  Engiscope*  for  the  instrument  we  are  now 
considering. 

In  this  instrument,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that 
the  object-glass  forming  the  image,  which  is  to  undergo 
a  second  amplification  by  the  eye-glass  before  it  meets 
the  eye,  should  be  as  perfect  as  it  can  possibly  be  made  ; 
becauge,  every  error  occasioned  by  it  will  be  magnified 
by  the  eye-glass,  and  thus  cause  very  great  confusion. 
Dr.  Goring  having  this  in  view,  directed  the  late  Mr. 
William  Tulley,  in  1824,  to  make  him  a  triple  achromatic 
object-glass,  for  a  compound  microscope.  With  this, 
after  many  trials,  during  which  the  Doctor  had  contrived 
to  enlarge  the  aperture  of  his  lens,  he  found  that  he 
could  distinguish  some  delicate  markings  on  certain 
animal  tissues,  which,  with  equal  magnifying  powers 
having  less  aperture,  he  had  not  been  able  to  discern. 

Hence  originated  the  discovery,  that  the  penetration 
of  a  microscope  is  dependent  upon  the  angle  of  aperture 
of  its  object-glass. 

As  this  discovery  has  tended,  in  a  great  measure,  to 
bring  the  microscope  to  a  high  state  of  perfection,  I  may 
be  permitted  to  give  a  familiar  explanation  of  the  reason 
why  an  increase  of  aperture  is  so  efficacious.  For  the 
details  of  the  subject,  the  reader  is  referred  to  Dr. 
Goring's  own  account,  in  the  Micrographia,  Chap.  VII. 
I  am  the  more  anxious  to  give  this  explanation,  because 
many  persons  are  at  a  loss  to  conceive  how  it  is  that  in 
a  compound  achromatic  microscope,  where  the  light  has 

*  See  Chapter  VII. 


38  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

to  pass  through  several  glasses,  each  of  which  impedes  a 
portion  of  the  rays,  whilst  others  are  lost  by  reflection  at 
the  surfaces,  that  more  should  remain  for  the  purpose 
required  than  when  a  single  glass  is  employed. 

Every  one  who  has  considered  the  subject  at  all,  will 
understand  that  by  a  series  of  glasses  of  different  media, 
aberrations,  &c.  may  be  corrected  and  almost  entirely 
dismissed  ;  but  it  is  not  so  readily  perceived  how  a 
compound  microscope,  having  a  series  of  glasses,  can, 
with  less  illumination,  give  a  brighter  and  more  vivid 
picture,  with  more  of  the  detail  or  minute  structure  of 
an  object,  than  can  be  obtained  with  greater  illumination, 
by  a  single  lens.  In  this  particular,  however,  consists 
the  main  advantage  of  an  achromatic. 

Let  me  premise  that,  in  order  to  render  any  object 
visible,  it  is  necessary  that  rays  of  light  should  proceed 
from  it,  either  by  reflection  from  its  surface,  or  by  trans- 
mission through  it,  to  the  eye.  Again,  if  the  number  of 
rays  be  insufficient,  the  object  cannot  be  seen,  notwith- 
standing we  employ  a  microscope  for  the  purpose. 
Bearing  this  in  mind,  I  will  endeavour  to  explain  how 
an  increase  of  angular  aperture  in  an  object-glass, 
independent  of  any  increase  of  its  magnifying  power, 
will  admit  a  greater  quantity  of  light  from  any  given 
point  on  the  surface  of  an  object  to  pass  through  the  lens, 
so  as  to  render  the  structure  of  the  object  visible. 

Let  a,  and  «,  represent  two  objects,  in  all  respects 
alike,  and  let  us  employ  two  microscopes,  of  equal 
magnifying  powers,  for  the  purpose  of  viewing  them. 


INTRODUCTORY   REMARKS. 


39 


Suppose  that  we  are  going  to  look  at  some  spot  on  the 
surface  of  a,  or  a,  which  we  will  imagine  to  be  a  delicate 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


tissue.  By  a  well-known  law  of  light,  the  rays  proceed 
in  right  lines,  in  all  directions,  from  this  spot,  in  the 
manner  shewn  by  the  dotted  lines  in  both  figures. 
Suppose  b,  b,  and  b,  b,  to  be  two  object-glasses,  of  equal 
focal  lengths ;  the  former  a  single  lens,  of  the  best 
construction,  such  as  was  used  in  the  old  compound 
microscope,  and  the  latter  a  lens  of  the  newest  form, 
termed  an  achromatic.  Now,  these  object-glasses  will 
form  their  respective  images  at  i,  and  i,  and  they  will  be 
of  equal  dimensions.  But  if  the  number  of  rays  pro- 
ceeding from  a,  and  falling  upon  the  single  lens    b,  h,  is 


40  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

not  enough,  when  collected  at  i,  sufficiently  to  stimulate 
the  eye,  any  minute  pore,  striae,  or  other  marking  at  a, 
will  not  be  rendered  visible ;  whilst,  from  the  increase 
of  aperture  in  the  achromatic  lens,  b,  b,  allowing  much 
more  light  from  a,  to  fall  upon  it,  and  to  be  transmitted 
through  it  and  collected  at  i,  every  marking,  &c.  at  a, 
will  be  clearly  represented  at  i ;  and  the  eye,  being 
powerfully  acted  upon  by  this  increase  of  light,  will 
become  highly  sensible  of  it. 

The  angles  b,  a,  b,  and  b,  a,  b,  are  the  angles  of  aperture 
of  the  respective  object-glasses  ;  and  the  quantity  of 
light  collected  and  transmitted  by  each  will  be  as  the 
squares  of  b,  b,  and  b,  b,  the  focal  lengths  being  equal. 
Hence  it  is  that  the  power  of  a  microscope,  or  that 
faculty  it  possesses  to  render  the  structure  of  an  object 
visible,  depends  upon  the  angle  of  aperture  of  its  object- 
glass,  and  not  upon  its  magnifying  power  alone. 

But  it  may  be  supposed,  perhaps,  from  this  reasoning, 
that  if  we  throw  a  greater  quantity  of  light  upon  an 
object,  so  that  more  may  be  collected  by  the  object-glass, 
we  shall  be  the  better  able  to  define  its  structure  ;  which 
would  probably  be  the  case  if  the  additional  light  could 
be  thrown  only  upon  those  minute  parts  which  we  wish 
to  examine,  and  not  upon  the  whole  object.  But  as  we 
cannot  do  this — as  the  increase  of  illumination  cannot  be 
made  to  increase  the  relative  proportions  of  light  which 
proceed  from  these  minute  parts,  the  intended  advantage 
will  not  be  derived. 

Having  shewn,   however,    that   the    goodness     of    a 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  41 

microscope  is  chiefly  dependant  upon  the  angle  of  aper- 
ture of  its  object-glass,  (freed  from  the  aberrations  just 
mentioned),  it  is  of  some  importance  to  be  able  to  mea- 
sure this  angle  with  accuracy.  When  the  object-glass 
consists  of  a  single  lens,  or  of  two  cemented  together, 
its  angle  of  aperture  may  be  easily  determined  by  the 
actual  measurement  of  its  acting  focal  length  and 
diameter.  But  if  it  consist  of  two  or  three  pairs  of  lenses, 
not  in  contact  with  each  other,  this  mode  of  measure- 
ment will  not  give  a  correct  result.  The  simplest  and 
best  method  in  such  cases,  and  indeed  I  may  say  in  all 
cases,  is  by  means  of  the  Microscope-gnomeometer,  de- 
scribed at  page  218  of  the  Microscopic  Cabinet. 

Considering  what  has  been  just  stated,  I  proposed,  in 
1835,  that  achromatic  object-glasses  should  be  applied  to 
the  micrometer  microscopes  which  were  made  use  of  for 
reading  off  the  divisions  whilst  making  the  trigonome- 
trical survey  of  Ireland.  They  have  since  been  used  by 
astronomers  for  similar  purposes  in  the  microscopes 
attached  to  transit  circles  ;  the  advantage  of  which  is,  that 
observations  can  be  read  off  much  longer  in  the  twilight 
of  an  evening  without  artificial  illumination  ;  thus  caus- 
ing less  fatigue  to  the  eye  than  is  experienced  by  looking 
alternately  at  objects  illuminated  by  different  coloured 
lights. 

Lest  it  should  be  imagined  that  I  have  dwelt  somewhat 
too  much  upon  the  subject  of  angular  aperture,  I  will  ad- 
duce a  case  in  point  to  shew  the  necessity  of  its  being 
better  understood  than  it  is.     I  have  in  my  possession   at 


42  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

this  moment  a  triple  object-glass,  evidently  made  in 
imitation  of  one  of  Mr.  Tulley's  achromatics.  In  con* 
structing  it,  however,  the  optician,  a  person  of  great 
respectability,  was  so  unacquainted  with  what  an  achro- 
matic is  designed  to  effect,  that  he  actually  placed  a  stop 
behind  the  lenses,  so  that,  notwithstanding  the  focal 
length  does  not  exceed  half  an  inch,  an  angle  of  aperture 
of  only  7  degrees  is  obtained.  This  object-glass  of  course 
is  inferior  to  a  common  lens :  and  hence  has  originated 
the  erroneous  notion  that  the  introduction  of  achromatics 
has  been  no  improvement  to  microscopes. 

Should  the  question  arise,  why  a  single  lens,  or  a  com- 
bination of  convex  ones,  cannot  be  mounted  so  as  to  have 
an  angle  of  aperture  equal  to  that  in  achromatics,  the 
answer  is,  that  it  can  be  done  :  I  have  often  done  it ;  and 
it  affords  an  excellent  method  of  shewing  by  comparison 
the  vast  superiority  of  the  latter  over  the  former.  Long 
eXperience  has  taught  the  optician  that  common  lenses, 
when  mounted  in  this  manner,  occasion  such  great  aber- 
rations that  there  is  no  possibility  of  obtaining  any  thing 
approaching  to  a  distinctness  of  vision.  Hence  has 
arisen  the  necessity  of  placing  a  small  stop  behind  them  j 
the  effect  of  which  being  to  transmit  only  a  small  pencil 
of  the  light  collected  by  the  glass,  the  chromatism  is  re- 
duced and  rendered  imperceptible.  So  effectually,  indeed, 
is  this  accomplished,  that  when  one  of  our  ablest  philoso- 
phers was  told  by  Dr.  Goring  that  he  proposed  to  make  the 
object-glasses  of  microscopes  achromatic,  he  exclaimed, 
"  I  thought  they  had  always  been  so  constructed." 


INTRODUCTORY   RKMARKS.  43 

The  first  effective  achromatic  object-glass  for  a  micros- 
cope was  made,  under  the  direction  of  Dr.  Goring,  by  the 
late  Mr.  W.  Tulley,  in  1824.  It  consisted  of  three  lenses,  a 
concave  inclosed  within  two  convex  ones.  From  its 
great  thickness,  when  compared  with  the  ordinary  object- 
glass,  it  received  the  appellation  of  the  thick*  aplanatic 
object-glass  for  diverging  rays. 

It  appears  that  the  celebrated  Professor  Amici,  of 
Florence,  constructed  some  achromatics  about  the  year 
1815,  but  the  happy  discovery  of  test  objects  not  being 
then  made,  nor  the  value  of  angular  aperture  understood, 
they  were  abandoned  as  useless  at  that  period.  In  this 
country  Mr.  Tulley  went  on  improving  the  triple  form  he 
had  adopted  ;  and  notwithstanding  he  found  it  extremely 
difficult  to  work  it  on  a  small  scale,  and  was  thus  obliged, 
in  order  to  get  magnifying  power,  to  have  recourse  to  a 
long  body  and  a  deep  eye-piece,  still  he  made  the  angle 
of  aperture  as  large  as  he  well  could.  The  foci  of  his 
object-glasses  were  about  9-10ths  of  an  inch,  and 
the  angular  aperture  18  degrees.  Subsequently  he  in- 
creased the  angle  to  38  degrees,  by  placing  another 
triple  achromatic  before  it  of  6-10ths,  so  that  the  acting 
focus  of  the  combination  was  only  3-8ths  of  an  inch. 

The  objections  to  this  arrangement  are,  that  it  is  liable 
to  get  out  of  adjustment — that  it  has  twelve  reflecting 
surfaces,  the  lenses  not  being  cemented  together — and 
that  it  cannot  be  worked  of  very  short  focus.  It  is  con- 
siderably easier  to  obtain  any  given  angle  of  aperture 

*  See  a  section  of  it,  drawn  in  plate  3  of  the  Micrographia. 


44  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

with  combinations  of  short  foci  than  with  shallow  lenses  ; 
so  much  so,  indeed,  that  60  or  70  degrees  with  a  focal 
length  of  l-10th  of  an  inch  is  gained  with  as  great  facility 
as  20  degrees  with  an  inch  focus.  Thus,  in  proportion 
to  the  minuteness  and  delicacy  of  an  object,  the  focus 
must  be  shortened,  if  we  would  have  a  suitable  penetra- 
tion ;  otherwise,  the  labour  and  time  expended  upon  cor- 
recting the  pencils  of  light,  more  especially  the  oblique 
ones,  will  be  immense.  The  best  proportions  of  angular 
aperture  to  focal  length  are  treated  of  in  another  part  of 
this  work. 

About  the  time  of  Dr.  Goring's  applying  achromatics 
to  the  microscope,  M.  Sellique,  in  France,  invented  and 
executed  a  new  description  of  object-glass,  part  of  the 
arrangement  of  which,  on  account  of  the  many  advantages 
it  possesses,  is,  and  will  probably  continue  to  be,  adhered 
to  by  opticians.  Its  novelty  and  chief  merit  were,  that  it 
consisted  of  several  pairs  of  corrected  lenses  ;  each  pair 
having  a  plano-concave  of  flint  glass,  and  a  double  convex 
of  plate  glass,  cemented  with  mastic  varnish.  The  latter 
of  these  lenses  was  turned  towards  the  object ;  by  reason 
of  which,  as  well  as  from  the  want  of  angular  aperture, 
the  combination  was  not  so  effective  as  it  was  afterwards 
rendered.  The  genius  of  M.  Chevalier,  of  Paris,  soon 
led  him  to  perceive  some  of  these  defects.  He  saw  at 
once  that  the  plan  of  combining  thin  pairs  of  lenses 
greatly  diminished  the  chromatic  dispersion,  and  he  saw 
also  that  the  placing  the  convex  lens  next  the  object  must 
necessarily  increase  the  aberration  from  sphericity.     He 


INTRODUCTORY   REMARKS.  45 

therefore  mounted  his  glasses  with  the  flat  side  of  the 
flint  lens  foremost,  and  he  made  the  whole  still  more 
valuable  by  the  superiority  of  his  workmanship.  It  was 
not,  however,  until  these  object-glasses  arrived  in  this 
country,  and  their  aperture  was  increased  by  Dr.  Goring, 
that  their  full  effect  was  brought  out. 

In  the  early  productions  of  M.  Chevalier,  the  foci  of 
the  different  pairs  of  lenses  composingan  object-glass  were 
of  unequal  lengths  ;  the  anterior  pair  having  the  shortest, 
and  the  posterior  the  longest  focus.  Some  of  these  sets 
were  admirably  corrected  ;  and  it  is  much  to  be  regretted 
that  on  account  of  the  comparative  difficulty  there  is  in 
this  plan  of  constructing  them,  he  should  have  been  in- 
duced to  make  the  pairs  of  equal  foci,  by  doing  which  the 
maximum  of  angular  aperture  cannot  be  obtained  together 
with  a  fine  definition.  When  we  consider  the  errors  which 
are  to  be  corrected  in  an  object-glass,  in  order  that  it  may 
produce  a  magnified  representation  of  an  object  suffi- 
ciently perfect  for  it  to  undergo  a  second  amplification  by 
the  eye-piece  ;  and  when  we  consider  further  that  many 
errors,  which  under  ordinary  circumstances  are  barely 
appreciable,  become  very  evident  as  soon  as  some  prin- 
cipal error  is  subdued,  it  is  not  surprising  that  the  achro- 
matic construction  has  been  so  long  progressing  towards 
its  present  state  of  perfection.  To  say  nothing  of  sphe- 
rical and  chromatic  aberration,  before  mentioned,  it  is 
no  easy  task  to  correct  for  the  central  and  oblique  pencils, 
so  as  to  obtain  a  moderately  flat  field  ;  the  more  especially 
when  we  consider  how  restricted  we  are  to  certain  forms 


46  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

in  our  lenses,  through  the  necessity  of  their  being 
cemented  together  to  prevent  loss  of  light.  To  say 
nothing  of  the  errors  arising  from  the  irrationality  of 
the  spectrum — of  the  difficulty  there  is  in  centering  and 
adjusting  the  lenses — of  the  minuteness  of  the  scale  upon 
which  the  whole  is  constructed,  insomuch  that  the 
slightest  variation  in  the  thickness  of  a  lens  (imperceptible 
to  the  eye  of  a  workman)  is  quite  enough  to  alter  the. 
state  of  the  aberrations  in  finely  corrected  object-glasses 
of  great  angular  aperture  ;  nay,  that  even  the  thickness 
of  the  film  of  glass,  or  mica,  used  for  the  purpose  of  pre- 
serving an  object,  may  do  this — it  is  not  difficult  to  under- 
stand that  there  have  been  great  obstacles  to  surmount 
in  constructing  an  achromatic. 

The  talented  Professor  Amici,  about  the  period  of  his 
first  attempt  at  achromatics,  invented  a  reflecting  micros- 
cope. This  instrument  not  having  any  chromatic  disper- 
sion to  contend  with,  and  only  one  surface  to  be  figured, 
was  soon  constructed  with  a  considerable  angle  of  aper- 
ture. Hence  its  performance  so  far  excelled  that  of  any 
other,  that  he  was  induced  to  lay  aside  his  refracting 
microscope  at  that  time. 

When  an  account  of  this  microscope  reached  this 
country,  Dr.  Goring,  in  1824,  suggested  the  idea  of 
working  its  concave  ellipsoidal  surface  with  a  shorter 
focus  and  a  larger  angle  of  aperture.  Now,  although 
the  working  of  a  metal  is  in  itself  more  difficult  than  the 
forming  a  surface  to  a  lens,  yet  the  whole  thing  exhibited 
so  many  facilities  over  the  constructing  of  an  achromatic 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS.  4/ 

lens,  that  a  skilful  artist  found  but  comparatively  little 
difficulty  in  succeeding.  For,  look  at  the  loss  of  time 
which  must  of  necessity  be  incurred  in  making  trial  of 
an  achromatic.  Every  time  each  lens  has  to  be  tried,  it 
must  be  removed  from  its  holder,  the  cement  cleared  off, 
and  then  placed  in  its  setting;  whereas  a  metal  is 
always  ready;  and  there  are  no  refractive  or  dispersive 
powers  to  be  ascertained,  as  with  lenses,  so  that  the 
Amician  reflecting  microscopes  were  soon  brought  to 
their  most  perfect  condition.  They  have  been  made 
with  an  angular  aperture  of  55  degrees,  greatly  surpassing 
all  the  achromatics  of  that  time. 

The  improved  Amician  microscope  soon  became  a 
decided  favourite  with  amateurs,  and  had  it  not  been  that 
considerable  tact  and  experience  were  required,  in 
bringing  out  "its  mettle,"  and  that  its  range  of  effective 
powers  was  limited,  it  would  never,  perhaps,  have  been 
driven  out  of  the  field  by  our  present  achromatic  micro- 
scopes. I  was  soon  convinced  that  of  the  three  instru- 
ments— the  Jewel-doublet,  the  Amician  reflector,  and 
the  Achromatic — the  latter  would  ultimately  come  into 
general  use.  And  entertaining  this  view  of  the  subject, 
I  published,  in  conjunction  with  Dr.  Goring,  a  very  full 
account  of  the  method  by  which  an  artist  may  test  the 
value  of  his  productions,  and  know  whether  or  not  he  is 
proceeding  in  the  right  path ;  for  I  conceive  that  it  is  of 
no  trivial  import  to  have  the  causes  of  defects  pointed 
out,  when  we  desire  to  correct  them.  Since  this  publica- 
tion in  the  Microscopic  Cabinet,  other  artists  besides  the 


48  :  icroscopic  illustrations. 

late  Mr.  Tulley  have  succeeded  in  producing  achromatic 
object-glasses. 

In  the  same  work,  the  amateur  is  made  acquainted 
with  a  class  of  curiously  organized  bodies,  which  re- 
quire a  certain  degree  of  perfection  in  a  microscope  to 
render  their  structure  visible,  and  thus  enabled  to  exercise 
a  salutary  check  over  the  workman.  Since  this  work 
appeared,  the  achromatic  microscope  has  been  elevated 
to  such  a  pitch  of  excellence  in  this  country  that  it  stands 
unrivalled  throughout  the  world.  We  can  now  construct 
object-glasses  with  angles  of  aperture  of  great  extent, 
and  with  the  aberrations  so  accurately  neutralized,  that 
hardly  any  thing  remains  but  the  colouring  from  the  se- 
condary spectrum,  or  that  which  is  occasioned  by  the 
irrationality  of  the  dispersive  powers  of  the  different 
media  employed  in  their  construction.  It  is  not  to  be 
expected  that  much  more  can  be  done ;  unless,  indeed, 
other  substances  could  be  found  for  the  making  of  lenses, 
such  as  will  obviate  those  defects,  which  it  is  impossible 
for  the  workman  to  remedy  with  his  present  materials. 

Many  valuable  and  interesting  additions  to  microscopic 
science  have  been  made  from  time  to  time  by  Sir  David 
Brewster;  these  should  not  be  passed  over  without 
proper  notice;  but  since  Sir  David  has  so  ably  described 
them  himself,  it  is  far  more  becoming  in  me  to  refer  the 
reader  to  his  works,  than  to  enter  upon  an  explanation  of 
their  merits  in  this  place. 

Our  observations  have  been  hitherto  directed  almost 
exclusively  to  the  optical  portion  of  microscopes,  and 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS.  40 

more  especially  to  the  object-glasses  of  compounds  ;  eye- 
pieces not  having-  been  so  much  attended  to  of  late,  unless, 
indeed,  by  Professor  Airey  and  Mr  Coddington.  We  must 
not,  however,  omit  to  mention  Dr.  Goring's  plan  for  con- 
structing these  of  corrected  lenses;  an  improvement 
which  has  been  carried  into  effect  at  Vienna. 

A  few  words  may  be  added  on  the  subject  of  mounting 
these  instruments  for  use;  a  consideration  of  so  much 
importance,  that,  if  it  be  not  duly  regarded,  the  most,  per- 
fect object-glass  will  be  comparatively  of  little  value. 
I  have  seen  many  simple  microscopes  on  stands  so  suit- 
ably formed,  that  a  great  deal  more  might  be  done  with 
them,  than  with  fme  achromatics  badly  mounted.  The 
necessity  of  having  convenient  stands  for  microscopes 
seems  not  to  be  much  attended  to,  as  yet,  on  the  conti- 
nent, theirs  being  seldom  suited  for  more  than  one  class 
of  observations.  I  would  not  be  understood  as  disre- 
garding the  nicety  of  their  workmanship ;  on  the  contrary, 
the  beautiful  finish  they  give  to  their  productions  is 
hardly  to  be  surpassed  by  us.  As  a  large  portion  of  this 
work  is  devoted  to  the  mechanical  part  of  the  microscope, 
it  is  unnecessary  for  me  to  enlarge  upon  it  here ;  I  may 
observe,  however,  that  since  the  publication  of  the  first 
edition,  considerable  attention  has  been  bestowed  upon 
this  subject,  and  that  the  principles  herein  laid  down  are 
more  or  less  adopted  in  the  construction  of  all  modern 
instruments. 


E 


50 


CHAPTER  II. 

On  the  Larva  and  Pupa  of  a  Straw-coloured  Plumed 
Culex  or  Gnat. 


Tipula  cristallina  of  De  Geer. 
Chironomus  plumicornis  of  Fabricius. 
Corethra  plumicornis  of  Stephens. 

Transparency  is  a  quality  so  essential  to  the  display  of 
the  internal  organization  of  living-  objects,  that  many 
devoid  of  it  are  often  disregarded,  as  of  comparatively 
little  interest.  The  object  now  before  us,  however,  is  so 
remarkably  pervious  to  light,  that  under  the  microscope 
we  are  enabled  to  view  every  part  of  its  interior  structure 
with  facility.  Indeed,  it  is  diaphanous  in  such  a  degree 
as  to  render  it  difficult  to  be  discovered  in  the  waters  in 
which  it  resides,  for  it  assimilates  nearly  in  colour  to 
them,  during  the  infant  part  of  its  larva  state. 


STRAW-COLOURED    GNAT.  51 

Had  its  pellucid  nature  been  its  only  quality,  as  an 
object  for  the  microscope,  it  would  have  been  worthy  of 
attention ;  but  it  possesses  others  which  render  it  a  sub- 
ject of  the  highest  admiration  to  all  who  have  seen  it 
under  a  good  instrument. 

This  larva,  which  is  produced  from  an  egg  deposited 
by  the  perfect  insect,  inhabits  still  waters,  and  may  be 
found  in  canals  and  clear  ponds  which  have  a  sandy  or 
gravelly  bottom,  but  is  seldom  met  with  in  places  where 
there  is  much  herbage  or  water  grass.  In  1829,  it  was 
found  remarkably  abundant  in  the  small  ponds  in  Epping 
Forest ;  and  in  the  same  year,  a  fine  large  variety  was 
met  with  near  Killarney,  in  Ireland. 

The  most  certain  time  to  procure  it  is  during  the 
months  of  May  and  June,  though  it  may  occasionally 
be  obtained  on  warm  days  in  December  and  the  other 
winter  months,  provided  the  wind  is  not  very  high— a 
circumstance  which  it  is  important  to  attend  to,  and 
which  will  be  again  adverted  to  in  our  remarks  on  the 
weather  best  suited  for  procuring  aquatic  insects. 

The  best  method  of  obtaining  this  creature  is  by  means 
of  a  collecting  net,   made  of  linen  cloth,   which,   after 


a 


being  immersed   in   the  water,   near  the  e(\gc,  must  be 
taken  out,  and   its  contents   removed    into  a  glass  jar. 


5*2  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

These  must  then  be  carefully  examined  by  removing 
small  quantities  at  a  time  into  a  white  saucer,  or  small 
wide-mouthed  phial.  When  they  have  been  examined  in 
this  vessel  with  a  hand-magnifier,  the  objects  sought  for 
should  be  removed  to  a  store-jar,  and  the  refuse  thrown 
away  ;  then  inspect  another  portion,  as  before,  until 
all  the  water  taken  at  a  draught  has  undergone 
examination. 

Although  nearly  a  quarter  of  an  inch  long  in  its 
nascent  state,  this  larva  can  scarcely  be  observed  without 
a  hand-magnifier  of  about  two  or  three  inches  focus 
(unless  the  collector  be  short-sighted),  as  all  its  parts  are 
nearly  colourless,  except  two  pairs  of  kidney- shaped 
bodies,  which  have  a  metallic  appearance,  and  are  nearly 
opaque,  as  shewn  in  the  plate  at  b,  and  d,  in  the  mag- 
nified side  view,  fig.  1. 

The  drawing,  fig.  1,  represents  the  creature  in  the 
larva  state.  Fig.  2,  shews  the  same  being  a  day  after- 
wards, when  it  had  changed  to  the  pupa  state.  On  com- 
paring the  two  drawings,  however,  a  very  remarkable 
and  complete  change  of  structure  throughout  will  be 
clearly  perceived. 

In  the  larva,  fig.  1,  the  obvious  and  curious  parts  are 
the  kidney-shaped  bodies  b,  and  d,  two  of  which  are 
situated  near  the  head,  and  the  other  two  in  the  third 
division  from  the  lower  extremity.  The  first  pair  are 
inclined  towards  each  other,  while  the  others  lie  in  pa- 
rallel planes,  as  represented  in  the  plan,  or  bird's-eye 
view,  drawn  of  the  natural  size  in  fig.  3.  Physiologists 
have  not  ascertained  what  may  be  the  functions  performed 


STRAW-COLOURED    GNAT. 


53 


by  these  singular  organs  :  it  is  worthy  of  remark, 
however,  that  a  similar  structure  is  observable  in  the 
tadpole,  and  figured  in  Sir  Everard  Home's  Lectures  on 
Comparative  Anatomy*.  The  other  parts  of  its  structure, 
which  appear  equally  singular  and  curious,  are  a  number 
of  globules,  a,  which  are  situated  near  the  first  pair  of 
bodies,  b.  These  globules  have  a  slight  oscillatory  mo- 
tion in  different  directions,  and,  like  the  reniform  bo- 
dies, seem  to  have  a  metallic  lustre,  but  are  not  opaque. 
From  the  exquisite  polish  of  these  globules,  they  reflect 
the  forms  of  surrounding  objects,  as  window-bars,  &c. 
which  are  indicated  in  the  drawing  by  small  squares, 
resembling  the  images  formed  by  convex  mirrors. 

When  the  larva  (as  shewn  of  the  full  size  in  fig.  3)  is 
examined  from  above,  it  exhibits  the  position  and  decussa- 
tion of  the  various  muscles  lying  along  the  back,  which 
are  observed  to  cross  at  the  joints,  and  at  points  situated 
midway  between  them. 

The  alimentary  canal  appears  to  contain  some  particles 
of  a  pinkish  coloured  matter,  and  has  a  slight  peristaltic 
motion:  but  every  part  of  the  object,  as  seen  beneath  the 
microscope,  is  so  accurately  noted  in  the  drawing,  that  a 
more  minute  description  must  be  deemed  supernuous. 

If  the  insect  have  a  sufficient  supply  of  food,  it  only 
continues  for  a  few  weeks  in  the  larva  state,  when  it  ra- 
pidly changes  to  the  pupa,  shewn  in  the  drawing,  fig.  2. 
When  it  is  desirable  to  preserve  it  for  the  microscope, 

»  Vol  6,  Sup.  Plate  fjfi,  fig    I,  ]), 


54  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

this  change  may  be  retarded  by  keeping  it  in  clear  spring 
or  river  water.  The  former  seldom  offers  sustenance  to 
animalcules,  and  therefore  effects  this  object;  which  is 
often  very  desirable,  on  account  of  the  scarcity  of  this 
species. 

The  transformation  of  this  animal  from  the  larva  to  the 
pupa  is  one  of  the  most  singular  and  wonderful  changes 
that  can  be  conceived;  and,  under  the  microscope,  pre- 
sents to  the  admirer  of  nature  a  most  curious  and  inte- 
resting spectacle.  Although  the  whole  operation  be 
under  the  immediate  inspection  of  the  observer,  yet  so 
complete  is  the  change,  that  its  former  organization  can 
scarcely  be  recognized  in  its  new  state  of  existence. 

If  we  now  compare  the  different  parts  of  the  larva  with 
the  pupa,  we  remark  a  very  striking  change  in  the  tail, 
which,  in  the  previous  state  of  being,  was  composed  of 
twenty-two  beautifully  plumed  branches;  while,  in  the 
latter,  it  is  converted  into  two  fine  membranous  tissues, 
ramified  with  numerous  vessels.  This  change  appears 
the  more  remarkable,  as  not  the  slightest  resemblance  can 
be  discovered  between  them,  nor  are  the  vestiges  of  the 
former  tail  readily  found  in  the  water.  The  partial  dis- 
appearance of  the  shell-like  orreniform  bodies  is  another 
curious  circumstance.  The  lower  two,  it  may  be  con- 
jectured, go  to  form  the  new  tail  ;  for,  if  the  number  of 
joints  be  counted  from  the  head,  the  new  tail  will  be 
found  appended  to  that  joint  which  was  nearest  to  them 
in  the  larva  state,  as  referred  to  by  the  dotted  line  d, 
connecting   figs.    1  and   2.     The  two  small  horns,  c,  c, 


STRAW-COLOURED    GNAT.  55 

which  form  the  white-plumed  antennae  of  this  species  of 
gnat,  when  in  its  perfect  state,  are  discernible  in  the 
larva,  folded  up  under  the  skin  near  the  head,  at  e,  in 
fig.  1.  The  alimentary  canal  appears  nearly  to  vanish  in 
the  pupa,  as  in  that  state  there  is  no  necessity  for  it,  the 
insect  then  entirely  abstaining  from  food ;  while,  near 
this  canal,  the  two  intertwined  vessels,  seen  in  the  larva, 
have  now  become  more  distinct,  and  are  supplied  with 
several  anastomosing  branches. 

During  the  latter  part  of  the  day  on  which  the  drawing, 
fig.  2,  was  taken,  the  rudiments  of  the  legs  of  the  perfect 
insect  might  be  seen,  folded  within  that  part  which  ap- 
pears to  be  the  head  of  the  pupa ;  and  several  of  the 
globules  had  vanished,  those  remaining  longest  that  were 
situated  nearest  the  head.  It  may  be  necessary  to  ob- 
serve, that  the  head  of  the  pupa  floats  just  under  the  sur- 
face of  the  water ;  and  the  insect,  in  this  state,  is  nearly 
upright  in  that  fluid ;  while  the  larva  swims  with  its  body 
in  a  horizontal  position,  or  rests  on  its  belly  or  sides,  at 
the  bottom  of  the  pond  or  vessel  in  which  it  is  kept,  the 
fringed  tail  being  downwards. 

The  circuitous  manner  in  which  the  Creator  appears  to 
produce  this  species  of  gnat,  and  many  other  of  His 
smaller  creatures,  is  truly  wonderful.  Other  beings  are 
produced  directly,  either  from  the  egg  or  the  maternal 
womb.  As,  however,  the  Deity  does  nothing  in  vain,  it  may 
be  presumed  that  He  must  have  had  in  view  some  impor- 
tant object  in  the  preliminary  steps  through  which  these 
beings  have  to  pass — from  the  eyy  to  the  larva,  crysalis, 


MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 


and  perfect  insect;  and,  however  low  these  minutiae  of 
nature  may  be  held  in  the  estimation  of  the  unthinking 
mass  of  mankind,  this  most  elaborate  proceeding  renders 
it  not  improbable  that  they  may  be  deemed  by  Him  choice 
and  exquisite  productions.  These  mysterious  operations 
of  nature,  as  detected  and  unravelled  by  microscopes,  are 
surely  grand  and  capital  subjects  for  observation. 
I  should  pity  the  man  who  scorned  to  be  amused  by 
inspecting  these  marvellous  metamorphoses,  and 
disdained  to  be  informed  of  the  manner  in  which  they 
are  effected.  What  a  magnificent  spectacle  must  such 
a  transformation  present  in  the  solar  or  gas  achromatic 
microscope,  exhibited  to  a  ivhole  company  with  all  the  accu- 
racy and  fidelity  ivhich  the  pictures  formed  by  those  instru- 
ments are  capable  of  displaying  ! 

The  colour  of  the  larva  when  young  is  a  faint  and 
scarcely  perceptible  yellow  ;  but  as  it  approaches  the 
change,  it  assumes  a  richer  and  deeper  colouring,  and  all 
its  internal  parts  acquire  their  definite  forms  and  tints,  as 
exhibited  in  the  drawing. 

The  natural  history  of  this  identical  species  of  culex  is 
unknown,  not  having  been  noticed  by  any  British  writer 
on  entomology.  The  intense  interest,  however,  which, 
under  the  microscope,  it  excites  in  the  observer,  will 
always  render  it  an  object  of  value.  Other  species  of  the 
gnat  are  well  known;  and  a  description  of  the  common 
gnat,  from  the  egg  to  the  perfect  insect,  has  been  illus- 
trated by  Swammerdam,  in  his  work  entitled  Biblia 
Natures,  sive  Historia  Insectorum* ;  in  which  are  two 
*  Tom.  II.  Tab.  xxxi.  et  xxxii.,  \7.i7  ,  also  Reaumur's  Hist.  Insect. 


STRAW- COLOURED    GNAT.  [)~ 

foiio  plates  entirely  devoted  to  it.  This,  however,  is  very- 
different  from  the  species  exhibited  in  our  drawings. 
Indeed,  the  larva  and  pupa  of  the  common  gnat  are  too 
opaque  and  uninteresting  to  be  of  much  value  as  micro- 
scopic objects,  except  in  their  transfiguration. 

A  curious  circumstance  attends  the  observation  of  this 
insect :  so  rapid  is  its  locomotion,  that  it  torments  the  eye 
while  attempting  to  delineate  it,  presenting  alternately 
its  head  and  tail  to  the  observer.  This  it  effects  by  bend- 
ing itself  laterally  into  a  circular  form,  and  suddenly 
whisking  round  in  the  opposite  direction  to  that  in  which 
it  had  just  bent  itself. 

In  the  dark  ages  of  the  world,  when  man  considered  it 
beneath  him  to  be  watchful  of,  or  attentive  to,  the  work- 
ings of  Nature,  and  when  superstition  exercised  an  undue 
bias  over  his  mind,  the  new  phases  which  a  creature  as- 
sumed were  conceived  to  be  miraculous  conversions,  alto- 
gether enveloped  in  mystery.  Now-a-days,  that  his  zeal 
for  investigation  has  led  him  on  to  a  greatly  extended 
survey  of  Nature,  and  to  a  more  minute  acquaintance 
with  her  operations  than  his  ancestors  were  wont 
to  possess — not  but  that  the  ultimate  causes  to  which 
those  operations  are  subservient  remain  as  much  a  mys- 
tery as  they  ever  were — his  pride  and  arrogance  would 
instigate  him  to  get  rid  of  every  thing  approaching  to 
difficulty  in  the  whole  routine  of  creation.  He  would 
tell  you  that  the  metamorphoses  we  observe  in  insects, 
like  those  we  have  been  describing,  by  which  a  living 
creature,  an  inhabitant  of  the  water,  whose  life  depends 


58  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

upon  its  being  immersed  in  that  fluid,  becomes  a  free 
denizen  of  the  air,  incapacitated  for  a  longer  existence  in 
the  former  element,  are  of  easy  explanation  :  he  would 
tell  you  that  the  different  transitions  which  the  being  has 
to  pass  through,  from  the  larva  state  to  the  condition  of 
the  perfect  fly,  are  but  the  semblance  of  a  change  ;  for 
that  if  you  examine  it  just  previous  to  the  change,  you 
will  discover  the  future  fly  folded  up  in  the  case  of  the 
larva,  and  ready  to  issue  forth  when  the  covering  is  re- 
moved. How  badly  this  will  serve  for  an  explanation 
of  the  whole  phenomenon,  and  how  little  it  detracts  from 
the  greatness  and  the  mystery  of  the  change  that  has 
been  wrought,  is  sufficiently  evident  to  every  reflecting 
mind  :  for,  had  the  larva  been  examined  in  the  early 
state,  not  the  slightest  indications  of  the  future  fly  would 
have  been  traced.  A  gradual  development  of  new  forms 
and  new  organs  has  been  carried  on  under  this  old 
covering,  and  an  absorption  of  old  forms  and  organs ; 
which,  however  much  it  may  seem  at  variance  with  the 
antiquated  notions  of  our  ancestors  as  to  there  having 
been  an  actual  conversion  of  old  matter  into  new,  is  not 
a  whit  the  less  marvellous.  The  mere  bursting  forth  of 
the  creature  from  its  envelope  is  but  a  very  small  part  of 
the  vast  transaction. 

Many  species  of  this  genus  of  insects  are,  in  their 
perfect  state,  possessed  of  a  sheathed  proboscis,  con- 
taining instruments  with  which  they  are  enabled  to 
pierce  the  skin  of  men  and  cattle,  injecting  at  the  same 
time  an  acrimonious  fluid  into  the  wound.     The  species 


STRAW-COLOURED    GNAT.  ,r)9 

we  are  now  describing,  however,  has  not  been  examined 
minutely  enough  to  determine  the  form  of  these  organs. 
It  is  of  a  light  straw  colour,  and  has  two  beautiful  an- 
tennae or  feelers. 

The  wings,  also,  of  this  gnat  are  of  a  delicate  straw 
colour,  and  make  very  beautiful  objects,  when  mounted 
under  thin  glass  in  sliders.  Some  species  have  their 
wings  marginated,  and  covered  with  fine  scales.  These, 
as  well  as  the  feathers  on  the  edges,  are  good  objects  for 
the  microscope,  and  exhibit  five  or  six  longitudinal  lines 
on  each,  which  are  so  strongly  marked  as  to  be  seen  with 
any  kind  of  light,  and  do  not  require  superior  penetration 
in  the  instrument,  to  shew  them.  The  whole  wing  may 
be  seen  very  beautifully  under  Goring's  improved  Amician 
Engiscope*,  with  its  lowest  power,  which  is  ecpiivalentto 
a  lens  of  a  quarter  of  an  inch  focus.  To  the  larva  and 
crysalis  of  insects  this  instrument  cannot  be  applied  satis- 
factorily, as  it  does  not  take  in  the  extent  of  field  necessary 
to  shew  the  whole  at  once.  On  this  account  the  achro- 
matic microscope  has  the  decided  advantage,  from  the 
low  power  and  large  area  which  can  be  obtained  by  it. 
In  examining  this  larva  with  the  microscope,  it  will  be 
best  seen  when  the  light  is  thrown  obliquely  on  it ;  though, 
when  low  powers  are  used,  much  attention  to  this  parti- 
cular is  not  required. 

These  insects  generate  while  hovering  in  the  air,  and 
the  female  lays  her  eggs  in  the  water,  selecting  an  unfre- 

*   Sec  Micrographia,  (hap.  J. 


60  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

(juented  spot,  where  she  may  deposit  them  free  from 
danger.  This  is  probably  the  cause  why  this  larva  is  dis- 
covered with  so  much  difficulty  ;  the  collector  being 
seldom  able  to  procure  it  two  seasons  consecutively  in  the 
same  place. 


The  vignette  at  the  head  of  this  chapter  was  drawn 
from  a  specimen  bred  in  a  vase.  Whilst  in  the  act  of 
producing  the  cluster  of  eggs  figured  on  the  right  side, 
I  took  and  preserved  it  in  gum.  The  eggs  were  removed 
from  the  surface  of  the  water  on  a  slip  of  glass  gently  in- 
troduced beneath  them.  These  measure  between  the 
one-fortieth  and  one-fiftieth  of  an  inch  in  length. 

The  short  line  between  the  two  figures  indicates  the 
actual  length  of  the  body  of  the  Tipuladian  Gnat. 


CHAPTER  III. 

On  the  Larva  and  Crysalis*  of  a  Day  Fly. 

Ephemera  marginata  of  Stephens. 

When  this  larva  issues  from  the  egg,  which  it  does  in 
the  decline  of  summer,  it  has  at  intervals  an  unsteady 
motion — in  a  manner,  as  it  would  seem,  involuntary. 
During  this  stage  it  is  scarcely  visible  to  the  unassisted 
eye,  and  is  very  pellucid.  As  it  increases  in  size,  the 
serpentine  vessels  attached  to  the  sides  of  the  animal 
become  more  apparent,  and  the  tail  assumes  that  rich 
feathered  appearance,  which,  in  conjunction  with  the 
paddles,  form  its  pre-eminent  beauty. 

While  the  insect  is  very  young,  it  is  a  well-suited 
object  for  the  solar  achromatic  microscope,  in  which  it 
will  afford  an  ample  fund  of  amusement,  when  repre- 
sented on  a  screen,  and  dilated  to  the  extent  of  about 
two  feet  in  length.  If  the  instrument  be  truly  aplanaiic, 
every  part  of  the  insect's  internal  organization  may  be 
clearly  seen ;  and  the  peristaltic  motion  of  the  intes- 
tines, the  circulation  of  the  blood,  and  the  pulsation  of 
the  dorsal  vessel,  can  be  observed  without  the  least 
rouble,  by  any  number  of  persons.  In  the  latter  circum- 
stance the  principal  advantage  of  this   instrument  con- 

*  It  may,  perhaps,  be  termed  either,  according  to  its  state  of  growth. 


02  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

sists ;  for  it  cannot  be  denied  that  an  aplanatic  compound 
microscope  will  exhibit  these  appearances  with  more 
distinctness,  and  without  any  risk  of  killing  or  injuring 
the  object  by  exposure  to  the  heat  of  the  sun's  rays 
condensed  upon  it. 

As  the  creature  continues  growing,  it  assumes  a  va- 
riety of  colouring,  and  becomes  more  opaque  as  its 
change  approaches  towards  completion,  which  takes  place 
in  a  few  months  from  the  time  it  leaves  the  egg.  The  eyes 
are  reticulated,  as  represented  in  figure  4,  plate  11,  and 
are  of  a  citron  colour  5  while  the  body  exhibits  a  most 
beautiful  play  of  different  tints,  and  finally  assumes  that 
of  a  rich  brown,  with  various  shadings.  The  large 
air-vessel  (trachea)*  which  runs  along  each  side  of  the 
body,  together  with  its  numerous  ramifications  traversing 
the  different  membranous  leaf-shaped  paddles,  are  now 
of  a  dark  colour,  and  the  elytra,  or  wing-cases  of  the 
future  insect,  become  daily  more  and  more  apparent. 

The  magnified  representation  of  the  larva  (fig.  4)  was 
taken  just  previous  to  its  change  to  the  perfect  insect. 
Fig  5.  gives  the  real  magnitude  of  the  creature ;  and 
fig.  6  exhibits  a  view  of  the  perfect  insect  of  the  natural 
size. 

During  the  infant  state  of  this  larva's  existence  it  is 
very  transparent,  displaying,  under  the  microscope,  in  a 
most  surprising  manner,  the  circulation  of  the  blood. 

The  systems  of  respiration  and  circulation  in  insects 
differ  most  materially  from  those  of  the  vertebrated  ani- 

*  The  coat  of  this  vessel  differs  from  that  of  most  larva,  a  fact  not 
noticed  by  naturalists. 


EPHEMERA  MARGINATA.  63 

mals.  In  land  animals  the  function  of  respiration  is 
performed  by  lungs  ;  in  fish  by  gills  :  in  both  of  which, 
however,  the  blood  is  propelled  to  the  respiratory  organ 
to  be  aerated.  In  insects,  on  the  contrary,  the  air  is  con- 
veyed through  the  body  in  vessels,  called  the  tracheae, 
and  the  blood  is  aerated  by  circulating  around  these 
vessels  ;  whence  originates  the  term,  a  diffused  circula- 
tion. In  place  of  the  heart  is  substituted  a  single  pro- 
pelling organ,  which,  from  its  peculiar  situation,  has  been 
named  the  dorsal  vessel. 

The  circulation  of  the  blood  in  this  larva  is  shewn  in 
a  magnificent  manner  in  an  achromatic  microscope,  with 
a  triple-cemented  object-glass  of  an  inch  or  half  an  inch 
siderial  focus.  For  this  purpose  I  would  recommend  the 
selecting  of  a  young  specimen  about  one  or  two-tenths 
of  an  inch  in  length,  when  it  has  just  shed  its  skin,  at 
which  time  the  entire  creature  is  exceedingly  pellucid. 

Around  the  large  air-vessel  which  passes  down  each 
side  of  the  body,  as  also  along  the  legs,  antennae,  and 
three-forked  tail,  the  oat-shaped  globules  of  blood  may 
be  seen  to  pass  rapidly  at  every  pulsation  of  the  dorsal 
vessel.  This  vessel,  according  to  Mr.  Bowerbank's  ob- 
servations*, "  extends  nearly  the  whole  length  of  the 
body,  and  is  of  great  comparative  magnitude.  It  is  fur- 
nished at  regular  intervals  with  double  valves  about 
equal  in  number  to  the  sections  of  the  body."  A  portion 
of  this  vessel,  with  its  valves,  is  represented  in  the  an- 
nexed figure.     "  Both  above  and  below  each  of  these  sets 

*  Entomological  Magazine,  vol.  I,  page  240. 


64 


MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 


of  valves  is  a  pair  of  singular- looking-  appendages,  a,  a. 
They  are  probably  nervous  ganglions,  auxiliary  to  the 
motion  of  the  vessel,  but  so  exceedingly  pellucid  as 
scarcely  to  be  defined.  The  action  of  the  valves  is  a 
most  interesting  and  beautiful  sight.  While  in  their 
greatest  state  of  collapse,  the  point  of  the  lower  valve  is 
seen  closely  compressed  within  the  upper  one.  At  the 
commencement  of  the  expansion  of  the  artery,  the  blood 
is  seen  flowing  in  from  the  lateral  apertures,  (as  shewn 
by  the  arrows)  and  at  the  same  time  the  stream  in  the 
artery  commences  its  ascent.  When  it  has  nearly 
attained  its  greatest  state  of  expansion,  the  sides  of  the 
lower  valve  are  forced  upwards  by  the  increasing  flow 
of  the  blood  from  the  section  below  the  valve,  the  lateral 
openings  are  closed,  and  the  main  current  of  the  blood 
is  projected  through  the  two  valves." 

A  portion  of  the  larva  of  the  Ephemera,  greatly  magnified,  displaying  the 
structure  of  the  Circulating  System. 

f<  It  is  not  easy  to  see  this  beautiful  structure  of  the 
valves  of  the  great  dorsal  vessel,  for  it  is  only  when  the 
insect  is  in  a  state  of  exhaustion,  or  has  been  just  so 
much  compressed  as  to  destroy  voluntary  motion  without 
entirely  depriving  it  of  life,  that  it  is  possible  to  subject  it 


EPHEMERA   MARGIN  AT  A.  65 

to  a  power  sufficiently  high  to  discern  these  extremely 
delicate  and  transparent  tissues;  and  even  then,  to  see 
them  to  the  greatest  advantage,  recourse  should  be  had 
only  to  such  as  are  in  the  last  three  or  four  sections  of 
the  body." 

When  the  larva  is  dead,  the  particles  of  the  blood,  of 
an  oblong  figure,  may  be  distinctly  discerned  in  its  forked 
tail ;  and  their  motion  is  perceptible  in  the  limbs  for 
nearly  an  hour  after  they  are  separated  from  the  body. 
These  particles,  like  those  of  the  human  blood,  assume  a 
spherical  form  when  mixed  with  water. 

The  peristaltic  motion  of  the  alimentary  canal  will  also 
present,  under  a  good  instrument,  a  beautiful  and  inte- 
resting appearance. 

The  three-pronged  tail  of  this  insect,  in  its  advanced 
age,  is  beautifully  fringed  with  clusters  of  fine,  straight, 
smooth  hairs  or  bristles,  several  in  each  bunch,  as  re- 
presented in  fig.  4.  As  the  time  for  its  transformation 
approaches,  the  central  prong  of  the  tail  becomes  more 
transparent,  and  assumes  the  appearance  of  a  jointed 
tube,  or  shell-like  case  ;  while  the  two  exterior  ones  dis- 
tinctly exhibit  portions  of  the  tail  of  the  perfect  insect 
inclosed  within  them,  as  shewn  in  the  drawing.  The 
same  may  be  observed  as  to  the  legs,  which  are  seen  to 
contain  those  of  the  perfect  fly. 

This  larva  is  produced  from  an  egg,  deposited  by  the 
perfect  insect  in  the  waters  of  pools  or  ditches,  among 
duck-weed  and  the  water-grasses.  Its  disposition  is  mild 
and  inoffensive.     It  is  incapable  of  destroying  creatures 

F 


6G  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

of  its  own  size,  while  it  is  itself  the  prey  of  all  kinds  of 
water-beetles  and  the  larger  larvae. 

It  feeds  on  the  larvae  of  the  smaller  kinds  of  tipulae,  or 
crane  flics,  as  well  as  on  aquatic  vegetables.  Short 
pieces  of  grass,  &c.  are  frequently  seen  in  the  alimentary 
canal,  when  examined  under  the  microscope  during  the 
spring  season.  For  this  reason,  and  also  on  account  of 
the  sharpness  of  its  claws,  it  should  not  be  kept  with  any 
of  the  family  of  the  Characeae,  intended  to  exhibit  the  cir- 
culation (cyclosis)  of  the  sap,  inasmuch  as  it  pierces  the 
cellules  whilst  creeping  up  the  stems,  and  thus  destroys 
the  plants. 

When  it  is  intended  to  collect  this  larva,  a  mild  calm 
day  should  be  chosen ;  for  if  there  be  any  cold  wind,  it 
retreats  into  the  mud  at  the  bottom  of  the  water.  It  may 
be  easily  taken  with  a  collecting  net,  such  as  is  described 
in  the  preceding  chapter.  This  must  be  introduced 
among  the  grasses  and  water-plants  to  which  they  attach 
themselves.  Having  carefully  done  this  on  that  side  the 
pond  which  is  most  exposed  to  the  sun's  rays,  and  drawn 
it  among  the  floating  duck-weed,  many  hundreds  may 
often  be  collected  at  a  single  draught. 

These  larvae  may  be  kept  alive,  for  many  weeks  to- 
gether, in  a  glass  vase  of  water,  with  a  little  duck-weed 
floating  on  its  surface ;  and  will  be  ready  to  be  applied 
to  the  microscope  whenever  required. 

The  rapidity  with  which  it  moves  is  truly  astonishing. 
Besides  its  six  legs,  it  employs  the  six  double  paddles  at- 
tached diagonally  to  the  serpentine  vessels  on  each  side  of 


EPHEMERA   MARGINATA.  G" 

its  body,  and  its  tail,  for  the  purpose  of  rowing  and  ba- 
lancing itself,  and  two  other  paddles  for  steering,  making 
in  all  fourteen.  Even  when  the  creature  is  at  rest,  if  in 
health,  all  except  the  lowest  two,  or  steering  paddles,  are 
in  rapid  motion — a  circumstance  which  renders  those 
beautiful  ramifications  of  the  air-vessels  shewn  in  the 
drawing,  figure  4,  difficult  to  be  viewed  while  the  larva 
is  alive. 

Independent  of  its  locomotion,  by  means  of  its  legs,  pad- 
dles, and  tail,  it  possesses  a  power  of  leaping  or  spring- 
ing in  the  water,  which  it  effects  by  incurvating  its  body 
backwards,  and  then  suddenly  straightening  it,  by  which 
kind  of  motion  it  raises  itself  to  the  surface  of  the  water 
with  great  celerity. 

When  the  crysalis  approximates  to  its  perfect  state,  it 
swims  more  elegantly  :  its  motions  now  appear  entirely 
subservient  to  its  will,  and  at  the  same  time  it  leaps  with 
greater  velocity.  Within  a  few  days,  however,  of  its 
change,  it  becomes  rather  sluggish,  and  attaches  itself  to 
the  stalks  of  water-plants,  on  which  it  will  remain  for 
hours  together,  if  undisturbed,  only  moving  its  paddles 
at  intervals. 

At  the  period  of  its  transformation  to  the  perfect  state, 
some  parts  of  the  insect  assume  a  metallic  lustre,  as  if 
the  space  between  the  crysalis  (which  may  now  be  called 
the  case  of  the  animal,  every  part  of  the  latter  being 
perceptible  through  it,)  and  the  inclosed  insect,  were 
partly  filled  with  mercury.  This  appearance  is  ultimately 
extended  over  the   whole   body,  and  is  occasioned  by  a 


G8  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

small  quantity  of  air  or  gas  probably  evolved  during-  the 
change  ;  and  which,  by  insinuating  itself  between  the 
case  and  the  insect,  may  facilitate  the  process.  After 
remaining  a  few  minutes  in  this  state,  and  making  occa- 
sional efforts  to  disentangle  itself,  it  bursts  forth  from  its 
watery  dwelling,  and  wings  its  flight  into  the  aerial 
regions,  either  leaving  the  entire  skin  behind  it  in  the 
water,  or  carrying  part  of  it  away. 

The  exuviae,  or  skins,  which   are  shed  previous  to  the 
creature  assuming  the  perfect  form,   are  very  fine  trans- 
parent objects  for  the  single  microscope,  with  a  lens  of 
the  tenth  of  an  inch  focus.    In  this  state  they  afford  much 
useful  information,  as  to  the  structure,  formation,  &c.  of 
which  the  paddles,  tail,   &c.  furnish  no  inconsiderable 
portion.     If  it  be  thought  desirable  to  expedite  the  casting 
of  the   exuviae,  this  may  be  effected  by   removing   the 
insect  from    the   water  in  which  it  is  found  into  spring 
water.     This  change  is   most  probably  produced  by  the 
water  mechanically  altering  the  dimensions  of  the  skin 
or  case  which  inclosed  the  insect,  and  thereby  suffering 
it  to  escape  with  great  ease  ;  or,  perhaps,  from  the  same 
cause  which  produces  this   effect   in  the  common  spider 
when  deprived  of  sustenance.     These  skins  should  all  be 
mounted  in  sliders,  in  the  order  in  which  the  insect  sheds 
them,    that,  by   comparing   them    together    under    the 
microscope,  we  may  ascertain  with  precision  the  progress 
made  during  each  change. 

When  the  crysalis  is  divested  of  its  envelope,  it  remains 
apparently  inert  on  some  neighbouring  plant  for  a  few 


EPHEMERA  MARGIN  AT  A.  69 

minutes,  where  it  casts  off  from  its  wings  the  last  pel- 
licle, which  is  a  thin  and  delicate  membrane,  formed 
under  the  elytra  of  the  crysalis.  It  then  appears  in  the 
imago  state,  with  its  biforked  tail  and  wings,  as  repre- 
sented of  the  full-size  in  figure  6. 

Having  become  a  perfect  Ephemera,  it  hovers  about 
in  the  air,  the  male  and  female  generate,  the  latter  drops 
her  eggs  in  the  water,  and  both  die,  existing  only  a  few 
short  hours,  to  perform  all  the  offices  destined  for  them 
to  fulfil  in  the  economy  of  nature. 

So  beautiful  and  perfect  are  the  arrangements  of  the 
Creator,  in  order  to  preserve  a  regular  succession  of  his 
creatures,  that  if  the  Ephemeras  be  kept  from  sexual 
intercourse,  I  have  known  them  live  for  several  days. 
Nor  do  they  seem  enfeebled  when  confined  separately  for 
a  week,  as  I  have  seen  them  fly  away  with  great  celerity 
after  that  interval ;  while  others,  which  were  bred  the 
same  season,  and  were  not  kept  separate,  died  after  a 
few  hours'  existence. 


70 


CHAPTER    IV. 


Fig.  6. 


Fig.  7. 


On  the  Larva  of  a  Species  of  British  HydropJiilus. 


Hydrophilus  caraboides. — Auctorum. 


In  examining  the  peculiarities  of  the  structure  and  habits 
of  this  larva,  what  most  strikingly  attracts  our  attention 
is  its  ferocious  and  savage  disposition,  and  the  fitness  of 
its  organs  for  the  exercise  of  its  ravenous  propensities. 
It  may  be  safely  asserted  that  no  species  of  larva  is 
known  to  be  provided  with  weapons  of  destruction  so 
powerful,  so  numerous,  and  so  well  adapted  to  their  end, 
as  those  which  this  creature  possesses.  It  is  on  this  ac- 
count that  it  has  been  popularly  called  the  Watbr  Devil. 
Its  size  is  but  little  inferior  to  that  of  the  larva  of  any  of 


SPECIKS    OF    BRTTISH    H VDROPHILUS.  J\ 

the  British  Coleoptera,  as  it  measures,  when  arrived  at 
maturity,  an  inch  and  a  half  in  length,  while  the  superior 
strength  and  courage  manifested  in  its  attacks  on  small 
fish,  and  other  animals  larger  than  itself,  is  truly  sur- 
prising. 

About  the  latter  end  of  April,  and  during  the  month  of 
May,  small  nests  of  these  insects  are  often  found  floating 
among  weeds  and  water  plants,  in  stagnant  pools,  and 
are  frequently  taken  in  the  nets  of  those  who  are  search- 
ing for  the  early  kinds  of  larvae.  They  are  in  the  form 
of  balls,  of  a  dusky  white  colour,  and  a  silky  texture,  and 
have  each  a  small  stem  of  the  same  nature  as  the  nest, 
but  more  dense.  By  means  of  this  filament  they  are 
attached  to  the  roots  or  stalks  of  weeds  at  the  bottom  of 
the  water.  (See  the  right  hand  figure  at  the  head  of  this 
chapter.)  In  this  situation  they  remain  during  the 
winter,  and  are  thus  effectually  preserved  from  the 
effects  of  intense  cold.  Early  in  the  spring,  the  stem  or 
cable  to  which  we  have  referred  is  detached  from  the 
weeds,  by  the  winds  which  at  that  time  prevail,  and  the 
nest  rises  to  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  there  floating, 
receives  the  genial  influence  of  the  sun.  These  nests 
may  be  taken  and  placed  in  a  basin  of  water,  and,  as  the 
season  advances,  hatched  by  the  heat  of  the  sun.  On  the 
larva  leaving  the  nest,  which  it  accomplishes  by  gnawing 
a  hole  in  the  side,  the  infant  immediately  descends  to  the 
bottom  of  the  vessel,  with  its  jaws  extended  in  search  of 
prey,  and  eagerly  devours  all  the  small  aquatic  insects 
that  are  within  its  reach  ;  if,  however,  there  is  a  scarcity 


72  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

of  food  in  the  immediate  neighbourhood  of  the  nest,  they 
may  be  seen  to  attack  and  devour  each  other. 

These  larvae,  as  well  as  most  of  those  of  the  larger 
kind,  are  found  at  a  greater  depth  of  water  than  are  the 
smaller  ones ;  although,  in  their  pursuit  of  small  prey, 
they  may  occasionally  be  taken  in  shallow  places.  They 
require  a  larger  net  to  collect  them  with.  A  net  made  of 
stout  Irish  linen,  about  a  yard  deep,  and  affixed  to  a 
hoop  half  a  yard  in  diameter,  will  answer  the  purpose 
very  well ;  and  if  it  be  attached  to  a  long  stick,  the 
collector  will  be  enabled  to  use  it  with  greater  facility. 

In  its  infant  state,  this  larva  is  very  transparent ;  hence 
its  internal  structure  may  be  clearly  distinguished. 

When  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch  in  length,  it  swims 
very  nimbly.  The  colour  of  the  head  is  a  strong  Indian 
yellow,  with  darker  shadings  of  a  bright  chestnut;  the 
eyes  are  now  bright  carmine.  It  is  more  sparingly 
covered  with  hairs,  and  its  swimming  appendages  are 
shorter  than  at  a  more  advanced  period  ;  and  the  head  is 
larger,  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the  body,  than  when 
the  creature  has  arrived  at  maturity.  In  this  respect  it 
resembles  many  other  creatures  in  its  mode  of  growth, 
the  head  seeming  to  be  developed  and  perfected  before 
the  rest  of  the  system. 

When  young,  it  may  be  readily  preserved  in  guni- 
water,  in  the  manner  described  in  the  "  Microscopic 
Cabinet,"  p.  229.  I  have  several  of  them  mounted  in 
this  way,  varying  in  size  from  one-tenth  to  half  an  inch 
in  length  ;  and  although  nearly  eight  years  have  elapsed 


SPECIES    OF    BRITISH    HYDROPHILUS.  73 

since  they  were  done,  they  are  as  perfect  as  when  they 
were  first  prepared.  This  method,  however,  will  not 
retain  them  so  permanently  as  when  they  are  mounted  in 
Canada  balsam,  between  two  slips  of  glass,  in  which  case 
the  specimens  may  also  be  of  much  larger  dimensions. 

The  manner  in  which  this  larva  treats  its  prey  evinces 
an  extraordinary  degree  of  instinct.  Many  of  the  crea- 
tures on  which  it  feeds  are  crustaceous  about  the  head 
and  back  ;  hence  they  are  most  vulnerable  at  the  under 
part  of  the  body.  This  part,  therefore,  the  larva  attacks  ; 
and,  to  accomplish  its  aim,  swims  underneath  the  in- 
tended victim,  and  bending  back  its  head,  which  is  even 
with  the  surface  of  its  back,  is  enabled  thus  to  reach  its 
prey  by  means  of  its  jointed  antennae.  (See  a,  fig.  30, 
which  represents  a  magnified  view  of  the  larva  taken 
while  young.)  Its  next  operation  is  to  pierce  it  with  the 
mandibles  (b).  Having  thus  secured  its  object,  it  im- 
mediately ascends  to  the  top  of  the  water,  and,  holding  it 
above  the  surface,  so  as  to  prevent  it  struggling,  shakes 
it  as  a  dog  would  a  rat.  The  prey  of  this  larva  is  often 
larger  than  its  destroyer.  Its  next  operation  is  to  insert 
the  piercer  and  sucker  (d),  which  is  capable  of  being 
thrust  out  or  withdrawn  at  pleasure.  When  the  juices  of 
the  victim  are  not  easily  procured  by  suction  or  exhaus- 
tion, the  serrated  pair  of  forceps  (c),  is  employed  to  tear 
and  masticate  it,  and  thus  cause  the  juices  to  be  more 
easily  obtained.  If  its  food  be  plentiful,  this  larva  arrives 
at  its  full  growth  in  the  course  of  three  or  four  months, 
and  is  then  nearly  opaque,  and  covered  with  hair.    It  can 


74  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

be  kept  several  days  without  food,  and  by  this  exinani- 
tion  its  structure  becomes  considerably  more  transpa- 
rent*, while  its  natural  ferocity  is  greatly  increased,  so 
that  it  will  attack  and  fight  with  creatures  much  larger 
than  itself,  and  even  with  its  own  species.  It  may  be 
remarked,  that  it  studiously  avoids  any  contest  with  the 
Nepa,  or  water- scorpion. 

On  a  fine  sunny  day  the  larvae  rise  to  the  surface  of 
the  water,  and  delight  to  bask  in  the  sun ;  but  if  watched, 
they  remain  motionless,  with  their  claws  extended.  If  a 
stick,  or  any  other  substance,  be  presented  to  them,  they 
will  immediately  seize  it,  and  will  sometimes  suffer  them- 
selves to  be  cut  into  pieces  before  they  relinquish  their 
hold.  Their  bite  has  been  considered  poisonous  by  many 
persons,  as  it  takes  a  greater  length  of  time  to  heal  than 
other  wounds  of  the  same  extent :  so  that  caution  should 
be  used  in  taking  them. 

Touching  the  anatomy  of  this  creature,  it  may  be  ob- 
served, that  the  sucker,  marked  d,  is  contained  in  a  crus- 
taceous  sheath,  and  may  be  considerably  protruded  or 
completely  withdrawn  at  the  pleasure  of  the  larva  :  in 
the  engraving  it  is  shewn  extended  to  about  three 
quarters  of  its  length.  The  eyes  are  compound,  but 
of  a  peculiar  formation,  consisting  of  seven  oval  aper- 
tures, arranged  like  leaves  upon  a  branch  :  in  the  draw- 
ing they  are  denoted  by  the  letter  e.     The  whole  of  the 


*  Dr.  Goring  kept  the  subject  represented  in  the  engraving  some  time 
without  food,  in  order  to  render  its  interior  organization  more  clear :  it 
may  be  observed  that  its  intestinal  canal  is  quite  empty. 


SPECIES    OF    BRITISH     II  YDROPH I LUS.  "5 

head  and  thorax  are  curiously  marked  with  a  number  of 
lines  and  spots.  The  legs  are  six  in  number  ;  they  are 
thickly  set  with  rows  of  hair  on  their  opposite  sides,  and 
each  is  furnished  with  a  sharp  claw.  The  number  of 
swimmers  on  each  side  is  seven  ;  they  are  covered  with 
hairs,  and,  to  the  specimen  from  which  the  drawing  was 
taken,  a  vast  number  of  Vorticellce  convallarice,*  or  bell 
polypi,  were  attached.  These  will  be  recognized  in  the 
magnified  drawing  by  their  bell-shaped  figure.  They 
sometimes  infest  this  species  of  larva  to  such  a  degree,  as 
considerably  to  impede  its  motions  in  swimming.  On 
each  side  of  the  abdomen,  which  commences  near  the 
origin  of  the  first  pair  of  swimmers,  arise  the  great 
tracheae,  or  air-vessels,  distinguishable  in  the  coloured 
engraving  by  their  light  blue  colour  ;  the  two  approach 
each  other  near  the  tail,  where  an  exceedingly  curious 
process  is  also  distinctly  exhibited.  The  whole  surface  of 
the  body  is  thickly  covered  with  hairs,  and  several  tufts 
are  disposed  in  clusters,  with  some  regularity,  down  the 
back  and  sides.  The  flexible  pulsatory  organ  or  dorsal 
vessel,  situated  at  the  lower  part  of  the  body,  is  in  perpe- 
tual motion.  Its  form  somewhat  resembles  the  letter  S, 
inverted  :  it  however  varies  a  little  during  its  vibrating 
motions.  The  use  of  the  curious  appendages  at  the  lower 
extremity  of  the  body  is  unknown.  Its  tail  is  biforked 
and  crustaceous,  and  is  marked  as  shewn  in  the  plate. 
In  figure  31  is  given  a  representation  of  the  larva,  of  its 

*  Described  and  figured  in  "  Natural  History  of  Animalcules,"  p.  149. 


76  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

natural  size  and  proportions,  taken  at  the  same  period 
of  its  growth  as  that  at  which  the  drawing  was  made.  As 
it  approaches  maturity,  it  casts  its  skin  several  times, 
from  each  of  which  it  escapes  hy  a  rent  formed  down 
the  back. 

The  large  tracheae,  or  air-vessels,  which  run  along  each 
side  of  the  body,  with  the  numerous  branches  emanating 
from  them  at  various  intervals,  in  their  course,  are  com- 
posed of  delicate  transparent  membranes,  distended  by 
means  of  fibres  attached  to,  and  wound  about  them  in  a 
spiral  form,  like  the  thread  of  a  screw  or  the  spring 
of  a  bell.  The  diameter  of  these  vessels,  one  of  which  I 
dissected  from  a  larva  nearly  an  inch  and  a  half  in  length, 
is  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch.  When  mounted  between  two 
pieces  of  glass,  and  submitted  to  moderate  amplification, 
they  exhibit  the  most  beautiful  and  varied  specimen  of 
line-work  that  it  is  possible  to  imagine.  The  fibres  of 
the  upper  and  under  sides  intersecting  each  other  at  dif- 
ferent angles,  produce  an  effect  which  no  engine-turner 
could  surpass;  it  would,  therefore,  be  useless  attempting 
to  illustrate  it  by  a  wood  engraving.  A  branch  of  this 
vessel  may  also  be  observed  running  along  each  of  the 
legs. 

Respiration  by  this  creature  is  not  performed  as  with 
the  larva  of  the  ephemera,  although,  like  it,  it  is  an  inha- 
bitant of  the  water.  The  tracheae  in  the  latter  is  supplied 
with  air  from  the  membranous  paddles  on  each  side  of 
the  body,  which  imbibe  it  from  the  circumambient  fluid. 
In  the  larva  under  consideration,  the  air  is  supplied  by 


SPECIES    OF    BRITISH    HVDROPHILUS.  'J'J 

proper  orifices  situated  at  its  tail ;  and  the  creature  is 
obliged  to  ascend  to  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  elevate 
its  tail  out  of  it,  at  every  inspiration.  When  the  air  thus 
inhaled  has  become  unfit  for  respiration,  it  is  expelled 
at  the  same  orifices,  and  a  small  bubble  may  frequently 
be  seen  issuing  from  the  tail,  and  ascending  in  the  water. 
On  a  careful  examination  of  the  skin,  which  by  the  by 
affords  an  excellent  object  for  the  microscope,  there  will 
not  appear  any  spiraculas  along  the  sides,  as  in  perfect 
insects. 

The  respiratory  system  of  this  larva,  being,  when  dis- 
sected out,  more  opaque  than  that  of  most  similar  crea- 
tures, is  seen  to  great  advantage  when  mounted  in 
Canada  balsam  ;  and  if  it  be  accompanied  with  the  cor- 
responding organs  of  a  caterpillar,  the  comparison 
affords  a  beautiful  example  of  adaptation  to  the  different 
elements  suited  to  life.  In  the  terrestrial  animal,  every 
part  being  exposed  to  the  atmosphere,  mouths  or  orifices 
for  inhaling  the  air  are  arranged  along  both  sides  of  the 
body  ;  in  the  aquatic  larva,  this  system  could  not  be  made 
available,  without  the  creature  being  compelled  to  quit 
its  natural  element,  at  every  moment  it  had  occasion  to 
respire.  To  obviate  this,  it  is  furnished  with  two  large 
apertures  at  the  tail,  instead  of  those  at  the  sides. 

I  may  mention  that  a  preparation  of  this  organ  illus- 
trates very  beautifully  one  of  the  physical  properties  of 
matter,  namely,  the  colours  produced  by  interference, 
when  light  is  made  to  pass  between  a  series  of  fine  lines. 

After  this  creature  has  remained  for   a  considerable 


78  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

time  in  the  larva  state,  it  buries  itself  in  a  hole,  which  it 
forms  for  that  purpose  near  the  edge  of  the  water,  and 
after  passing  through  the  crysalis  state,  it  emerges  in  the 
form  of  a  perfect  beetle.  This  is  effected  in  two  years 
after  issuing  from  the  nest  egg. 

On  examining  the  older  books  on  Entomology,  I  found, 
in  Roesal's  work,  (a  book  not  noticed  in  Stephens'  ela- 
borate Catalogue  of  British  Insects,)  a  small  drawing  of 
this  larva,  from  which  it  appears  to  be  the  Hydrophilus 
caraboides.  It  is  much  to  be  regretted  that  modern 
entomologists  attend  so  little  to  the  aquatic  larvae  of 
insects ;  for  surely  it  will  not  be  pretended  that  a 
description  of  the  creature  in  its  perfect  state  constitutes 
its  history.  I  have  often  made  inquiries  of  the  first 
entomologists  of  the  day  as  to  what  insect  a  particular 
larva  would  become,  and  have  as  often  been  unable  to 
obtain  the  slightest  information.  In  some  cases  they 
have  doubted  as  to  the  order  to  which  it  belonged.  It  is 
true  that  had  I  been  unable  to  procure  its  generic  and 
specific  names,  that  circumstance  would  not  have  ren- 
dered it  a  whit  less  valuable  as  a  microscopic  object ; 
and  I  do  not  pretend  to  treat  of  them  with  entomological 
technicality. 

The  engraving  of  the  perfect  Beetle  at  the  commence- 
ment of  this  chapter  is  taken,  by  permission,  from  Mr. 
Curtis's  British  Entomology,  vol.  iv.,  plate  159. 


71 


CHAPTER  V. 

On  the  Terms  employed  in  Microscopic  Science. 

It  has  been  said  that  every  science  has  its  own  language, 
and  we  often  find  that  words  which  in  one  science  ex- 
press certain  ideas,  do,  when  transferred  to  another, 
convey  to  our  minds  a  sense  entirely  different. 

Although  the  study  of  the  microscope  does  not  require 
a  very  extensive  vocabulary,  yet  it  is  rendered  more 
easy  by  a  previous  acquaintance  with  those  terms  which 
continually  occur  to  the  microscopist. 

The  following  chapters  are  mechanical  descriptions  of 
the  microscope,  together  with  a  discussion  of  the  question 
as  to  whether  there  is  a  best  possible  way  of  constructing 
its  mounting,  or  mechanical  part.  The  importance  of 
the  latter  must  be  evident,  when  we  consider  that 
although  we  may  possess  the  most  perfect  and  finest 
corrected  and  adjusted  lenses,  yet  if  their  mounting  or 
stand  be  defective  in  its  construction,  we  shall  be 
deprived  of  a  great  portion  of  their  value,  by  being 
unable  to  make  them  show  in  an  efficient  manner  those 
subjects  which  are  within  the  scope  of  the  instrument, 
while  many  classes  of  objects  cannot  be  viewed  by  them 
in  any  way  whatever. 

In  the  present  chapter,  I  shall  merely  give  a  succinct 


80 


MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 


explanation  of  the  different  terms  used  in  this  and  other 
works  respecting-  the  microscope,  omitting  Aplanatic ; 
Achromatic  ;  Chromatic  Aberration,  or  Dispersion  ; 
Spherical  Aberration ;  Engiscope  and  Microscope,  as 
being  explained  already  in  the  u  Cabinet,"  p.  102. 

Fie.  8. 


4*- 


Fig.  9. 


First,  then,  we  will  commence  with  the  optical  part 
of  a  compound  microscope,  or  engiscope,  the  external 
appearance  of  which  let  fig.  8  represent.  This  is  gene- 
rally called  the  body  of  the  microscope,  and  is  either 
composed  of  a  conical  or  a  parallel  tube,  as  here  shewn. 
The  interior  of  the  body  should  be  as  black  and  as  sombre 
as  possible,  and  furnished  with  diaphragms  or  stops  (as 
at  e),  to  prevent  any  false  light  entering  the  eye:  of 
course  these  stops  must  be  so  arranged,  and  of  such 
apertures,  at  not  to  cut  off  or  impede  any  portion  of  the 
rays  passing  through  the  various  lenses. 

The  larger  end  of  the  body,  a,  is  called  the  eye-end,  into 
which  the  eye-pieces  fit,  either  by  a  screw  or  simply 
by  sliding  them  within  it.     The  latter  plan  is  the  better, 


TERMS  EMPLOYED.  81 

though  it  has  been  objected  to,  from  the  liability  of  their 
becoming  loose  by  wear  ;  the  reverse  of  which,  however, 
occurs  in  practice,  for  as  the  tubes  become  oxidized  they 
tighten. 

The  eye-pieces  usually  consist  of  two  lenses,  as  shown 
at  a  and  b,  fig-.  9.  The  first,  or  anterior  lens,  is  called  the 
eye-glass ;  the  second,  b,  the  jield-glass.  As  I  have  made 
some  eye-pieces  of  quartz,  it  would  be  more  appro- 
priate to  call  them  eye-lens,  or  field  lens. 

The  diaphragm,  stop,  or  field-bar,  is  shown  at  c,  and 
should  be  in  the  focus  of  the  eye-lens,  a.  The  lens 
which  screws  into  the  body  at  d,  is  called  the  object- 
glass;  it  may  be  composed  of  more  than  one  lens: 
they  are  termed  collectively  objectives  or  object-glasses, 
if  they  consist  of  three  pairs,  which  is  the  usual 
form  for  the  best  deep  achromatics,  as  shown  at  fig. 
Fig.  10.  10,  where  o  is  the  place  for  the  object  (that 
(\  ( W  f]  I  being  their  combined  acting  focus) — d  is 
£  e  d  o  the  anterior  or  first  pair  of  object-glasses — 
e,  the  middle  pair — and  f,  the  third  or  posterior  pair 
of  objectives.  As  the  inner  surfaces  of  each  pair  are 
cemented  together,  to  an  ordinary  observer  they  appear 
as  one  lens,  and  consequently  the  objective  appears  to 
be  composed  of  only  three  lenses. 

Over  the  object-lenses  is  often  fitted  a  concave  silver 
reflector,  for  throwing  condensed  light  on  opaque  objects ; 
this  is  termed  the  LeiberkUhn,  silver  cap,  or  speculum,  and 
is  shown  at  Plate  4,  fig.  17- 

The   power   of  eye- pieces  is  determined  by  the  focal 

G 


82 


MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


length  and  distance  asunder  of  their  component  lenses,  and 
as  they  usually  bear  a  certain  relation  to  each  other  when 
their  construction  is  alike,  their  power  is  sufficiently  dis- 
tinguished by  simply  expressing  the  focus  of  the  eye-lens. 
Thus  we  say  this  is  an  inch  eye-piece,  meaning  that  the 
sidereal  focal  length  of  the  eye-lens  is  one  inch.  The 
acting  length  of  the  body  is  the  distance  from  the  object- 
glass  d,  to  the  diaphragm  c  (fig.  9),  though  it  is  usually 
expressed  by  the  length  of  the  tube  (fig.  8.) 

I  have  been  thus  explicit,  as  the  magnifying  power 
of  an  instrument  is  dependent  on  the  focal  length  of 
the  objective,  the  power  of  the  eye-piece,  and  length 
of  the  body,  taken  together. 

Fur.  11. 


TERMS   EMPLOYED.  S3 

The  mechanical  parts  of  a  microscope  I  shall  illustrate 
by  a  reference  to  tig.  11,  which  exhibits  the  simplest 
construction  of  a  microscope  with  which  1  am  acquainted. 
It  will  be  seen  in  the  sequel  to  be  the  same  as  my  achro- 
matic engiscope,  described  in  Chapter  VI.,  but  without 
its  apparatus  and  stand,  which  can  be  added  at  any  time 
by  its  possessor,  and  thus  avoid  the  disadvantage  usual 
in  the  purchase  of  a  cheap  microscope,  viz.  that  when 
a  better  is  required,  the  cheap  one  is  too  slight  and 
defective  in  its  construction  to  form  the  basis  of  a  supe- 
rior instrument,  and  is,  therefore,  of  necessity  thrown 
aside  as  useless. 

The  Vertical  Microscope,  fig.  4,  consists  of  a  double 
arm,  n,  a ;  the  former  to  receive  the  screwed  end  of  the 
compound  body,  d,  fig.  8  (when  employed  as  an  engi- 
scope),  and  the  latter,  a,  to  receive  the  single,  doublet, 
or  triplet  magnifiers,  when  used  only  as  a  microscope. 
b  is  a  triangular  bar,  with  a  rack  cut  on  its  posterior 
edge,  into  which  a  pinion  works,  which  is  actuated  by 
turning  the  large  milled  head,  s,  which  raises  or  depresses 
it  and  the  arm,  a,  n,  and  thus  the  adjustment  of  the 
focus  is  effected,  j  is  the  stage  on  which  the  objects  to 
be  viewed  are  placed,  and  these  latter  are  kept  down  by 
the  forked  piece,  or  finger-springs,  t.  The  mirror-socket, 
m,  slides  upon  the  stem,  c,  and  carries  the  mirror,  o, 
with  its  frame,  p.  Above  the  arm,  a,  n,  is  a  milled  head, 
g,  which  serves  to  tighten  it  in  any  position  in  which  it 
may  be  placed  :  e  is  the  circular  foot  or  stand.  When 
intended   as  a   travelling   instrument,  for  lightness  and 


84  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

portability,  the  stem,  c,  screws  into  the  top  of  the  case, 
and  the  round  foot  is  not  required. 

As  the  above  will  be  sufficient  to  explain  the  terms 
used  in  the  following  chapter,  I  shall,  to  avoid  repetition, 
explain  the  remaining  terms,  when  describing  Dr. 
Goring's  and  my  own  Engiscopes. 


85 


CHAPTER  VI. 

A  description  of  the  Achromatic  Microscope,  together  with 
its  Apparatus  and  the  mode  of  using  it. 

In  a  country  like  England,  preeminently  distinguished 
for  mechanical  inventions,  it  would  be  strange,  indeed, 
if  the  constructing  of  stands  for  microscopes,  their 
mounting's,  apparatus,  &c.  had  not  attracted  the  atten- 
tion of  some  of  her  artists.  Since  the  publication  of  the 
first  edition  of  this  work,  numerous  contrivances  of  a 
highly  ingenious  description  have  been  devised  for  their 
improvement ;  and  though  many  of  them  are  too  complex 
ever  to  become  of  general  utility,  yet  are  they  such  on 
the  whole  as  have  tended  to  advance  this  instrument  to 
its  present  effective  condition.  Several  artists  in  France 
and  Germany  have  also  especially  directed  their  thoughts 
to  the  microscope,  and  have  produced  some  which,  as 
specimens  of  workmanship,  claim,  no  doubt,  very  con- 
siderable merit ;  but  they  do  not  appear  to  have  had 
sufficiently  in  view  the  principles  upon  which  they  ought 
to  be  constructed.  Those  which  have  fallen  under  my 
notice  are  wholly  unsuitcd  for  general  purposes  of  ob- 
servation— a  circumstance  which  is  the  more  surprising, 
because  there  being  exhibited  so  much  talent  in  the  op- 


86  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

tical  department,  particularly  in  the  eye-pieces,  one 
could  hardly  imagine  that  their  usefulness  would  be 
abridged  through  their  inefficiency  in  other  respects. 

By  a  microscope  suited  for  general  observations,  is  to 
be  understood  one  of  such  construction  as  will  allow  us 
to  examine  both  opaque  and  transparent  bodies  with 
such  facility  that  we  may  ascertain  their  true  forms  and 
structure.  In  order  to  compass  this,  both  the  instru- 
ment and  the  illumination  must  admit  of  being  turned 
in  all  directions.  The  instrument  must  be  further  ca- 
pable of  carrying  a  wide  range  of  magnifying  powers, 
so  that  whether  the  object  to  be  investigated  be  of  mo- 
derate dimensions  or  a  mere  atom,  it  may  come  fully 
within  its  scope.  It  is  not  an  uncommon  case  to  find  a 
microscope  excellently  constructed  for  a  given  power, 
and  totally  unfitted  for  all  others.  For  instance,  that 
beautiful  little  instrument  for  carrying  Wollaston's 
doublets,  can  only  be  employed  with  effect  for  viewing 
very  minute  transparent  tissues,  as  the  scales  of  the 
Podura,  &c.  It  is  not  suited  for  examining  the  living 
objects  described  in  the  previous  chapters,  nor  most 
animal  or  vegetable  structures;  and  that  splendid  and 
extensive  class  of  bodies,  opaque  objects — which  require 
strong  reflected  light  and  moderate  shallow  powers  to 
render  their  beautiful  structures  appreciable — is  entirely 
beyond  its  reach.  In  either  of  the  two  microscopes  I 
shall  describe  in  this  work,  every  class  of  bodies  that 
I  am  acquainted  with  can  be  correctly  judged  of,  whilst 
they  command  a  very  extensive  range  of  powers.     Dr. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.       8^ 

Goring's  engiscope,  described  in  Chap.  VIII.,  being  on  a 
much  larger  scale  than  that  treated  of  in  the  present 
one,  is  adapted  for  carrying  the  shallowest  magnifiers 
which  can  be  required. 

As  these  instruments  have  now  become  the  standards 
by  which  all  the  better  kinds  are  made,  modified  more 
or  less  so  as  to  conform  to  the  different  views  of  the 
artists  who  make  them,  I  have  judged  it  advisable  to 
treat  of  their  several  parts  in  detail ;  in  doing  which 
many  of  the  remarks  I  shall  have  occasion  to  make,  will 
be  found  to  have  a  general  application.  My  own  instru- 
ment, with  its  various  modifications  and  additions,  to- 
gether with  their  uses,  will  form  the  subject  of  this 
chapter.  In  Chap.  VIII.  I  shall  give  a  mere  explana- 
tion of  Dr.  Goring's  aplanatic  engiscope ;  the  method 
of  making  observations  with,  and  managing  it,  being 
penned  by  himself  in  the  chapter  following  it. 

The  simplest  modification  of  my  achromatic  micro- 
scope is  represented  at  page  82,  fig.  11.  This  can  be 
used  only  in  a  vertical* position  ;  but  it  is  admitted,  I  be- 
lieve, to  be  superior  to  any  instrument  of  that  kind,  in 
steadiness,  simplicity,  and  range  of  powers.  It  will  be 
readily  conceived,  that  when  the  circular  foot  is  un- 
screwed, and  the  stem  c,  fitted  into  a  jointed  stand,  it 
becomes  the  second  modification,  shewn  in  the  following 
engraving,  fig.  12. 

This  microscope  is  represented  with  its  stem  and  axis 
in  an  inclined  position,  which  is  commonly  the  most 
convenient  one  for  the  observer.    Those  parts  of  it  which 


88 


MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 


have  been  already  described  as  belonging  to  the  vertical 
instrument,  will  be  very  briefly  referred  to  here.     Let 

Fig.    12. 


rip-.  13. 


e,  n,  represent  its  compound  body,  which  may  be  either 
achromatic  or  periscopic ;  its  lower  extremity  screws 
into  the  bent  arm,  n}  whilst  the  other  arm,  a,  is  suited  to 
receive  single  or  compound  magnifiers.  The  stage,  t, 
on  which  the  object-sliders  are  to  be  placed,  is  remova- 
ble at  pleasure.  It  is  shewn  separate  by  fig.  14.  The 
protruding  ears  on  each  side,  shewn  at,  4,  serve  to  hold 
by,  when  putting  it  on  or  removing  it  from  the  instru- 
ment. These  being  in  a  line  with  the  two  stout  pins 
which  fit  into  the  block  on  the  top  of  the  stem,  c,  prevent 
any   strain   being   occasioned   by  the   operation.      This 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.       89 

being-  attended  to,  and  the  triangular  bar,  b,  sufficiently 
raised,  we  may  proceed  with  perfect  safety.  On  the  stage 
is  fitted,  in  a  similar  manner,  by  means  of  two  smaller 
pins,  a  fork-shaped  plate  of  brass,  shewn  apart  at  fig.  13. 
This  plate  is  designed  to  retain  the  slider  firmly  on  the 
stage  when  the  instrument  is  inclined.  The  focus  is  ad- 
justed by  means  of  a  rack  and  pinion ;  the  letter,  x9 
denoting  the  large  milled  head  of  the  latter.  The 
mirror-frame  slides  up  and  down  the  stem,  c,  thus  allow- 
ing the  angle  of  the  pencil  of  light  to  be  increased  or 
diminished. 

The  stand  of  this  instrument  appears  not  to  be  different 
from  those  of  the  old-fashioned  compound  microscope,  ex- 
cept in  having  a  simple  round  foot,  which  is  here  adopted 
to  save  room  and  expense.  Like  them  it  has  a  joint  for  in- 
clining the  instrument  at  any  required  angle  ;  but  it  has, 
besides,  this  novelty,  which,  although  simple,  is  of  great 
importance,  viz.  a  capability  of  permitting  the  stem,  c, 
to  be  turned  round  on  its  axis,  so  as  to  allow  a  glass 
vessel,  or  slider  accommodated  for  animated  creatures 
or  plants,  to  be  retained  in  an  upright  position,  and 
their  coutents  investigated  without  having  recourse  to 
stoppers  or  corks.  When  any  of  these  vessels  are  used 
in  ordinarily  constructed  microscopes,  they  require  to 
be  placed  on  their  sides,  which,  independent  of  disturb- 
ing the  objects,  admits  not  unfrcqiicntly  into  the  field  of 
view,  small  portions  of  the  air  included  in  the  vessels,  so 
as  greatly  to  interrupt  our  view.  When  observations  of 
this  nature  are  to  be  made,  the  stem,  r,  should  be  turned 


90  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

a  quarter  round  to  the  left,  which  brings  the  milled 
head  x,  upwards,  and  the  arm,  n,  a,  horizontal,  where 
the  stem,  c,  is  fixed  by  the  pinching  screw,  z.  In  this 
position  a  candle  may  be  placed  close  behind  the  stage  in 
the  axis  of  the  instrument.  This  will  be  found  of  great 
advantage  in  verification.  Again,  if  the  stage  be  re- 
moved, objects  in  glass  vessels,  which  are  too  large  to  be 
held  in  the  microscope,  may  be  examined  without  re- 
moving them  for  the  purpose;  as  also  minerals,  blocks 
of  fossil  woods,  &c. 

The  universal  or  ball-and-socket  joint  being  strongly 
recommended  in  Chap.  VJL,  it  may  with  propriety  be 
asked,  why  I  have  introduced  a  different  one  into  my  own 
instrument.  The  reason  is,  that  while  all  the  requisite 
motions  are  obtained  by  means  of  the  joint  I  have 
adopted,  it  allows,  at  the  same  time,  the  stem  of  the 
microscope  to  be  over  the  centre  of  support,  by  which 
it  has  no  tendency  to  fall,  when  the  pinching  screw  is 
loosened.  In  the  universal  joint,  there  is  always  a 
tendency  to  drop  (except  when  it  is  on  its  side),  and 
a  strain  upon  it.  In  practice,  therefore,  these  are  very 
liable  to  get  out  of  order,  where  the  weight  of  the  in- 
strument is  considerable.  When  formed  on  a  small 
scale,  this  objection  vanishes;  but  when  of  the  size 
adopted  by  Dr.  Goring,  until  a  joint  can  be  constructed 
similar  to  that  in  the  human  arm,  with  a  ligament  in 
the  centre,  and  sufficient  friction  to  support  the  weight 
in  any  position,  no  person,  I  conceive,  will  give  them  the 
preference :    at  least,   so  it  has  been ;    for  where  one 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.       91 

microscope   has  been    made  with   Dr.    Goring's    joint, 
fifty  have  with  mine. 


Fii?.  15. 


Fisr.  16. 


Fig-.  15  represents  a  pair  of  forceps  and  a  pin- holder, 
attached  to  a  ball-and  socket  joint ;  the  stem,  c,  fits  into 
holes  formed  in  the  stage  to  receive  it.  Opaque  objects, 
when  mounted  on  a  circular  disc  with  a  pin,  are  held 
more  firmly  by  the  pin-holder  (as  seen  by  the  figure)  than 
by  the  forceps.  It  is  preferable,  also,  when  the  instru- 
ment is  on  a  small  scale,  to  that  ingenious  contrivance  in 
Dr.  Goring's  Engiscope  (see  plate,  fig.  23),  as  it  admits 
of  the  forceps  being  made  smaller. 

The  arm,  fig.  16,  is  used  for  carrying  the  forceps  when 
the  stage  is  removed.  The  pin,  b,  fits  into  one  of  the  holes 
in  the  block  of  the  instrument;  and  the  pin,  c,  fig.  15, 
into  the  hole,  a.  This  arrangement  for  viewing  opaque 
objects  allows  large  silver  cups  to  be  used,  for  conden- 
sing the  light  upon  them.  Tliis  could  not  be  done,  if 
the  stage  did  not  take  off,  unless  the  aperture  in  it  were 
immoderately  large. 

The  method  of  viewing1  opaque  objects  by  means  of 
silver  concave  reflectors,  is  by  far  the  simplest  and  the 
readiest;  and  when  these  are  of  considerable  diameter 
and  of  proper  curvature,  we  not  only  obtain  the  central 
illumination,  but  also  that  beautiful  play  of  light  and 
shade  afforded  by  the  oblique  pencils. 

For  investigating  insects,  or  other  objects  not  mounted 


92 


MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


on  discs  in  this  manner,  an  additional  arm  for  carrying  a 
small  black  cup,  to  be  placed  behind  the  object,  in  lieu 
of  the  disc,  is  extremely  convenient. 

Description  of  the  Solid  Tripod-stand  Achromatic 
Microscope  and  Engiscope. — This  instrument,  on  its 
simplest  mounting1,  is  represented  by  the  accompanying 
engraving,  fig.  1J.  It  is  in  all  respects  similar  to  the 
preceding  one,  except  in  its  stand.  On  this  account 
I   have  placed  it  in  the  position  in  which  it  is  used  for 


Fig.  17 


DESCRIPTION  OF  TUB  ACHROMATIC  MICROSCOPE.       03 

viewing  opaque  objects  by  silver  cups,  where  a  is  the 
concave  speculum,  ovLeiberkuhn. 

This  stand  differs  from  the  other  in  the  following  par- 
ticulars. The  pillar  is  composed  of  a  couple  of  tubes, 
the  one  sliding  within  the  other.  The  triple-milled 
ring,  q,  screws  upon  the  top  of  the  outer  one,  and 
serves  to  fix  them  together  at  any  required  elevation. 
The  base,  u,  u,  u,  consists  of  one  solid  piece  of  metal, 
the  form  of  which  is  that  which  several  years'  experience 
has  proved  to  be  the  best.  Dr.  Goring,  in  Chap.  VII., 
clearly  demonstrates  that  a  tripod  bearing  is  indispen- 
sable to  insure  firmness.  In  his  instrument,  however, 
the  base,  instead  of  being  solid,  is  composed  of  three 
pieces  (see  plate,  fig.  7)>  the  objection  to  which  is,  that 
notwithstanding  a  screw  is  used  to  counteract  their 
springing,  the  stand  is  yet  liable  to  rock.  I  have  lately 
made  some  of  his  instruments  with  a  solid  base,  similar 
to  my  own,  which  are  decidedly  preferable. 

My  tripod  form  has  been  objected  to,  although  the 
solid  base  is  now  adopted  in  all  the  best  instruments. 
It  has  been  said  to  occupy  more  room  than  those  having 
folding  legs,  and,  therefore,  to  require  a  larger  case ;  and 
again,  that  it  should  be  equilateral,  having  its  three  feet 
of  equal  length.  The  answer  to  this  is, — first,  that  no 
folding  stand  can  be  rendered  perfectly  firm,  and  that 
there  is  some  trouble  and  loss  of  time  in  arranging  it  for 
use  j  and  should  it,  through  any  hurry  or  mistake,  be 
set  up  without  properly  unfolding  the  feet,  the  instrument 
is  very  liable   to  be   injured.     And,   secondly,  the  base 


94  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

here  selected  can  be  inclosed  in  a  case  no  larger  than  is 
necessary  to  contain  all  the  other  parts  of  the  micro- 
scope m3  and,  with  a  given  weight  and  dimensions,  the 
form  is  more  steady  than  when  the  feet  are  of  equal 
length.  Of  course,  to  obtain  the  greatest  advantage,  the 
stem,  c,  should  always  be  over  the  shortest  foot. 

Having  alluded  to  the  packing  of  microscopes,  it  may 
be  mentioned,  that  upright  cases  or  cabinets  are  greatly 
superior  to  boxes  for  the  purpose,  because,  the  instant 
the  door  is  unlocked,  the  instrument  is  ready  for  use ; 
besides,  sufficient  space  is  afforded  for  a  nest  of  drawers, 
to  contain  the  apparatus  and  objects,  although  the  latter, 
perhaps,  are  better  kept  in  a  separate  cabinet. 

On  the  selection  of  proper  Magnifying  Powers. — In  a 
microscope  constructed  for  single  lenses,  doublets,  or 
triplets,  the  plain  split  end  of  the  arm,  a,  is  the  situation 
designed  to  receive  them.  Upon  examining  the  lenses, 
such  as  possess  the  largest  aperture  are  of  the  lowest 
power.  With  these  our  observations  should  generally 
begin.  There  should  be  marked,  on  them  all,  their 
respective  sidereal  focal  lengths.  This  measure  will 
indicate  very  nearly  the  distance  at  which  they  require 
to  be  adjusted  from  the  object.  When  the  object  to  be 
examined  is  a  seed  or  large  body,  commence  with  either 
of  the  three  lowest  powers.  If  the  object  is  hardly 
perceptible  with  the  naked  eye,  take  those  of  1-1  Oth  of 
an  inch  focus,  and  so  proceed,  step  by  step,  to  the  higher 
powers. 


Focal  Lengths. 

iuitgiiiivn 

10-ii 

Inches  and  Parts. 

1 

3-4ths    

Diameters, 

10 
15 

l-2nd 

1 -3rd     

20 
30 

]-4th      , 

40 

l-6th     

60 

DESCRIPTION   OF  THE  ACHROMATIC  MICROSCOPE.       95 


Table  of  Magnifying  Powers. 


Magnifying  powers,  estimated  by  a 
10-inch  standard  of  sight. 


100 

225 

400 

900 

1,600 

3,600 

MOth   100   10,000 

Moth   150   22,500 

l-20th   200    40,000 

l-30th   300   90,000 

l-40th   400   160,000 

l-50th   500   250,000 

l-60th   600   360,000 

l-80th 800   640,000 

l-100th 1,000   1,000,000 

Previous  to  placing  the  magnifier  into  the  arm  just 
mentioned,  the  triangular  bar  should  be  raised,  the 
object  put  upon  the  stage,  and  the  light  reflected  from 
the  mirror  made  to  pass  through  it.  All  this  is  more 
readily  effected  before  the  lens  is  fixed  in  its  position. 

Some  persons  prefer  having  stops  or  diaphragms  under 
the  stage,  when  making  observations  with  single  lenses. 
In  this  case,  the  aperture  of  the  magnifier  may  be  greatly 
increased  ;  for  the  stops,  so  situated,  will  have  the  same 
effect  of  reducing  the  diameter  of  the  emergent  pencil  of 
light  as  a  restricted  aperture  in  the  mounting  of  the  lens 
would  do,  whilst  the  vision  for  deep  powers  is  rendered 
by  it  more  agreeable. 


96  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Whenever  high  powers  are  used,  a  safety  slider- 
holder,  similar  to  that  shewn  by  figs.  25  and  26  in 
the  plate,  or  fig.  20,  page  106,  should  be  chosen  for 
holding  the  object  slide. 

In  the  case  of  Engiscopes,  or  Compound  Microscopes,  the 
arrangement  for  making  observations  will  be  different. 
First, — the  triangular  bar  is  to  be  raised,  and  the  bent 
screwed  arm  brought  over  to  the  centre  of  the  stage. 
Then  screw  into  it  the  body  or  tube.  To  the  upper  extre- 
jnity  fit  an  eye  piece,  of  which,  in  a  complete  microscope, 
there  are  several  of  different  powers  :  the  longest  is 
always  the  lowest  power,  and  is  marked  A.  Its  angular 
aperture,  which  determines  the  size  of  the  field  of  view,  is 
generally  less  than  that  of  the  others  (if  constructed  on  the 
Huyghean  plan),  being  limited  by  the  diameter  of  the 
body.  It  is  usually  a  little  under  30  degrees.  The  next 
eye-piece  or  middle  power,  marked  B,  and  the  deepest, 
C,  have  more  than  30  degrees  of  angular  aperture.  Their 
amplifying  powers  are  commonly  in  the  proportions  given 
given  below.  It  is  not  unusual,  however,  to  have  eye- 
pieces of  intermediate  powers,  to  suit  any  particular 
class  of  objects  we  desire  to  investigate. 

Proportional  Powers  of  Eye-pieces. 


Names. 

Diameters. 

Surfaces. 

A     -     - 

.      .       1 

-      -      1 

B     -    - 

.    .    2 

-     -     4 

C     -     - 

-     -     4  to  6      - 

-     -  16  to  36 

For  viewing  thin  sections  of  recent  or  fossil  woods, 


INSCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MlCROSCOl'K.       07 

coal  ;  jet;  the  fructification  of  ferns  and  mosses;  fossil 
shells;  seeds;  small  insects,  or  parts  of  large  ones;  molus- 
cans,  or  entomostraceans;  the  circulation  in  the  frog",  &c. 
the  eye-piece,  A,  is  best  adapted. 

Again,  for  examining  the  details  of  any  of  the  above 
objects,  the  eye-piece,  B,  should  be  substituted  ;  as  also 
for  observing  the  colours  of  crystals  illuminated  by  pola- 
rized light ;  the  pollen  of  flowers ;  the  dissections  of 
insects  ;  the  vascular  and  cellular  tissues  of  plants  ;  ani- 
malcules ;  Haver's  canals  in  sections  of  recent,  and 
the  corpuscules,  &c.  in  fossil  bones ;  the  cyclosis  in 
plants ;  the  formation  of  shell ;  the  moveable  fluids  in 
quartz  and  topaz  ;  the  organic  remains  in  thin  slices  of 
flint,  &c. ;  the  serrated  lamina  of  the  crystalline  lenses 
of  the  eyes  of  fishes  and  birds,  &c.  &c. 

And  lastly,  when  it  is  requisite  to  investigate  either  the 
minutiae  of  opaque  objects,  or  the  minute  structures  of 
delicate  tissues,  active  molecules,  polygastric  infusoria, 
and  the  raphides  in  the  milky  juice  of  plants,  &c.  the 
eye-piece,  C,  comes  into  use  ;  it  being  oftentimes  incon- 
venient, when  a  higher  power  is  needful,  to  obtain  it  by 
means  of  a  deeper  object-glass,  which  occasions  a  fresh 
arrangement  to  be  made  of  the  illumination  and  focus. 

It  must,  however,  always  be  borne  in  mind,  that  the 
more  powerful  the  eye-piece  is,  the  more  will  the  imper- 
fections in  the  object-glass  become  apparent,  because 
they  will  be  the  more  dilated.  Hence  we  should  observe, 
that  less  confidence  ought  to  be  placed  in  the  observa- 
tions made  under  a  powerful  eye-piece,   than  when  the 

n 


98  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

same  amplification  is  obtained  with  a  shallow  one,  and  a 
deeper  object-glass  :  the  preference,  therefore,  when 
great  accuracy  is  required,  should  always  be  given  to  the 
latter  arrangement  wherever  it  is  admissible. 

An  engiscope  may  be  furnished  with  one  or  more  sets 
of  object-glasses.  They  all  have  similar  screws  for  fixing 
them  into  the  lower  end  of  the  body.  When  a  set  is 
composed  of  only  two  or  three  lenses  (the  usual  con- 
struction of  shallow  ones),  it  can  give  but  one  magnify- 
ing power.  In  like  manner,  when  a  set  is  constructed  so 
as  to  take  up  a  very  large  pencil  of  rays  with  the  utmost 
definition,  although  composed  of  several  pairs  of  lenses,  it 
can  give  but  one  perfect  power.  Such  sets  should  never 
be  separated.  In  many  cases,  where  a  maximum  angle 
of  aperture,  or  a  perfect  correction,  can  be  dispensed 
with,  one  set  composed  of  three  pairs  of  cemented  lenses 
may  give  by  separation  three  different  magnifying  powers. 
These  sets  are  generally  made  so  that  their  amplifica- 
tions, in  diameters,  are  in  the  ratio  of  one,  two,  and 
three ;  and  are  preferred  by  some  observers. 

Achromatic  object-glasses  for  microscopes  are  of  various 
foci,  differing  from  two  inches  to  1-  16th  of  an  inch.  As  a 
table  of  all  the  varieties  would  occupy  more  room  than  its 
worth  would  justify  my  giving,  I  shall  specify  only  those 
which  are  mostly  used  in  the  table-microscope.  They 
afford  a  very  wide  range  of  powers,  and  one  or  the  other  of 
them  is  suited  for  every  class  of  objects  which  can  be  sub- 
mitted for  examination.  It  is  seldom  that  an  instrument 
has  the  whole  series  attached  to  it ;  and  since  many  per- 


DESCRIPTION   OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.       09 

sons  confine  their  attention  to  a  particular  class  of  objects, 
some  little  consideration  is  necessary  for  selecting  those 
sets  which  are  best  adapted  to  the  purpose.  It  is  by  no 
means  an  unfrequent  occurrence,  that  applications  are 
made  to  me,  by  those  who  have  purchased  expensive 
instruments,  for  some  particular  object-glass,  which  they 
do  not  possess,  whilst  they  have  others  which  to  them 
are  of  little  or  no  value. 

The  first  column  in  the  following  table  gives  the  side- 
real focal  length  in  inches  and  parts.  This  focal  distance, 
in  shallow  object-glasses,  is  less  than  the  distance  an 
object  should  be  placed  at  from  the  lens  when  adjusted 
for  distinct  vision ;  whereas,  with  the  higher  powers,  the 
sidereal  focal  distance  is  greater  than  that  between  the 
object  and  the  lens.  It  varies  also  with  the  length  of  the 
body.  The  second  column  shews  the  distance  at  which 
the  object  should  be  placed  from  the  object-glass.  The 
third  column  gives  the  mean  angle  of  aperture,  which 
varies  a  few  degrees  either  way.  The  last  column  gives 
the  magnifying  powers  in  diameters,  in  combination 
with  different  eye-pieces.  It  is  calculated  by  a  10-inch 
standard  for  sight. 

Sidereal  Focal    Distance  between  the    Mean  Angle  of         Magnifying 
Length.  Object  and  Lens.  Aperture.  Powers. 

Inches.  Inches.  Degrees.  Diameters. 

2   .    .    ...  2,  l-3rd 10° 20  to    50 

1    1,  l-8th 15° 30  to  120 

l-2d 3  8ths  22° 65  to  280 

l-4th l-8th     40° 150  to  500 

l-8th l-20th 50°     ....  260  to  1100 

M6th   ....  1.40th 70° 450to3000 


100  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

The  above  sets  may  be  divided  into  three  classes — the 
shallow,  medium,  and  deep  ;  which,  like  the  eye-pieces, 
I  shall  particularize  by  the  letters  A,  B,  C. 

The  shallow  object-glasses,  A,  are  mainly  serviceable 
for  opaque  objects,  which,  when  exhibited  by  means  of 
silver  specula  of  proper  dimensions  and  curvature,  yield 
a  vast  fund  of  amusement  and  instruction.  The  class  of 
objects,  enumerated  under  the  eye-piece,  A,  is  suitable 
for  them.  They  display  to  great  advantage,  also,  the 
aquatic  larvae  of  insects,  polypi,  &c.  They  are  service- 
able as  a  finder  for  minute  objects ;  for  the  general 
examination  and  selection  of  insects;  minute  fossils; 
coal,  &c. ;  the  objects  thus  selected  being  afterwards  sub- 
mitted to  the  medium  object-glasses,  B. 

Those  denominated  B,  possessing  considerable  pene- 
tration, bring  out  the  striae  and  markings  on  the  scales  of 
insects,  the  various  forms  of  the  elementary  tissues  and 
fibres  of  vegetables,  the  internal  structure  of  polypife- 
rous  zoophites  ;  whilst  a  general  view  of  those  minute 
and  delicate  living  creatures,  the  animalcula  infusoria, 
as  also  the  circulation  in  the  young  of  the  lizard,  aquatic 
plants,  &c,  is  obtained  by  the  intermediate  sets.     The 
medium-power  object-glasses,  when  constructed  with  a 
sufficient  space  in  front,  admit  of  a  minute  examination  of 
portions  of  insects  preserved  in  Canada  balsam  between 
plates  of  glass  of  the  usual   thickness.     This   class   of 
transparent  objects,  when   mounted  in  the   permanent 
manner  I  have  mentioned,  is  certainly  the  most  instruc- 
tive  and  amusing  of  any  that  we  possess;  for  although 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.       101 

we  cannot  enjoy  the  sight  of  their  motions  and  habits  as 
with  living-  specimens,  yet  are  we  in  a  measure  recom- 
pensed for  it,  by  the  advantage  of  having  them  always 
at  hand. 

The  object-glasses,  C,  are  best  adapted  for  investi- 
gating objects  of  the  most  minute  and  delicate  descrip- 
tion ;  such,  for  instance,  as  the  markings  on  the  scales  of 
the  poduraj  the  forms  and  structure  of  minute  fungi*5  ; 
the  globules  of  human  blood,  &c. 

A  variation  of  magnifying  power  is  attainable  also  by  the 
body  of  the  instrument  being  composed  of  two  or  more 
tubes  (see  fig.  17,)  the  one  sliding  within  the  other,  so  as 
to  admit  of  an  alteration  of  distance  between  the  eye-piece 
and  object-glass  :  the  power,  in  this  case,  will  vary  in  the 
direct  proportion  of  the  interval  between  the  eye-piece 
and  object-glass.  I  am  fully  aware  that  this  alteration 
in  the  conjugate  foci  of  the  object-glass  will  affect  its 
corrections  j  still,  in  some  cases,  the  advantages  to  be 
derived  from  it  will  counterbalance  this  objection. 


Having  now  given  a  description  of  the  instrument  in 
its  simplest  mounting,  together  with  examples  for  select- 
ing its  object  glasses  and  eye  pieces,  I  shall  proceed  to 
consider,  separately,  the  several  additions  which  can  be 
made  to   it,  inasmuch  as  each  one  of  them  can  be  em- 


*  Sec   Rev.    M.  J.   Berkeley's  admirable  paper  on    Fungi,  Annals   Sat. 
Hist,  vol.  i.  p.  82. 


102  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

ployed  in  the  microscope  without  reference  being  had  to 
any  of  the  rest.  By  this  means,  persons  engaged  in  parti- 
cular investigations  may  easily  judge  of  the  peculiar  appa- 
ratus which  is  suited  for  them,  and  select  accordingly. 

Sect.  1.  Candle- holder,  Shade,  and  Condenser  for  the 
Microscope. — The  first  addition  to  the  mechanical  portion 
of  a  microscope  we  may  consider  to  be  the  arm,  k,  repre- 
sented at  fig.  21,  for  carrying  a  candle  or  lamp,  to 
supply  the  requisite  illumination.  Those  persons  who 
are  in  the  habit  of  using  an  artificial  light  for  the  micro- 
scope, are  fully  aware  of  the  difficulties  there  are  in  con- 
ducting their  observations  satisfactorily  with  it.  Upon 
all  accounts,  it  is  advisable  that  the  candle  or  lamp- 
holder  should  be  attached  to  the  stem  of  the  microscope  ; 
for  by  this  arrangement  the  light  may  be  easily  kept  at 
the  required  elevation,  and  the  inconvenience  arising 
from  the  foot  of  the  candlestick  coming  in  contact  with 
the  stand  of  the  instrument,  will  be  wholly  avoided. 
Besides,  you  will  not  experience  the  annoyance  of  being 
continually  obliged  to  alter  the  direction  of  the  light, 
through  unconsciously  moving  about  the  microscope. 

Having  given  in  the  "  Micrographia,"  page  219,  a 
description  of  the  above-mentioned  apparatus,  together 
with  the  shade,  and  shewn  it  by  several  engravings,  in 
the  following  pages,  at  the  positions,  k,  I,  it  is  unneces- 
sary for  me  to  remark  further  upon  it  here.  I  may  men- 
tion, however,  that  the  same  rod  which  is  used  for  the 
purpose  of    regulating    the  illuminations,    is  made   to 


DESCRIPTION   OK  TDK  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.     103 

carry  the  condenser  also,  and  in  a  manner  the  most  effi- 
cient for  concentrating  the  light  upon  both  opaque  and 
transparent  objects.  The  condenser  is  represented  at 
my  in  the  same  figures. 

Sect.  2.  Spring -double-Stage. — This  stage,  which  is  re- 
presented at  a,  b,  c,  c,  in  fig.  24,  is  a  vast  improvement 
upon  the  ordinary  stages  shewn  in  the  previous  en- 
gravings, figs.  11,  12,  and  17-  It  answers  the  purpose  of 
a  safety-stage  for  large  objects,  mounted  on  a  slip  of  glass, 
or  contained  in  a  brass  trough,  or  large  live-box,  which 
must  be  placed  between  the  stage-plate,  «,  b>  and  the 
circular  plate  beneath  it.  This  lower  plate  being  kept 
up  by  the  two  springs,  c,  c,  allows  the  slider,  trough,  or 
aquatic  live-box,  to  be  moved  about  in  the  manner  re- 
commended by  Dr.  Goring,  in  Chap.  IX.  The  upper 
plate,  a,  b,  is  furnished  with  a  forked  piece  similar  to  that 
shewn  in  figs.  13,  14,  and  has  likewise  a  circular  ring 
for  reducing  its  aperture  when  necessary.  This  stage 
was  contrived  by  me  for  making  experiments  with  po- 
larized light;  for  which  I  consider  that  it,  or  something 
like  it,  is  indispensably  requisite. 

It  fits  on  to  the  microscope  in  the  same  way  as  do  the 
other  stages,  and  like  them  may  be  furnished  with  dia- 
phragms under  it. 

Sect.  3.  Moveable  Stage. — Various  contrivances  have 
been  made  use  of  to  give  the  stage  of  a  microscope,  when 
an  object  is  placed  upon  it  for  examination,  a  convenient 


104  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

lateral  motion.  On  Dr.  Goring's  principle,  as  described 
in  the  next  chapter,  a  corresponding  effect  is  produced 
by  moving  the  optical  portion  of  the  instrument ;  a 
system  which  doubtless  has  its  advantages,  when  either 
the  aquatic  larvae  of  insects,  or  other  large  living  objects, 
are  examined ;  as  also  when  any  sizeable  bodies  are 
being  dissected  under  the  regular  microscopes  employed 
for  that  purpose.  The  moveable  stage,  however,  for 
small  objects,  and  for  general  purposes,  is  usually  pre- 
ferred. 

The  ordinary  method  of  adjusting  a  moveable  or  tra- 
versing stage  is  by  means  of  a  couple  of  screws  working 
at  right  angles  to  each  other ;  by  turning  one  or  both  of 
which,  a  plate  affixed  to  them,  and  carrying  with  it  the 
slider-holder  containing  the  object,  is  moved  in  any  di- 
rection. Sometimes  a  screw  and  a  rack  and  pinion  are 
substituted,  by  means  of  which  all  the  movements  are 
effected  on  one  side ;  at  others,  levers  are  made  to 
answer  the  purpose.  But  by  far  the  most  elegant  in- 
vention is  that  of  the  late  Mr.  Tyrrel,  the  celebrated 
mechanical  engraver,  which,  together  with  some  im- 
provements 1  have  made  upon  it,  I  propose  to  describe, 
as  being  the  one  most  likely  to  be  adopted  generally,  and 
preferred  to  all  others.  Its  advantage  consists  in  that 
with  one  hand  and  without  removing  it,  you  can  give  to 
the  object  a  lateral  movement  in  all  directions.  This  is 
done  by  attaching  a  screw  to  the  lower  fixed  plate  of  the 
stage,  within  whose  axis  passes  the  axis  of  a  small 
pinion,  the   outer  extremity  of  each  terminating  in   a 


DESCRIPTION   OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.      105 

small  milled  head.  These  milled  heads  I  place  on  the 
same  side  as  the  large  milled  head,  x,  which  works  in  the 
rack  of  the  triangular  bar,  so  that  all  the  motions  are 
obtained  by  one  hand,  whilst  the  other  is  left  quite  at 

liberty. 

Fig.  18. 


In  the  annexed  figure,  18,  a  plan  of  this  stage  is  given. 
It  fits  into  the  block  of  my  instrument  by  means  of  two 
pins,  just  in  the  same  manner  as  the  other  stages,  &c.  are 
made  to  do. 

e,  and/,  are  the  two  milled  heads  for  effecting  the 
lateral  motion.  The  former  of  these  is  connected  with 
the  screw,  and  will  move  the  stage  to  the  right  or  left, 
the  latter  to  the  pinion,  and  will  move  the  stage  to  and 
fro.  By  turning  both  the  milled  heads,  therefore,  at  the 
same  time,  a  diagonal  motion  (by  the  composition  of 
forces)  will  be  obtained,  by  which  the  object  for  inspec- 
tion can  be  brought  and  retained  in  the  axis  of  the  in- 
strument, y,  y,  arc  two  studs  for  the  purpose  of  carrying 
the  arm  d,  at  the  further  extremity  of  which  a  pair  of 
forceps  (fig.  15)  may  be  inserted  for  holding  an  insect,  or 
any  other  object  which  may  be  required.  The  studs 
will  support  also  a  plate  of  glass  when  the  instrument  i> 


106 


MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


in   an  inclined   position,  or  the  finger-springs,  fig.  19, 
which  are  suited  to  hold  large  aquatic  live-boxes,  &c.  &e. 

Fig.  19. 


c 


o 


oD 


An  arm,  c,  is  attached  to  the  lower  fixed  plate,  for  car- 
rying a  small  condensing  lens,  or  reflector,  for  throwing 
condensed  light  upon  opaque  bodies. 

In  Mr.  Tyrrel's  arrangement  two  sockets  were  fixed 
in  the  front  at  x,  x :  the  one  for  holding  the  condensing 
lens,  and  the  other  the  forceps,  instead  of  the  studs  y,  y, 
and  the  arm  c.  The  objections  to  this  plan  were,  that 
the  condensing  lens  was  moved  together  with  the  object, 
so  that  the  illuminated  spot  did  not  remain  under  the 
centre  of  the  instrument.  The  necessary  consequence 
was,  that  a  re-adjustment  was  to  be  made  at  every  move- 
ment. Also,  the  situation  of  the  sockets  was  such  as  to 
obstruct  large  plates  of  glass  containing  thin  sections  of 
fossil  wood,  &c.  &c.  from  being  laid  upon  the  stage. 
These  inconveniences  are  entirely  obviated  in  the  im- 
proved stage. 

Fig.  20. 


The  upper  plate  or  moveable  part  of  the  stage  has  a 
circular  aperture,  b,  furnished  with  two  angular  notches, 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC  MICROSCOPE.      107 

into  which  is  fitted  by  a  bayonet-joint  the  spring  safety 
slider-holder,  fig.  20,  or  the  finely-adjusting  one  de- 
scribed in  the  Micrographia,  page  217* 

The  utility  of  these  safety-slider-holders  is,  that  if  by 
any  accident  the  object-glass  should  come  in  contact 
with  the  slider  containing  the  object  when  it  is  placed 
between  the  plates,  the  object-glass  will  not  be  damaged; 
for  the  spring  which  acts  upon  the  lower  plate  will  yield. 
I  most  strongly  recommend  that  a  good  object-glass  of 
deep  power  should  never  be  used  without  this  or  a 
similar  contrivance.  The  numbers  which  are  injured  or 
destroyed  for  want  of  this  precaution  are  very  great. 
It  is  often  quite  impossible  to  restore  them  to  their  pri- 
mitive excellence,  even  though  the  anterior  lens  of  the 
combination  should  not  be  broken.  It  may  be  remarked, 
also,  that  in  half  the  accidents  of  this  kind  which  occur, 
the  observer  is  wholly  unconscious  of  what  has  happened, 
his  attention  being  riveted  to  the  object  he  is  engaged 
with. 

Sect.  4.  The  Spring -Phial-Holder. — This  apparatus  is 
designed  to  afford  us  all  needful  assistance  towards  inves- 
tigating a  certain  class  of  objects  without  removing  them 
from  their  natural  clement — fluids.  The  circulation  or 
cyclosis  in  plants,  the  circulation  in  the  tail  of  a  fish,  the 
structure  and  functions  of  various  marine  and  fresh- 
water zoophitcs,  the  habits  of  such  entomostraccans  and 
infusoria  as  attach  themselves  to  the  sides  of  vessels,  the 
development  of  the  young  from   the  ova  of  creatures 


108  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

which  deposit  them  on  the  sides  of  vessels,  &c.  &c,  fall 
within  the  above  description. 

In  examining  any  of  these,  this  apparatus  will  be  found 
to  be  exceedingly  convenient  and  useful}  for,  by  its  aid, 
we  can  with  perfect  facility  carry  our  researches  into  the 
contents  of  any  open  vessels,  or  phials,  of  a  size  propor- 
tionable to  the  range  of  the  holder.  In  the  ordinary  way, 
a  phial  or  vessel,  unless  it  be  very  shallow  indeed,  must 
be  turned  upon  its  side,  and  stopped  with  a  cork  to  pro- 
vent  the  water  from  running  out ;  and  even  then  it  often 
happens  that  a  portion  of  the  air  included  in  the  vessel 
presents  itself  in  the  field  of  view,  so  as  greatly  to  dis- 
concert our  plans.  In  using  the  spring-phial-holder, 
however,  this  inconvenience  is  avoided :  and  there  is, 
besides,  a  more  considerable  advantage  to  be  derived 
from  it,  viz.  that  of  not  disturbing  the  objects,  by  turn- 
ing them  about,  so  as  to  accommodate  them  to  the  micro- 
scope. Again,  as  open  vessels  can  be  put  in  the  holder 
with  as  much  readiness  as  an  ordinary  slider  can  be  placed 
on  a  common  stage,  a  series  of  observations  on  the  con- 
tents of  different  vesels  may  be  made  in  a  very  short 
space  of  time.  In  viewing  by  common  means  the  cyclosis 
in  aquatic  plants,  such  as  those  of  the  order  Charace&y 
where  every  cell  throughout  the  plant  has  its  distinct  cir- 
culation, it  is  necessary  that  a  small  portion  of  the  plant 
should  be  severed  from  the  rest,  placed  in  a  slider,  and 
covered  with  a  plate  of  mica  or  glass.  This  section  will 
not  of  course  remain  alive  for  any  great  length  of  time, 
unless  it  be  carefully  replaced  in   a  large  vessel.     With 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE   ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.       109 

the  phial-holder  the  plant  may  be  of  a  size  sufficient  to 
live  for  months,  during  which  it  is  ever  ready  for  exami- 
nation without  any  preparation  whatever. 

In  a  microscope  of  the  common  construction,  if  the 
magnifier  or  object-glass  should  be  accidentally  brought 
into  contact  with  the  object,  when  it  is  placed  on  the  flip 
of  glass  used  for  the  purpose,  it  is  very  liable  to  be  de- 
stroyed. In  this  we  perceive  another  advantage  of  the 
phial-holder;  for  the  spring,  in  this  case,  behind  the 
vessel,  would  yield,  and  thus  prevent  the  injury. 

Fig.  21. 


Fig.  21  represents  the  microscope  with  the  body  e,  n, 
in  a  horizontal  position.     The  stage  is  removed,  and  the 


110 


MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 


stem  c,  turned  a  quarter  round,  where  it  is  firmly  clasped 
by  the  screw  z.  The  body  and  arm,  a,  g,  is  drawn  out 
by  turning  the  pinion-head  s,  so  as  to  admit  of  the  phial- 
holder  h,  being"  placed  in  its  situation.  This  piece  of 
apparatus  is  shewn  separately  on  a  larger  scale  at  fig.  22, 
where  p,  p,  are  meant  to  represent  the  pins  by  which  it 
is  attached  to  the  microscope.  Within  the  tube  o,  slides 
another,  s,  which  is  propelled  by  a  helical  spring  inserted 
within  it.  This  latter,  or  sliding-tube,  has  a  thin  con- 
cave plate  in  front  of  it.  When  a  phial,  or  other  glass 
vessel,  similar  to  that  shewn  at  fig.  23,  is  to  be  inserted 
into  the  phial-holder,  the  tube  s  must  be  drawn  back 
towards  o ;  when  liberated,  the  vessel  will  be  firmly  held 
in  any  position. 


Fi*.  22. 


Fig.  23  illustrates  the  method  by  which  an  aquatic 
plant  is  mounted,  to  exhibit  the  circulation.  The  plant 
is  carefully  laid  along  the  inside  of  the  vessel,  which  is 
empty.  A  slip  of  glass,  a,  is  then  covered  over  it,  with  suffi- 
cient care  to  prevent  it  being  injured.  A  small  piece  of 
cork,  b,  is  fitted  behind  it,  and  the  vessel,  then  placed  in 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE   ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.        Ill 

an  upright  manner,  is  filled  with  water.  By  this  simple 
contrivance,  for  which  we  stand  indebted  to  Mr.  Varley, 
the  plant  is  retained  close  against  the  interior  surface  of 
the  vessel,  so  as  to  admit  of  a  magnifier  of  short  focus 
approaching  it ;  whilst  in  the  space  between  the  flat  slip 
of  glass  and  the  concave  surface  of  the  vessel,  it  will  live 
some  months,  without  requiring  any  other  attention  than 
merely  adding  a  little  water  to  replace  that  which  shall 
evaporate. 

In  reflecting  upon  what  has  been  stated,  it  will  be 
evident  that  there  are  two  points  in  the  constructing  of 
our  microscopes  well  worthy  of  notice,  as  tending  to 
facilitate  the  whole  of  this  operation,  viz.  that  the  stage 
be  removeable,  and  the  stem,  c,  capable  of  being  turned 
round. 

When  the  phial-holder  is  mounted  on  a  simple  stand 
for  carrying  only  single  magnifiers,  it  becomes  a  very 
useful  instrument  for  the  above  purposes ;  as  also  for 
the  examination  of  the  progress  of  crystallizations  and 
other  chemical  actions.  In  this  mounting  it  is  named 
the  Phial-Microscope;  and  as  a  mirror  is  not  attached  to 
it,  a  lighted  candle  must  be  placed  close  to  the  end  of 
the  tube,  o,  fig.  22. 

Sect.  5.  On  the  polarizing  Microscope,  or  Apparatus 
made  use  of  for  viewing  objects  by  polarized  light  under 
the  Microscope. — Few  subjects  in  experimental  science 
have  roused  the  attention  of  philosophers  of  the  present 
age   more  than   that  of  the  polarization  of  light.     Its 


112  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

curious  action  on  natural  and  artificial  bodies,  eliciting*, 
as  it  does,  a  brilliancy  of  colours  past  all  conception,  lias 
created  so  deep  an  interest  in  the  minds  not  only  of  men 
of  science,  but  of  all  who  have  ever  witnessed  it,  that  a 
treatise   upon   an    instrument    so   intimately  connected 
with  it  as  the  microscope  is,  would,  I  am  sure,  be  deemed 
altogether  incomplete,  if  it  did  not  embrace  some  par- 
ticulars respecting1  this  great  phenomenon.     The  trans- 
mission of  light  through  two  thin  plates  of  crystal  is  an 
operation  which  can  be  readily  enough  understood ;  but 
that  the  mere  turning  of  one  of  them  a  quarter  round 
should  occasion  a  total  stoppage  of  light,  although  the 
thickness  of  the  plates  and  their  inclination  to  each  other 
remain  the   same,  is  so  contrary  to  the  general  laws  of 
optics  and  to  our  daily  experience,  that  we  should  be  at 
once  disposed  to  question  the  fact,  if  we  were  not  prac- 
tically convinced  of  its  truth.     Again,   supposing   the 
plates  to  be  in  the  position  last  named,  by  which,  as  we 
have  said,  the  light  is  intercepted  in  its  passage  through 
them,  and  it  was  suggested  to  us  to  interpose  between 
them  an  additional  plate  of  a  crystal,  the  natural  conclu- 
sion would  be,  that  this  arrangement  would  operate  to 
occasion  a  greater  exclusion,  if  possible,  than  did  the 
other,  which,  under  ordinary  circumstances,  would  doubt- 
less be  the  case.     Having  done  this,  however,  we  find, 
to  our  great  astonishment,  that  the  light  is  now  freely 
transmitted,  and  often  accompanied  with  the  most  in- 
tense   and    splendid   colouring.     To    arrange  plates  of 
crystals  in  chaste  and  pretty  designs,  so  as  to  make  these 


DESCRIPTION'  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.       1  \?> 

beautiful  effects  visible  to  the  natural  sight,  requires  both 
the  talent  of  an  artist  and  the  experience  of  a  workman. 
Enlist,  however,  but  the  microscope  into  this  interesting- 
service,  and  the  result  will  be  that  you  will  be  supplied 
at  once,  without  a  shade  of  difficulty,  with  an  almost 
endless  variety  of  natural  forms  clothed  in  the  most  bril- 
liant tints,  and  that  too  by  the  ordinary  crystallization  of 
common  salts.  Thus,  the  application  of  a  polarizing 
apparatus  to  a  microscope  must  be  considered  as  being 
highly  desirable. 

In  a  small  pamphlet,  entitled  "  A  List  of  2000  Micro- 
scopic Objects,"  I  have  given  a  brief  description  of  a 
polarizer  of  my  own  contrivance,  suggested  to  me 
through  being  informed  that  Mr.  Fox  Talbot  had  applied 
one  to  a  compound  microscope.  To  this  gentleman  is 
due  the  merit  of  having  first  brought  this  arrangement 
before  the  public ;  as  also  the  application  to  the  engi- 
scope  of  that  beautiful  invention  of  Mr.  Nicol — the 
single-image  calc  prism.  It  appears,  however,  that 
Sir  D.  Brewster  had  for  years  attached  tourmalines  to 
single  magnifiers  for  the  purpose  of  making  experiments 
on  polarization  by  crystals.  He  did  this  by  cement- 
ing the  tourmaline  to  a  plano-convex  lens,  and  then  illu- 
minating the  object  by  polarized  light  reflected  from  a 
glass  or  japanned  surface*.  Professor  Amici,  also,  has 
introduced  the  ordinary  rhombs  of  Iceland  spar  into  the 
compound   microscope  for  a  similar  purpose.     lie  has, 

*  Vide  treatise  on  Microscopes,  Encyclopfldia  Britannica,  p.  95. 
/ 


114 


MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATION*, 


indeed,  prosecuted  the  investigation  of  this  subject  by 
means  of  the  microscope,  to  a  much  greater  extent  than 
any  one  else,  by  making  it  available  towards  exhibiting 
the  rings  in  plates  of  crystals  cut  across  their  axes,  and 
the  exquisite  tints  in  unannealed  glass,  &c. 

Fig.  25. 
S  p  C^ 

f2L        P' 


In  these  experiments  I  find  that  achromatic  object- 
glasses  are  almost  essential ;  for  with  common  ones  the 
aperture  is  necessarily  so  reduced,  that  a  sufficient 
quantity  of  light  will  not  be  transmitted  to  give 
intensity  to  the  colouring.  The  object-glasses  classed 
under  A,  will  be  found  most  suitable ;  and  the  eye-piece, 
B,  best  constructed  to  take  in  the  largest  field  admissible 

by  the  prism. 

Let  i,  fig.  25,  represent  the  body  of  a  compound  micro- 
scope, carefully  placed  over  the  centre  of  the  spring- 
double-stage,  a,  b.  Let  a  slider  of  crystals  be  placed 
upon  the  stage,  a,  b  ;  adjust  to  the  focus,  and  illuminate 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE   ACHROMATIC   M  IC  ROSCOPK.        11") 

witli  as  intense  a  light  as  can  be  made  to  pass  through 
them.  Now,  insert  into  the  socket  under  the  stage,  at 
e,  a  single-image  prism,  and  then  examine  the  crystals. 
They  will  still  retain  their  usual  colour,  if  any,  though 
the  light  passed  through  them  is  polarized.  This  prism  is 
termed  the  polarizer. 

Next,  unscrew  the  cap  of  the  eye- piece,  P,  and  apply 
another  cap,  containing  a  tourmaline,  or  single-image 
prism.  This  latter  is  shewn  separately  at  P'.  By 
turning  one  of  the  prisms  gently  round,  it  will  be 
noticed  that  in  certain  positions  no  more  light  will  be 
transmitted  than  just  so  much  as  passes  directly  through 
the  crystal;  whilst  the  crystal,  which,  before  the  upper 
prism  or  analyzer  was  added,  was  colourless,  now  dis- 
plays the  most  brilliant  colours.  If  a  crystal  be  se- 
lected exhibiting  a  deep  orange  tint,  and  the  eye  be  fixed 
upon  it  as  the  prism  is  turned  a  quarter  round,  the 
colour  will  gradually  change  to  green,  and  the  light 
will,  at  the  same  time,  be  freely  transmitted  through  the 
microscope  ;  in  other  words,  the  field  of  view  will  be- 
come illuminated  in  the  same  manner  as  when  a  trans- 
parent object  is  viewed  in  the  ordinary  way.  Continue 
turning  the  prism  another  quarter  of  a  revolution,  and 
the  light  will  again  be  stopped,  and  the  crystal  will 
resume  its  rich  orange  tint.  The  two  prisms  are  mounted 
in  brass  tubes,  with  caps.  The  longer  one  is  to  be  used 
under  the  stage,  as  polarizer,  and  the  shorter  above,  as 
analyzer. 

When  the  analyzer  is  a  plate  of  tourmaline,  instead  of 


116  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Mr.  Nicoi's  single- image  calcareous  prism,  a  more 
extended  field  of  view  will  be  obtained  ;  notwithstanding 
which,  the  latter  possesses  many  advantages  over  the 
former,  most  especially  that  of  its  being  colourless. 

In  cases  where  the  ingenious  invention  of  Mr.  Nicol 
cannot  be  procured,  a  rhomb  of  Iceland  spar  may  be 
well  enough  substituted,  provided  only  that  it  has  a 
small  aperture  at  the  under  surface,  and  that  the  upper 
one  is  furnished  with  a  sliding  plate,  with  a  correspond- 
ing aperture,  so  that  one  or  other  of  the  images  can  be 
seen  at  pleasure.  Sir  D.  Brewster,  who  adopts  this 
method,  cements  a  thin  plate  of  glass  upon  both  surfaces 
of  the  rhomb,  to  take  away  their  imperfections,  and  to 
prevent  accidents  occurring,  or  deterioration  of  the 
polish  by  cleaning. 

The  peculiar  advantages  resulting  from  the  application 
of  the  rhomb  of  Iceland  spar,  I  shall  give  in  Sir  David's 
own  words.  "These  rhombs  maybe  made  even  out  of 
rhombs  crossed  with  vt  ins,  which  multiply  the  images, 
because  the  multiplied  images  are  at  too  great  a  distance 
from  the  principal  ones  to  be  visible.  This  is  a  pecu- 
liar advantage,  as  it  is  often  very  difficult  to  get  good 
pieces  of  spar  free  from  this  composite  structure. 

"This  method  of  constructing  a  polarizing  rhomb 
enables  us  to  take  advantage  of  the  two  lateral  images 
which  accompany  the  two  principal  images  in  crystals 
crossed  by  on  evein.  These  lateral  images,  shewn  at 
m,  n,  fig.  26,  are  distant  from  one  another,  and  from  the 
principal  images,  b,  c;    and  as  each  of  them   consists  of 


DESCRIPTION   OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.       117 

light  wholly  polarized  in  one  plane,  we  have  only  to 
bring"  one  of  them  under  the  aperture  of  the  object-glass, 
to  have  an  admirable  polarizer,  without  being  at  the 
trouble  of  stopping  out  any  of  the  other  pencils. 

"The  images,  mf  n,  are  much  less  bright  than  the 
principal  ones,  b,  c  ;  but  this  is  really  of  no  consequence, 
as  we  can  obtain  any  degree  of  light  we  choose  in  the 
microscope,  either  by  the  condensation  of  artificial,  or 
the  use  of  solar  light. 

Fig  26. 
m,  b,  c,  n, 


o  o  m 


"When  the  vein  by  which  these  lateral  images  are 
formed  is  above  a  certain  thickness,  their  light  is  white  ; 
but  they  arc  most  frequently  coloured  ;  and  the  observer 
who  understands  the  cause  of  these  colours  may  make 
this  coloured  pencil  of  great  service  in  microscopical 
observations.  If  he  uses  a  rhomb,  which  gives  to  m  a 
green  of  the  second  order,  it  will  contain  none  of  the 
extreme  violet  and  blue  rays,  and  none  of  the  extreme 
red  ;  so  that  it  affords  a  more  homogeneous  pencil  than 
if  it  were  white  light,  and  thus  improves  the  performance 
of  a  microscope  that  is  not  achromatic. 

"  He  may,  in  like  manner,  use  tints  which  give  (he 
red  extremity  or  the  blue  extremity  of  the  spectrum,  or 
even,  when  the  tint  is  divisible  by  the  prism  into  perio- 
dical bands,  he  may  absorb  the  least  luminous  of  these 
band?,  and    create  a   homogeneous  pencil  of  polarized 


118  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

light,  of  inestimable  value  in  particular  researches,  and 
with  particular  microscopes. 

"  But,  independent  of  these  advantages,  the  method  of 
using  a  lateral  pencil,  m,  has  the  great  advantage  of  not 
requiring  any  thickness  in  the  rhomb.  A  Nicol's  prism, 
and  a  rhomb  in  which  the  two  principal  images,  b,  c,  are 
used,  must  be  about  an  inch  thick,  in  order  to  be  effica- 
cious ;  but  the  distances,  m,  n,  or  m,  b,  are  the  same  at 
all  thicknesses,  so  that  Ave  can  use  rhombs  for  this  pur- 
pose which  are  quite  useless  for  any  other. 

u  It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  add,  that  similar  rhombs  in 
which  either  the  principal  images,  b,  c,  or  the  lateral  ones, 
m,  n,  are  used,  may  be  employed  for  the  analyzer.  For 
this  purpose,  a  thin  plate,  in  which  m,  or  n,  is  white,  is 
peculiarly  applicable,  as  it  enables  us  to  see  at  once  the 
whole  field  of  the  microscope*." 

In  all  the  effects  produced  by  the  foregoing  arrange- 
ments, the  field  of  view  is  either  black  or  white.  By 
employing,  however,  the  stage  represented  by  fig.  25, 
and  inserting  between  the  upper  plate  and  the  circular 
one  a  plate  of  crystal  or  unannealed  glass,  the  back 
ground  may,  at  pleasure,  be  made  to  assume  a  variety  of 
colours,  so  that  the  crystals  shall  appear  like  so  many 
coloured  gems  set  in  different  tinted  mountings  ;  whilst, 
without  this  addition,  they  all  seem  to  be  set  on  black 
velvet. 

Considerable  advantage  is  derived,  also,  from  my  con- 
trivance of  the  double  stage,  in  the  examination  of  Mr. 

*  Treatise  on  Microscopes,  p.  104. 


DESCRIPTION   OFTHK   ACHROMATIC    MICROSCOPE.       Ill) 

Talbot's  "  Analytic  Crystals."  As  these  experiments, 
however,  are  full  of  interest,  I  have  judged  it  advisable 
to  extract  from  the  Philosophical  Transactions,  and  give 
entire,  in  the  Appendix,  Mr.  Talbot's  own  papers  upon 
the  subject. 

If,  in  place  of  the  upper  prism,  or  analyzer,  a  double- 
image  prism  be  fixed  at  P,  another  and  very  beautiful 
series  of  effects  will  result  from  the  exchange.  With  this 
modification  there  will  at  the  same  instant  be  seen  two 
images  of  the  object  arrayed  in  their  complementary 
colours  ;  and  if  we  turn  this  prism  round  in  the  manner 
before  described,  an  interchange  of  colours  will  take 
place  between  the  images,  the  one  assuming  that  of  the 
other.  If  long  needle-shaped  crystals  are  procured  for 
the  purpose,  the  two  images  will  be  so  far  separated  as 
to  appear  quite  distinct.  They  will  vary  in  their  positions 
also,  as  well  as  in  their  colours -and  intensity,  while  the 
prism  is  being  turned.  A  moon-shaped  or  crescent  form 
of  complementary  colours  will  be  discernible  on  each 
side  of  the  field  of  view,  while  the  latter  will  be  white, 
from  the  union  of  the  two  complementary  colours.  The 
most  gorgeous  effect  of  all,  however,  is  produced  by  this 
double-image  prism  when  a  plate  of  quartz  is  inserted 
below  the  crystals  (say  crystals  of  chlorate  of  potass) 
placed  at  a,  b.  In  short,  the  whole  experiment  is  so 
beautiful,  that  it  is  in  vain  to  attempt  any  thing  like  a 
description  of  it. 

Some  crystals   possess   the   peculiar  property  of  exhi- 
biting  two   colours,    when    viewed    by  polarized    light ; 


120  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATION?.. 

the  one  being  elicited  by  the  ordinary,  and  the  other  by  the 
extraordinary  ray.  Hence  they  are  termed  'dichromatic. 
To  display  dichroism  in  crystals,  the  lower  prism,  or  pola- 
rizer, should  alone  be  used  ;  the  eye-piece  being  allowed 
to  remain  as  when  objects  are  viewed  by  common  light. 
If,  whilst  the  dichromatic  body  is  under  examination,  the 
polarizing  prism  be  turned  a  quarter  round,  the  colour 
will  also  be  changed.  In  conducting  these  experiments, 
the  illumination  need  not  be  so  intense.  In  large  crystals, 
dichroism  may  be  readily  seen  without  the  aid  of  a  micro- 
scope, simply  by  placing  them  between  the  eye  and  a 
japanned  reflector  inclined  at  the  polarizing  angle. 

In  order  to  convert  the  microscope  into  a  complete 
polariscope,  I  employ,  instead  of  the  mirror  n,  a  pola^ 
rizing  reflector,  formed  of  several  parallel  plates  of 
thin  glass  fixed  at  the  angle  of  polarization.  A  stage 
must  be  constructed  with  a  large  condensing  lens,  and 
made  to  slide  upon  the  same  stem,  c,  as  is  used  for  the 
mirror.  A  double  object-glass  must  be  attached  to  the 
body  for  obtaining  a  proper  magnifying  power,  and  the 
analyzer  should  be  made  of  tourmaline,  in  order  to  pro- 
cure an  expansive  field  of  view.  With  this  arrangement, 
the  phenomenon  of  polarized  light,  as  exhibited  in  unan- 
nealed  glass,  plates  of  amethyst,  as  also  the  coloured 
rings  and  black  crosses  in  crystals  cut  across  their  optical 
axes,  are  seen  in  the  most  perfect  manner.  Professor 
Amici  was  the  first  to  exhibit  these  curious  effects  by 
means  of  the  microscope,  although  I  do  not  know  the 
exact  construction  of  his  apparatus. 


DESCIUPTION   OF  THK  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.     121 

Sect.  6.  Apparatus  for  dissecting. — Since  the  days  of 
Lyonet  and  Swammerdam,  until  of  late,  very  little  pro- 
gress has  been  made  towards  producing  a  microscope  of 
a  more  complete  description  than  their' s,  for  the  purpose 
of  dissecting.  It  is  true  that  two  or  three  of  this  sort 
have  been  constructed,  but  then  they  have  been  suited 
for  only  one  particular  class  of  objects,  such  as  the  ele- 
mentary tissues  of  plants,  &c.  Dr.  Goring's  engiscope, 
with  the  additions  hereafter  mentioned  as  belonging  to 
myown  microscope,  probably  approaches  the  nearest  of 
any  to  an  efficient  dissecting  microscope ;  nevertheless, 
a  still  further  advantage  may  be  derived  from  having  a 
separate  stand  of  proper  dimensions  made  expressly  for 
the  purpose.  As  one  set  of  magnifiers  will  of  course 
suffice  for  both  stands,  the  expense  will  not  be  consi- 
derable. The  microscope  described  in  this  chapter,  with 
the  dissecting  apparatus  attached  to  it,  is,  I  conceive,  as 
complete  as  any  one  of  that  size  can  be  rendered ;  its 
dimensions  however,  are  barely  sufficient  for  the  dis- 
secting of  large  objects. 

Having  alluded  to  Swammerdam's  microscope,  it  may 
be  advisable,  I  think,  before  describing  my  own  appa- 
ratus, to  refer  the  reader  to  an  account  of  his  method  of 
proceeding  (as  given  in  the  Appendix)  ;  containing,  as 
it  does,  many  useful  remarks.  After  the  perusal  of  this, 
and  a  brief  description  of  Lyonet's  dissecting  micro- 
scope, the  reader  will  be  fully  prepared  to  understand 
the  construction  I  have  adopted. 

Lyonet's    dissecting    microscope    may    be    thus    de- 


122 


MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 


scribed  : — It  consisted  of  a  circular  brass  table,  in  which 
was  cut  a  circular  aperture  half  way  between  the  centre 
and  the  circumference.  This  table  and  aperture  served 
the  purposes  of  an  ordinary  stage,  and  held  a  watch- 
glass,  trough,  &c.  to  contain  the  object  for  dissection. 
Under  the  aperture  was  placed  the  mirror ;  and  on  the 
opposite  side  to  that  where  the  aperture  was  made,  was 
inserted  a  socket,  to  which  a  number  of  universal  joints, 
strung  together  like  a  row  of  beads,  were  attached.  On 
the  terminal   one  was  placed  the  magnifier.   Now  fig.  27 

Fiff.  27. 


is  a  drawing  of  my  instrument,  placed  in  a  vertical 
position,  as  if  intended  for  dissecting.  Nos.  2,  3,  represent 
a  wooden  rest  for  supporting  the  hands ;  this  fits  on  to 
the  joint  on  the  top  of  the  pillar  of  the  microscope,  where 
it  is  firmly  retained.  Near  to  each  end,  on  the  upper 
surface  of  the  rest,  is  a  deepened  or  hollow  place  to  pre- 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICAOACOPE.        123 

vent  the  hands  from  slipping.  It  will  be  observed,  that 
the  rest  here  given  is  perfectly  straight ;  notwithstand- 
ing, in  some  cases,  it  will  be  more  convenient  to  have  it 
of  a  semicircular  or  curved  form.  There  is  an  arm,  a, 
which  slides  in  a  socket  attached  to  an  universal  joint. 
This  arm  has  a  spring  ring  for  carrying  the  magnifiers, 
which  are  inserted  into  it  in  the  same  manner  as  into 
the  plain  end  of  the  arm,  shewn  in  several  previous 
figures.  The  dissecting  trough,  #,  is  placed  in  the 
moveable  stage  in  the  way  described  in  "  Micrographia," 
page  215.  This  trough,  which  contains  the  object  to  be 
operated  upon,  is  capable  of  being  turned  about  in  any 
direction.  When  the  object  is  opaque,  the  condensing 
lens,  m,  shewn  in  figs.  29,  30,  must  be  brought  into  the 
position,  A,  to  concentrate  the  light  upon  it. 

Single  or  doublet  magnifiers  are  commonly  preferred 
to  the  compound  microscope  for  dissecting,  because  the 
latter  instrument  inverts  the  image  of  the  object.  The 
amplifying  powers,  which  are  most  generally  service- 
able, are  those  from  an  inch-and-a-half  focus  to  the  one- 
tenth  of  an  inch.  When  higher  powers  are  requisite, 
the  lenses  should  be  made  of  jewels,  as  they  allow  d 
more  space  between  the  object  and  the  lens  than  do 
glass  ones. 

The  advantages  which  I  conceive  this  arrangement 
possesses  over  others,  arc  as  follow  : — In  the  first  place, 
the  rest  or  support,  being  made  of  wood,  does  not  con- 
duct the  heat  away  from  the  hands  so  freely  as  if  it  were 
of  metal.     2dly.  It  being  situated  over  the  central  sup- 


124  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

port  of  the  instrument,  and  being  independant  of  it,  all 
straining  upon  the  microscope  is  avoided,  and  the  stage 
may  be  inclined  without  disturbing  the  hands.  This 
will  be  found  to  have  a  two-fold  advantage ;  for,  by  in- 
clining the  instrument,  the  operator  is  placed  more  at 
his  ease  ;  and  the  superfluous  matter  can  be  easily  drained 
away,  which  is  necessary  when  large  insects  are  being 
dissected.  For  dissecting  these  objects,  thin  pieces  of 
soft  wood,  having  brass  rings  cemented  to  their  under 
sides,  and  being  fitted  into  the  moveable  or  other  stage, 
will  be  found  extremely  convenient. 

The  integuments  of  these  creatures,  as  soon  as  they 
are  laid  open,  should  be  pinned  down  upon  the  wood, 
while  the  nervous,  respiratory,  or  alimentary  organs 
are  being  removed.  The  fatty  matter,  so  very  abundant 
in  insects,  must  be  washed  away  with  a  camel-hair 
pencil.  By  forming  a  ledge  round  the  wood  with  a 
little  wax,  the  creature  may  be  dissected  under  water 
or  diluted  spirits. 

The  arm,  a,  having  an  universal  joint,  may  be  turned 
about  in  any  direction ;  and  should  any  remarkable 
feature  present  itself  whilst  dissecting,  which  it  is  de- 
sirable to  examine  without  removing  it,  this  may  be 
readily  effected  by  taking  off  the  screw-nut,  #,  and  substi- 
tuting the  usual  arm  of  the  microscope,  with  the  achro- 
matic body. 

Sometimes  the  achromatic  body  is  employed  in  making 
dissections ;  in  this  case,  the  image  being  inverted,  it 
requires  some  practice  in  using  the  dissecting   instru- 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC  MTCROSCOPU.      125 

merits,  unless  an  erecting  eye-piece   is  applied,  as  men- 
tioned in  the  following  chapters. 

Sect.  7-  Single  Lenses  mounted  in  imitation  of  Achro- 
matic Object-glasses. — A  series  of  single  lenses  mounted 
as  object-glasses,  and  of  the  same  foci  and  angular 
aperture  as  achromatics,  will  prove  an  excellent 
method  of  instituting  a  comparison  between  their  relative 
values.  The  object-glasses  are  the  most  costly  portion 
of  an  achromatic  microscope,  notwithstanding  to  ordi- 
nary observers  they  appear  not  to  differ  exteriorly  from 
common  lenses  mounted  in  the  manner  described.  Some 
persons  are  very  apt  to  imagine  that  the  additional  price 
of  the  one  above  the  other  is  owing  to  the  achromatics 
superior  magnifying  power  ;  but  as  this  does  not 
necessarily  follow,  these  single  lenses  will  manifest  at  once 
wherein  the  superiority  consists. 

By  way  of  trial,  screw  to  the  body  of  the  microscope 
one  of  the  single  lenses  ;  place  an  object  under  it,  and 
examine  it  with  attention  :  then  remove  the  single 
lens,  and  substitute  an  achromatic  object-glass  in  its 
stead,  allowing  the  object,  eye-piece,  and  other  portions 
of  the  instrument,  to  remain  as  before.  The  difference 
will  be  apparent  enough  in  a  few  minutes  to  leave  a  full 
and  lasting  impression  upon  the  mind,  of  the  extensive 
improvement  which  has  of  late  years  taken  place  in  this 
respect.  I  know  of  no  better  mode  than  this  by  which 
persons  unacquainted  with  optical  science  can  judge 
fairlv  of  what  has  been  eftected  for  the  microscope. 


126  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

The  achromatic  will  be  distinguishable  from  the  single 
lens  by  its  exceeding  penetration,  and  by  the  total  free- 
dom from  spherical  and  chromatic  aberration  with 
which  the  light  is  transmitted  through  it.  It  is  true 
that  if  the  common  lens  have  a  diaphragm  to  limit  its 
aperture,  the  vision  will  be  more  distinct,  and  the  light 
less  coloured ;  but  then,  compare  the  two  again,  and  in 
the  case  of  the  single  lens  there  will  be  a  perceptible 
diminution  of  light,  and  the  eye  will  soon  grow  weary  in 
endeavouring  to  trace  out  the  minutiae  of  an  object. 

Sect.  8.  Garden  Clamp  for  the  Microscope. — This  piece 
of  apparatus  enables  us  to  employ  the  microscope  for 
the  examination  of  flowers  and  plants  in  the  garden  or 
greenhouse.  The  clamp  is  represented  by  the  annexed 
engraving,  fig.  28.     The   end,  c,  may  be  screwed  to  a 

Fig.  28. 


tree,  door-frame,  or  any  other  convenient  place.  The 
body  of  the  microscope  is  then  inserted  into  it  at  a,  and 
fixed  there  by  the  pinching  screw,  b.  To  the  lower  end 
of  the  body  is  screwed  a  small  arm,  constructed  for  the 
purpose,  and  carrying  the  forceps  for  holding  the  object. 
The  object-glasses,  A,  with  their  silver  specula,  are  the 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.      127 

most  serviceable  for  this  occupation,  as  the  adjustment  is 
very  readily  made  with  them.  The  microscope,  suitably 
equipped,  may  be  used  for  examining  flowers  without 
either  its  stand  and  apparatus,  or  the  clamp  :  the  body, 
with  the  arm  above  mentioned,  being  merely  held 
in  the  hand.  A  variation  in  the  magnifying  power  is 
obtained  by  sliding  the  body  in  and  out,  and  thus  avoids 
the  necessity  of  changing  the  object-glasses,  which, 
out  of  doors,  would  be  attended  with  some  risk  of  loosing 
them. 

Sect.  9.  Steadying  Rods. — When  we  have  recourse  to 
very  high  powers  for  making  microscopic  observations, 
it  is  of  consequence  that  the  microscope  be  kept  as 
steady  as  possible,  all  motion,  or  tremor,  being  magnified 
to  the  same  extent  as  the  object  itself.  Under  such  cir- 
cumstances, it  is  often  expedient  to  have  one  or  two 
sliding  rods,  whose  upper  extremities  may  be  attached  to 
the  eye- end  of  the  body,  and  their  lower  to  the  feet  or 
pillar  of  the  stand.  When  these  rods  are  employed,  all 
their  tightening  screws  must  remain  loose  until  the 
instrument  is  set  in  the  proper  position — the  moveable 
stage,  with  its  fine  adjustment,  put  on,  and  the  object- 
glass,  selected  and  adjusted  to  distinct  vision  by  means 
of  the  rack  and  pinion,  in  the  usual  way.  When  this  ia 
effected,  the  steadying  rods  may  be  clamped  tight  with 
the  pinching  screws,  and  all  subsequent  adjustment  to 
distinct  vision  made  by  the  fine  adjustment,  the  rack  and 
pinion  being  nowT  considered  immoveable. 


128  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATION'S. 

Although  this  contrivance  sufficiently  obviates  the  an- 
noyance occasioned  by  tremor,  yet  I  strongly  recommend 
a  small  stout  stand  being  had  expressly  for  the  purpose  ; 
the  additional  expense  not  being  great,  whilst,  from 
its  simplicity  and  convenience,  you  will  be  amply 
recompensed. 

Another  purpose  to  which  the  steadying  rods  may  be 
applied,  is  that  of  drawing  with  the  camera  lucida.  In 
this  case,  the  body  of  the  microscope  should  first  be 
ranged  horizontally,  the  steadying  rods  tightened  with 
the  clamping  screws,  and  then  the  requisite  adjustments 
made,  the  body  remaining  a  fixture. 

Sect.  10.  Camera  Lucida  for  drawing  with  the  Micro- 
scope.— This  instrument  is  constructed  in  a  variety  of 
ways,  but  the  most  serviceable  is  that  shewn  in  the  plate, 
fig.  12.  As  there  is  only  one  reflection,  the  image  of  the 
object  is  presented  to  you  with  its  sides  reversed,  re- 
sembling a  copper-plate  engraving  from  which  the  im- 
pression is  taken.  The  method  of  using  this  instrument 
is  as  follows  : — With  my  microscope,  the  cap,  or  cover, 
which  limits  the  pencil  emerging  from  the  eye-piece, 
must  be  unscrewed,  and  the  ring,  to  which  the  camera  is 
attached,  substituted  in  its  stead.  This  ring  is  furnished 
with  a  pin  for  the  camera  prism  to  slide  upon,  which 
may  thus  be  made  to  approach  or  recede  from  the  eye- 
lens  to  suit  the  emergent  pencils  of  light.  The  inclina- 
tion is  regulated  by  turning  it  on  its  axis. 

For  making  drawings  of  microscopic  objects,  the  eye- 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE   ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.        120 

piece  may  be  conveniently  removed  from  the  body  of  the 
microscope,  and  the  end  covered  with  a  cap,  having  a 
plate  of  finely  ground  or  greyed  glass  fitted  into  it.  On 
this  plate  the  image  of  the  object  will  be  formed,  and 
distinct  vision  obtained  by  adjusting  the  focus  in  the 
usual  manner.  In  this  case,  the  eye-end  of  the  micro- 
scope, in  order  to  produce  the  desired  effect,  must  be 
kept  darker  than  the  other  extremity.  If,  instead  of  the 
plate  of  glass,  a  piece  of  tracing  paper  be  employed,  the 
image  may  be  delineated  at  once.  Also,  the  glass  may 
have  divisions  marked  upon  it  similar  to  those  in  the 
plate,  fig.  13,  and  be  used  with  drawing  paper  traversed 
with  squares,  on  Mr.  Bauer's  plan,  described  in  the 
Micrographia. 

One  great  advantage  which  the  camera  lucida  derives, 
from  its  connexion  with  the  telescope  or  microscope,  is, 
that  the  reflected  image  is  thrown  on  the  drawing  paper, 
so  as  to  appear  in  the  same  plane  with  it.  When  it  is 
used  without  either  of  these  instruments,  the  image 
is  formed  at  the  same  distance  below  it  as  the  object  is 
distant  from  it  in  front ;  thus  occasioning  an  error  by 
parallax  with  the  image  and  pencil,  upon  the  slightest 
motion  of  the  eye. 

Beginners  in  drawing  experience  some  difficulty  in 
obtaining  a  distinct  view  of  the  point  of  the  pencil  simul- 
taneously with  the  magnified  image.  The  Rev.  J.  B. 
Reade  informs  me,  that  by  illuminating  the  object  with 
strong   lamp-light   in   the  day-time,   and  the   paper  on 

K 


]30  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

which  the  tracing  is  made  with  day-light,  this  inconve- 
nience is  entirely  remedied. 

Sect.  11.  Micrometer  Eye-pieces.— The  micrometer  eye- 
piece is  made  to  slide  into  the  body  of  the  microscope, 
like  the  ordinary  eye-pieces.  This  eye-piece  is  designed 
either  for  drawing  or  measurement.  When  we  employ 
it  for  drawing,  a  plate  of  glass,  with  divisions  similar  to 
those  represented  in  the  plate,  fig.  13,  must  be  used,  in 
the  manner  described  by  Mr.  Bauer.  When  for  mea- 
surement, a  slip  of  pearl,  with  divisions  of  100  or  200 
to  an  inch,  answers  best  for  all  practical  purposes.  It 
must  be  remarked,  however,  that  the  same  divisions  re- 
present different  measurements  according  to  the  power 
of  the  object-glass  and  length  of  the  body.  When,  there- 
fore, they  are  once  ascertained  by  the  rules  laid  down 
in  the  Micrographia,  page  48,  they  must  not  be  altered. 

For  either  of  the  above  purposes,  the  micrometer  must 
be  placed  at  c,  page  80;  in  the  focus  of  the  eye-lens,  a. 
Now  as  the  distance  of  distinct  vision  differs  in  different 
persons,  and  even  in  the  same  person,  according  to  his 
state  of  health,  the  adjustment  must  be  made  so  as  to  vary 
the  distance  bet  veen  a  and  c.  This  is  ordinarily  done 
by  moving  the  lens  ft,  with  a  screw.  On  consideration, 
however,  it  is  evident  that  by  this  means  the  achromatism 
of  the  eye-piece  is  disturbed.  I  have  obviated  this  defect 
with  my  eye-pieces  by  giving  the  adjustment  to  the 
field-bar,  c,  which  carries  the  micrometer. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC  MICROSCOPE.      131 

Sect.  12.  Method  of  viewing  moveable  Fluids  in  the  Ca- 
vities of  Topaz ',  Quartz,  and  other  Crystals. — The  existence 
of  small  cavities  in  crystals  is  of  such  frequent  occur- 
rence, that  few  persons  who  are  in  the  habit  of  seeing 
crystals  at  all,  can  be  unacquainted  with  the  fact. 
That  some  of  these  cavities,  however,  contain  moveable 
fluids,  is  a  recent  discovery,  for  which  we  stand  indebted 
to  Sir  D.  Brewster.  As  I  am  not  aware  that  the  method 
of  observing  these  under  the  microscope  has  ever  been 
explained,  a  few  words  upon  this  subject  may  not  be 
considered  superfluous. 

Let  your  microscope  be  placed  in  a  vertical  position  ; 
apply  a  power  of  100  or  200  diameters,  and  put  the 
crystal  for  examination  upon  the  stage.  Bring  one  of 
these  cavities  into  the  centre  of  the  field,  and  adjust  to 
distinct  vision,  when  the  fluid  will  be  discerned  within 
the  cavity,  resembling  an  air-bubble.  The  proof  that 
this  appearance  is  occasioned  by  a  fluid  contained  within 
the  crystal  is  very  readily  ascertained.  Take  a  metal- 
heater  of  a  proper  size,  having  a  hole  in  the  middle  to 
allow  the  light  to  pass  through  ;  warm  it,  and  hold  it  by 
its  handle  under  the  aperture  in  the  stage,  close  behind 
the  glass  plate  upon  which  the  crystal  is  situated. 
During  this  operation  you  will  observe  the  fluid  in 
the  cavity  expand,  and,  in  some  cases,  become  vola- 
tilized ;  and  then,  upon  cooling  again,  return  to  its  fluid 
condition. 

Many   of  the    cavities    in   gems,    particularly    in    the 


132  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

diamond  and  garnet,  are  perfectly  spherical ;  and,  owing 
to  the  great  refractive  power  of  these  stones,  they  have 
the  appearance  of  hlack  and  opaque  globules  with  a 
small  bright  spot  of  light  in  their  centres.  The  propor- 
tion between  the  diameters  of  the  dark  annulus  and  the 
luminous  spot,  Sir  D.Brewster  has  ingeniously  proposed 
as  a  measure  of  the  refractive  powers  of  both  the  solid 
and  the  fluid.  He  has  suggested,  also,  that  these  cavities 
being  permanent,  arc  preferable  to  Dr.  Goring's*  air 
bubbles  in  Canada  balsam,  for  determining  the  aberra- 
tions of  object-glasses  ;  but  a  little  consideration,  I 
think,  will  suffice  to  shew  that  both  the  one  and  the 
other  of  these  tests  must  give  erroneous  results  for 
ordinary  objects.  And  for  this  simple  reason,  because 
the  light  coming  from  the  cavity  to  the  object-glass* 
through  a  portion  of  the  gem,  will  be  refracted  by  it, 
and  enter  the  object-glass  in  a  different  state  to  what 
it  would  have  done  had  no  such  medium  intervened 
between  the  cavity  and  the  lens. 

In  examining  the  organic  remains  embedded  in  flint, 
the  object-glass  requires  to  be  corrected  by  this  test,  as 
the  rays  of  light  proceeding  from  the  creatures  dis- 
coverable in  thin  plates  of  that  substance,  have  to  pass 
through  it  before  they  enter  the  object-glass.  The 
recent  discovery  of  the  crystatella  f  and  other  infusoria 
in  flint,  as  also  the  sporules  of  ferns,  has  opened  an  en- 

*  See  Micrographia,  page  107. 
•f  Zantliydium  furrata  of  E. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.      133 

tirely  new  field  to  the  geologist,  and  one  which  promises 
some  very  important  results  in  throwing  light  upon  the 
original  formation  of  that  stone.  Some  beds  of  flints  are 
crowded  with  these  infusoria,  whilst  others  are  wholly 
without  them.  In  viewing'  these  creatures  (crystatella) 
a  powerful  object-glass  is  requisite ;  and,  as  their 
multi-pronged  spines  protrude  from  all  parts  of  the 
surface  of  their  bodies,  each  part  being  in  a  different 
plane,  there  must  be  a  new  adjustment  of  the  focus. 

Some  of  the  cavities  in  minerals  contain  ''  two  fluids 
unknown  to  the  chemist  :  groups  of  crystals,  floating' 
balls,  &c"  The  forms  of  these  cavities  are  various. 
Those  containing  two  fluids,  which  do  not  mix  though 
in  the  same  cavity,  appear  globular. 

Sect.  13.  Concave  Specula,  Silver  Caps,  or  Leiberkuhns, 
for  illuminating  opaque  objects. — In  viewing  opaque 
bodies  by  means  of  concave  specula,  it  is  generally 
advisable  to  remove  the  stage  of  the  instrument,  and  to 
insert  the  arm,  fig.  1G,  with  the  forceps,  fig.  15.  An 
object-glass  of  a  right  focus  must  then  be  screwed  into 
the  body  of  the  microscope,  and  the  silver  cup,  properly 
fitted,  made  to  slide  over  it.  If  candle-light,  which  is 
the  simplest  artificial  illumination,  be  used,  although  a 
small  argand  lamp  is  often  preferable,  the  light  may  be 
placed  from  about  3  to  (5  inches  behind  the  object. 

When  we  have  day- light,  the  concave  mirror  must 
be  brought  into  the  rear  of  the  object.     In  this  ease  it 


134  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

should  be  placed  as  near  to  it  as  it  conveniently  caii 
be,  in  order  that  the  cone  of  rays  reflected  from  the 
mirror  may  spread  over  the  whole  surface  of  the  silver 
cup;  otherwise,  the  maximum  illumination  will  not  be 
obtained. 

Having  brought  the  object  into  focus,  the  silver  cup 
must  be  adjusted,  without  altering  the  adjustment  of  the 
focus  of  the  instrument.  This  is  done  by  sliding  the  tube 
belonging  to  the  silver  cup  over  the  tube  which  is  screwed 
before  the  object-glass.  In  order  to  obtain  the  maximum 
quantity  of  light,  the  cup  must  be  placed  so  that  the 
object  is  a  little  within  its  focus.  As  the  length  of  this 
focus,  however,  varies  with  the  distance  at  which  the 
candle,  lamp,  or  other  illuminating  source  is  placed  from 
the  cup  (the  rays  being  thus  either  parallel,  diverging, 
or  converging,)  the  adjustment  must  be  made  after  the 
position  of  the  illuminator  is  determined  upon.  Thus, 
when  the  cup  is  used  with  a  candle  placed  at  3  or  4 
inches  distance  from  it,  the  rays  being  divergent,  the 
focus  will  be  elongated,  in  which  case  the  two  tubes 
must  be  thrust  in.  Again,  when  we  illumine  by  day- 
light reflected  from  a  plane  mirror,  the  focus  is  shortened, 
and  the  outer  tube  requires  to  be  drawn  out  a  little. 

In  the  old  constructed  microscopes,  the  concave  spe- 
culum, or  silver  cup,  was  attached  to  the  stage  of  the 
instrument,  so  that  a  fresh  adjustment  was  always  re- 
quired for  every  change  of  object.  By  the  above  men- 
tioned  plan,  as  soon  as  the  cup  and  light  are  adjusted, 


DESCRIPTION   OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.      135 

nothing-  further  is  necessary  in  this  respect;  for  when 
the  object  is  brought  into  the  focus  of  the  microscope,  the 
illumination  is  sure  to  be  correct. 

Persons  who  have  never  viewed  opaque  objects  with 
shallow  or  medium  power  object-glasses,  and  silver 
cups  of  proper  diameters  and  curvature,  are  not  aware 
of  half  the  beautiful  effects  resulting  from  the  achromatic 
construction.  And  as  for  objects  that  are  suited  to  this 
method  of  illumination,  they  are  almost  infinite  in  num- 
ber; and,  consequently,  a  greater  fund  of  instruction  and 
pleasure  is  derivable  from  it  than  can  be  obtained  with 
deeper  powers,  where  the  objects  which  can  afford 
amusement  are  much  more  limited. 

Sect.  14.  Stops  or  Diaphragms  are  used  for  the  purpose 
of  limiting  the  illuminating  pencil  of  light,  and  may  be 
described  as  being  small  tubes  with  apertures  at  each  of 
their  extremities.     These  are  made  to  slide  into  sockets, 
which  screw  into  orifices  formed  to  receive  them  at  the 
under   side   of  each   of  the   stages   of  the  microscope. 
They  are  sometimes  furnished  with  a  wheel  of  apertures, 
similar  to  that  shewn   in  the  plate,    fig.  24 ;  and  some- 
times these  sliding  tubes  have  a  small  condensing  lens, 
such  as  that  exhibited  in  the  Microscopic  Cabinet,  page 
1J0.     By  having  the  stops  or  diaphragms  in  the  form  of 
tubes,  the  effect  they  are   designed  to   produce  may  be 
varied,  if  necessary,  by  sliding  them  up  and  down  within 
their   sockets.     Those  possessing  the  lens,  and  intended 
to  act  on  Dr.  Wollaston's  principle,  require  this  adjust- 


136  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

tuent,  in  order  that  a  fine  definition  may  be  obtained  with 
them.  "The  centre  of  the  aperture  must  be  in  the 
common  axis  of  the  lenses"  of  the  microscope,  "  and  the 
image  of  the  perforation  formed  by  the  condensing 
lens  must  be  brought  by  such  adjustment  into  the 
same  plane  as  the  object  to  be  examined*." 

Stops  or  diaphragms  serve  to  increase  the  definition  of 
the  outline  of  delicate  objects.  Thus,  the  cilia  and  inter- 
nal structure  of  animalcules  become  much  more  visible 
hy  their  aid  than  without  it,  especially  when  we  have 
single  magnifiers  only.  They  enable  us,  also,  to  reduce 
the  quantity  of  light,  when  using  achromatic  microscopes 
with  object-glasses  of  long  foci;  by  which  reduction  our 
observations  on  thin  transverse  sections  of  wood,  as  well 
as  on  cylindrical  and  spherical  bodies,  may  be  more 
accurately  made. 

With  high  magnifying  powers  it  is  often  desirable  to 
have  a  lateral  adjustment  for  the  Wollaston  illumination, 
to  effect  which,  a  movement  to  and  fro  must  be  given  to 
the  screw  which  holds  the  socket,  on  the  under  side  of 
the  moveable  stage  (page  105)  ;  whilst  the  body  admits 
of  a  lateral  adjustment,  to  the  right  or  left  in  the  other 
direction.  By  these  means  we  may  obtain  either  a  cen- 
tral or  eccentric  pencil  of  light. 

The  reader  must  bear  in  mind,  that  stops  have  the 
effect  of  decreasing  the  angle  of  aperture  of  the  object- 
glass;  and  therefore,  in  testing  it,  he  must  make  proper 
allowance  for  them. 

*  Philosophical  Transactions,  p.  'J,  1830. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC  MICROSCOPE.       13J 

Sect.  15.  On  viewing  Transparent  Objects  by  Day-light. 
— The  best  position  of  the  instrument  by  day-light  is 
that  represented  at  fig.  29.  When  the  object-glass  is  of 
long  focus,  a  screen  must  be  interposed  to  stop  the  light 
from  falling  upon  the  object.  If  this  precaution  be  not 
taken,  we  could  not  obtain  a  correct  knowledge  of  it,  on 
.account  of  the  confusion  occasioned  by  the  transmitted 
and  reflected  light.  They  must  not,  therefore,  be  used 
together.  A  small  piece  of  black  card  placed  upon  its 
edge,  on  the  stage,  will  prevent  the  light  from  falling 
upon  a  transparent  body. 

Sect.  16.  On  viewing  Transparent  Bodies  by  Intermitting 
Light. — It  has  been  ingeniously  suggested,  in  order  to 
determine  the  number  and  arrangement  of  the  rotatory 
organs  of  Infusoria  (such  as  the  wheel-animalcule),  to 
illuminate  them  by  a  succession  of  galvanic  or  electric 
sparks.  By  this  means,  an  effect  is  produced  similar  to 
that  occasioned  by  the  revolution  of  a  cogged  wheel  when 
viewed  in  a  mirror.  The  reflection  through  the  cogs 
makes  the  wheel,  although  in  rapid  motion,  appear 
stationary. 

As  there  are  several  methods  by  which  this  effect  can 
be  produced,  it  is  unnecessary  to  enter  upon  the  details 
here,  some  persons  preferring  one  way  and  some  another. 
In  my  own  experiments,  I  have  used  the  sparks  emitted 
by  the  electric  magnetism  of  a  wheel  dipping  in  mer- 
cury. 


138 


MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Sect.  17.  The  Black  Ground  Illumination  for  Trans- 
parent  Objects. — The  Rev.  Mr.  Reade,  in  the  Appendix 
to  the  Micrographia,  has  described  a  method  of  illumi- 
nation for  transparent  objects,  differing  from  any  at 
present  in  use.  It  consists  in  illuminating  the  object  by 
a  very  strong  light  placed  at  such  an  obliquity  to  the 
axis  of  the  microscope  that  none  of  the  rays  can  enter  it, 
except  those  which  impinge  directly  upon  the  object,  and 
are  thereby  bent  so  as  to  pass  through  the  object  into 
the  instrument.  As  the  arrangement  for  viewing  objects 
in  this  way  may  not  readily  suggest  itself  from  a  verbal 
description  only,  it   has  been  thought  advisable  to  illus- 


Fig.  29. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.       139 

trate  it  more  fully  by  means  of  the  accompanying"  en- 
gravings, so  that  any  one  may  make  trial  of  it,  and 
thence  form  a  correct  judgment  of  its  merits.  I  should 
mention,  that  the  effects  produced  are  not  so  striking  in 
some  objects  as  in  others,  and  therefore  that  it  is  worth 
while  to  make  trial  of  several  kinds. 

Fig.  29  represents  one  of  my  instruments  :  its  body, 
eye-piece,  and  object-glass,  n,i,e;  the  spring  double- 
stage,  /;  the  mirror,  o,  which  is  turned  aside  ;  the  candle- 
holder,  k,  I;  and  jointed  condenser,  m.  In  this  arrange- 
ment it  is  proposed  to  illuminate  the  object  by  an  arti- 
ficial condensed  light.  Let  the  object-slider  be  placed 
between  the  stage  and  the  circular  plate;  adjust  to  the 
focus,  and  place  the  candle,  /,  and  condenser,  m,  in  the 
positions  shewn  in  the  drawing,  so  that  the  pencil  of  rays, 
r,  r,  may  form  the  required  angle  with  the  axis  of  the 
instrument,  i,  i.  This  angle  will  be  dependent  upon  the 
angle  of  aperture  of  the  object-glass;  but  in  all  cases  it 
must  exceed  half  that  angle,  in  order  to  produce  the 
desired  effect,  otherwise  the  field  of  view  will  be  illumi- 
nated. But  if  a  small  transparent  object,  such  as  the 
pollen  of  a  flower,  the  scale  of  an  insect,  &c.  be  placed 
within  the  field  of  view,  the  rays  impinging  upon  it  will 
be  refracted,  so  as  to  enter  the  microscope,  and  they 
will  form  an  illuminated  image  of  it  upon  the  dark 
ground. 

When  this  experiment  is  conducted  by  day-light,  the 
instrument  should   be   placed  in  the  position  shewn  by 


140 


MICROSCOPIC     ILLUSTRATIONS. 


fig.  30,  with  the  condenser,  m,  to  condense  the  light  in 
the  manner  there  represented. 

Fig.  30. 


If  the  rays,  r,  r,  make  an  angle  with  i,  ?',  similar  to 
that  in  the  former  case,  the  result  will  he  the  same.  The 
most  convenient  plan  of  managing  this  mode  of  illumi- 
nating hy  day-light,  is  hy  means  of  a  large  concave 
rellector  fitted  upon  the  stem  of  the  candle-holder ;  or 
upon  a  separate  stand,  so  placed  that  the  reflected  light 
shall  make  the  proper  angle  with  the  axis  of  the  micro- 
scope. The  instrument,  hy  this  means,  may  be  placed 
in  a  vertical  position,  if  so  preferred. 

The  medium  power  object-glasses,  usually  marked 
B,  are  best  suited  for  this  method  of  investigation. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC  MICROSCOPE.      \\\ 

Sect.  18.  Method  of  viewing  Opaque  Bodies  by  oblique 
refected  Light  condensed  upon  them  by  Mirrors. — It  is  often 
necessary  to  examine  an  object  under  object-glasses, 
which  differ  widely  in  their  amplifying  powers,  or  focal 
lengths,  when  great  difficulty  is  experienced  in  mounting 


Fig.  31. 


r^y<\ 


it,  so  as  to  accommodate  it  to  them.  For  instance — ■ 
suppose  the  object  to  be  mounted  on  a  circular  disc, 
suitably  for  an  object-glass  of  one-inch  focus,  it  would 
be  barely  possible  to  illuminate  it  with  a  silver  cup, 
adapted  to  an  object-glass  of  l-4th  of  an  inch.  Deep 
object-glasses  necessarily  require  the  silver  cups  to  be 
small,  by  which  means  it  is  impracticable  to  give  an 
oblique  direction  to  the  light.  The  method  usually  pur- 
sued, is  to  employ  a  silver  concave  reflector  of  the  form 
shewn  at  /,  fig.  31  ;  by  the  aid  of  which  light  may  be  con- 
densed upon  the  object,  so  as  to  exhibit  it  under  object- 
glasses  of  different  focal  lenghs. 

In  order  to  obtain  a  greater  condensation  of  light,  Mr. 


142  MrcRoscopic  illustrations. 

Ross,  who  first  proposed  the  adoption  of  this  reflector, 
places  a  condensing  lens  in  front  of  the  stage.  The  dis- 
persion occasioned  by  this  lens,  however,  is  apt  to  give 
a  false  colouring  to  the  object ;  so  that  I  prefer 
making  use  of  a  large  concave  mirror  in  the  manner 
represented  in  the  above  (fig.  31),  which  obviates  this 
defect,  whilst  it  admits  of  the  light  being  placed  in  a 
more  convenient  position. 

Sect.  19.  A  Method  for  determining  the  Forms  of  certain 
minute  Bodies. — In  the  investigation  of  long  stick-shaped 
bodies,  it  is  sometimes  difficult  to  ascertain  Avhether  a 
section  of  these  would  be  of  a  circular,  or  of  a  flattened 
oval  form  ;  since,  in  either  case,  the  object,  when  at  rest, 
presents  the  same  appearance  to  the  eye  of  the  observer. 
It  occurred  to  me,  therefore,  that  by  immersing  a  body 
such  as  these  in  a  fluid,  which  evaporates  rapidly,  the 
currents  occasioned  by  the  evaporation  would  raise  and 
turn  it  upon  its  edges,  so  as  to  afford  a  view  of  its  different 
sides.  This  plan  I  found  to  answer  my  expectation  fully. 
As  an  example  illustrative  of  this  mode  of  verification 
may  not  be  without  its  use,  I  have  thought  it  worth  while 
to  present  the  reader  with  the  following  one  : — 

Take  on  the  point  of  a  penknife  a  specimen  of  fossil 
infusoria  (or  more  correctly  speaking,  the  silicious  cover- 
ing of  these  creatures),  place  it  on  a  slip  of  glass,  or  what 
is  perhaps  more  convenient,  the  tablet  of  an  aquatic  live- 
box,  the  cover  being  removed.  Having  equipped  your 
microscope  with  a  moderate  power,  and  .adjusted  it  to 


DESCRIPTION   OF  THE   ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.     1-13 

distinct  vision,  let  a  drop  of  spirits  of  wine,  or  ether, 
fall  upon  the  infusoria,  and  observe  the  effect.  As  the 
evaporation  proceeds,  the  shells  of  the  creatures  will  be 
lifted  up,  presenting1  to  the  eye  alternately  their  edges 
and  sides,  whilst  they  are  kept  in  motion.  When  all 
the  spirit  has  evaporated,  excepting  so  much  as  is  con- 
tained within  the  shells,  they  will  lie  on  their  sides,  and 
the  fluid  within  them  will  flow  towards  the  opening. 
Thus  a  correct  idea  is  obtained,  not  only  of  their  external 
but  also  of  their  internal  forms. 

The  evaporation  will  be  retarded  by  the  addition  of  a 
little  water  to  the  spirits  of  wine,  and  accelerated  by  the 
use  of  ether. 

Sect.  20. —  On  viewing  the  Currents  in  Fluids  during  their 
Evaporation. — For  conducting  this  experiment,  the  fol- 
lowing method  is  to  be  pursued.  Place  the  microscope 
in  a  vertical  position  ;  select  shallow  or  medium-power 
object-glasses,  which  with  the  body  shall  magnify  from 
about  40  to  100  diameters;  or  single  lenses  from  a 
quarter  to  the  tenth  of  an  inch  focus.  Take  an  aquatic 
live  box  of  moderate  size,  and  place  upon  the  centre  of 
it  a  drop  of  the  oil  of  turpentine,  or  spirits  of  wine,  &c. 
Then  cover  it  with  the  thin  glass  cover,  taking  care  that 
the  thickness  of  the  fluid  be  not  more  than  about  I -15th 
of  an  inch. 

If  this  fluid  be  quite  pure,  the  motion  of  its  particles 
will  not  be  perceptible  :  but  Mr.  Varley,  who  introduced 
the  experiment  to  the  Society  of  Arts,  grinds  a  small 


1  i  1  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

portion  of  coal  into  it,  which  occasions  the  currents  pro- 
duced by  the  evaporation  to  be  distinctly  seen.  The 
specific  gravity  of  coal  not  being  great,  these  minute 
portions  are  held  in  suspension  during  the  whole  expe- 
riment. The  following  observations  on  this  subject  are 
given  in  the  Society's  Transactions,  vol.  50  :  — 

1 .  A  drop  of  spirit  of  wine,  or  of  naphtha,  exhibits  two, 
three,  or  four  vortices,  or  centres  of  circulation,  accord- 
ing to  the  size  of  the  drop ;  and  if  the^e  vortices  are 
viewed  laterally,  the  lines  of  particles  will  be  seen 
forming  oblique  curves  from  top  to  bottom  of  the  drop. 

2.  Oil  of  turpentine  shews  a  rapid  circulation  in  two 
continuous  spirals,  one  to  the  right,  the  other  to  the 
left,  around  the  drop.  These  meet  in  the  opposite 
diameter,  from  which  the  particles  are  slowly  carried 
across  the  diameter  to  the  place  of  starting,  and  this 
continues  while  there  is  fluid  enough  to  let  it  be  seen. 

3.  If,  however,  the  drop  does  not  exceed  one-tenth  of 
an  inch  in  diameter,  it  presents  the  appearance  of  par- 
ticles continually  rising  up  in  the  middle,  and  radiating 
in  gentle  curves  to  the  circumference. 

4.  If  the  liquid  be  put  into  a  very  small  phial,  similar 
motions  are  perceived,  the  particles,  when  they  have 
reached  the  side  of  the  phial,  going  down  to  rise  up  after- 
wards in  the  centre  or  axis. 

5.  If  a  bubble  of  air  be  inclosed  in  the  liquid,  motions, 
similar  to  those  described  in  No.  2,  are  observed  in  the 
part  immediately  in  contact  with  the  bubble. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ACHROMATIC   MICROSCOPE.        145 

6.  In  a  flat  drop  of  new  wine  laid  on  the  tablet  or  disc 
of  the  aquatic  live  box,  but  not  compressed  by  the  cover, 
the  motion  was  a  regular  uniform  circulation,  the  par- 
ticles rising  from  below  at  one  end  of  the  drop,  then 
passing-  straight  across  on  the  surface,  and  descending  at 
the  other  end. 


1 40 


CHAPTER  VII. 

Practical  Remarks  on  Microscopes  for  viewing  and  drawing 
Aquatic  Larva,  fyc. 

By  C.  R.  GORING,   M.  D. 

The  instrument  which  I  used  in  executing  the  drawings 
was  a  single  microscope  mounted  with  three  achromatic 
lenses  of  the  9-10tb,  6-10th,  and  2-10th  of  an  inch  sidereal 
focus.  Had  I  not  possessed  these,  I  should  probably 
have  used  sapphires,  or  even  equivalent  common  ones ; 
for  I  greatly  prefer  a  single  microscope  as  a  drawing  tool, 
from  its  being  so  very  handy  and  manageable,  and  taking 
up  so  little  room  on  the  table.  All  the  necessary  mo- 
tions were  given  to  the  optical  part,  and  not  to  the  stage, 
in  order  that  living  objects  should  be  disturbed  as  little 
as  possible.  I  always  found  it  make  a  great  difference 
for  the  better  when  they  were  allowed  to  remain  un- 
moved, for  their  natural  restlessness,  when  exasperated 
by  motion,  renders  them  completely  intractable ;  when 
undisturbed,  they  will  sometimes  remain  quiet  for  half  a 
minute  together.     An  aquatic  live-box*,  of  a  little  larger 

See  Plate,  fig.  21. 


DRAWING   WITH  THE   MICROSCOPE.  147 

diameter  than  the  length  of  the  insect  to  be  drawn, 
answers  best  to  confine  them  :  they  may  be  kept  quite 
closed  up,  for  they  do  not  appear  to  me  to  require  air  to 
support  their  existence.  I  was  in  the  habit  also  of  observing 
them  with  a  compound  aplanatic  microscope,  having  a 
boot  to  slide  over  the  objective  end,  so  that  it  could  be 
introduced  into  the  large  transparent  vessel  filled  with 
water,  which  was  their  usual  abode,  and  in  which  they 
would  remain  pretty  quiescent,  especially  when  well 
supplied  with  food.  I  must  remark  that  Thames  water 
is  utterly  poisonous  to  nearly  the  whole  race  of  aquatic 
insects.  I  presume  it  is  not  necessary  to  say  that  every 
species  of  camera  lucida,  and  all  the  contrivances  which 
maybe  used  for  tracing  inanimate  objects,  are  altogether 
useless  in  drawing  living  ones.  The  colours  of  every 
object  are  given  as  seen  with  the  9- 10th  focus  lens,  having 
its  full  aperture,  as  they  appear  in  mere  day-light,  with- 
out any  artificial  illumination  whatever.  I  utterly  dis- 
approve of  lamp-light  for  larvae  ;  it  gives,  indeed,  a  strong 
outline,  but  confuses  and  more  than  half  obliterates  the 
viscera,  while  it  makes  the  colours  very  dingy  and  dull. 
The  tints  of  these  objects  become  fainter  and  fainter,  and 
the  shades  darker  and  darker,  as  the  magnifying  power 
is  increased.  I  did  not  find  it  necessary  to  employ  any 
power  beyond  that  of  the  simple  2-10th  focus,  in  order 
to  develop  the  whole  of  their  structure  :  superior  powers 
seem  to  me  merely  to  magnify,  without  shewing  any 
thing  about  them  (except  the  circulation)  more  satisfac- 
torily, and  do  not  take  in  a  sufficient  portion  of  the  object 


148  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

for  a  pleasing  view.  When  we  want  to  examine  these 
objects  merely  for  the  purpose  of  amusement,  it  will  be 
advisable  to  use  compound  instruments,  on  account  of 
their  large  field  of  view,  luxurious  accommodations,  and 
arrangements  :  their  powers  must  be  made  equivalent  to 
the  single  lenses  I  employed,  namely,  one  inch,  half  an 
inch,  and  a  quarter  of  an  inch  focus,  which  require  their 
objectives  to  be  about  four,  two,  and  one  inch  focus  re- 
spectively, (as  the  weakest  compound  body  which  can 
be  applied  usually  quadruples  the  power  of  the  object- 
glass.)  For  the  reasons  stated  above,  all  the  requisite 
motions  and  adjustments  must  here  also  be  given  to  the 
optical  part,  and  not  to  the  stage.  It  will  also  be  found 
a  very  great  convenience  if  the  stage  is  so  constructed  as 
to  admit  of  being  altogether  removed,  so  that  any  large 
body,  such  as  a  square  vase  on  a  large  flat  slider,  con- 
taining the  objects,  can  be  substituted  in  its  place,  in 
order  that  there  shall  be  no  necessity  to  remove  the 
insects  from  their  usual  places  of  abode  in  the  said 
vessels,  &c.  as  they  are  very  apt  to  receive  injury  and 
become  restless  by  such  removal.  In  order  to  effect  this 
very  desirable  arrangement  successfully,  it  will  be  neces- 
sary that  the  bar  of  the  microscope,  instead  of  working 
upon  the  stand  with  a  cradle  joint,  should  possess  a  ca- 
pability of  turning  round  by  moving  in  a  ball  and  socket, 
or  some  other  similar  contrivance,  so  that  the  space 
occupied  by  the  stage  may  fold  down  on  one  side,  and 
allow  of  the  introduction  of  the  jar,  &c.  into  it  on  its  ap- 
propriate stand;    when,    all   the  necessary   adjustments 


DRAWING    WITH  THE   MICROSCOPE.  149 

being  possessed  by  the  optical  part,  the  instrument  is 
just  as  perfect  and  manageable  without  its  stage  as  with  it, 
and  may  be  used  upon  any  large  body  whatever,  which  will 
be  found  a  great  convenience.  This  construction  also 
gives  great  facilities  for  demonstrating  all  sorts  of  test 
objects,  as  well  as  for  verifying  and  proving  the  nature  of 
bodies  inspected — (a  subject  which  is  as  yet  understood 
by  few  observers.) 

With  respect  to  the  exhibition  of  larvae,  &c.  in  the 
solar  microscope,  it  may  be  observed  generally,  that  what- 
ever object-glass  shews  them  well  in  a  compound  aplanatic, 
with  the  assistance  of  the  body  and  eye-glasses,  will  shew 
them  unassisted  in  the  solar  instrument,  because  the  dis- 
tance to  which  the  rays  are  suffered  to  diverge  does  the 
work  of  the  compound  body  in  giving  the  necessary 
amplification,  which  it  is  the  peculiar  property  of  this 
instrument  to  effect  to  a  vast  extent,  without  altering  the 
size  of  the  field  of  view.  A  solar  microscope  may  in  fact 
be  defined  in  its  optical  principle  as  a  mere  object-glass, 
forming  an  image  on  a  skreen,  instead  of  the  space  in- 
cluded in  the  field  bar  of  a  compound  body. 

C.  R.  G. 


150 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

Whether  there  is  a  best  possible  ivay  of  constructing  the 
stand,  or  mounting,  fyc.  of  Microscopes  {the  specific  pur- 
pose or  purposes  to  which  they  are  to  be  applied  being  first 
determined)  ? 

By  C.  R.  GORING,  M.  D. 

i 

I  apprkhknd  that  the  construction  of  all  kinds  of  me- 
chanical implements,  tools,  utensils,  musical,  philo- 
sophical and  mathematical  instruments,  &c.  may  be 
reduced  to  fixed  principles,  and  that  one  best  possible 
way  of  making  them,  may,  and  can  be  discovered,  (when 
the  specific  and  particular  end  and  object  of  their  fabri- 
cation is  duly  settled).  It  is  otherwise  with  all  those 
manufactures  which  are  of  an  ornamental  nature,  and 
therefore  subject  to  the  caprice  of  taste  and  opinion  ;  and 
also  with  every  thing  made  for  the  gratification  of  any 
of  our  senses,  or  for  the  ease  and  accommodation  of  our 
personal  wants.  Thus  it  would  be  very  absurd  to  pre- 
tend that  there  is  a  best  possible  system  of  cooking,  or 
making  caps  and  bonnets,  unless  wTe  choose  to  assume 
the  position,  that  the  specific  end  of  cooking  and  mantua- 
making  being  the  gratification  of  the  whims  and  fancies 
of  some  particular  individual,  even  these  arts  are  reducible 


ON  CONSTRUCTING  STANDS  OF  MICROSCOPES.  151 

to  fixed  principles  (such  as  they  are).  Every  hing 
connected  with  the  fine  arts  always  resolves  itself  into 
a  matter  of  opinion,  about  which  it  is  perfectly  useless  to 
contend,  because  every  man  considers  his  own  private 
judgment,  however  outre  or  singular,  as  of  equal  value 
at  least  with  that  of  his  neighbour's.  The  standard  of 
taste  is,  then,  a  mere  chimera,  because  it  differs  like 
the  face,  or  form  of  the  limbs,  in  every  particular  spe- 
cimen of  the  human  race ;  unless,  indeed,  it  might  be 
ascertained  by  taking  the  average  of  that  of  the  whole 
species. 

However,  mankind  seem  to  have  come  to  a  common 
decision  concerning  the  utility,  excellence,  and  supe- 
riority of  many  things,  and  to  consider  them  as  incapable, 
or  nearly  so,  of  any  real  improvement.  This  is  the  case 
with  regard  to  many  points,  even  determined  by  the 
judgment  of  the  senses;  but  more  so  with  regard  to 
hose  whose  value  is  supposed  to  be  ascertained  by  the 
test  of  experience.  Thus  a  variety  of  mechanical  tools, 
&c.  may  be  considered  as  erected  into  standards,  and  not 
at  all  likely  to  undergo  modification  in  future.  Even 
musical  instruments,  as  regards  the  quality  of  their  tone 
and  sound,  seem  to  have  arrived  at  a  regular  and  deter- 
mined mode  of  construction. 

Now,  if  so  many  other  things  have  been  perfected  and 
erected  into  standards,  by  the  common  consent  of  the 
human  race,  why  should  not  microscopes  also?  Why 
should  we  not  bend  the  whole  force  and  power  of  our 
invention  and  reflection  towards  the  fabrication  of  every 


152  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

thing1  connected  with  them,  till  every  point  is  effected  in 
the  hest  possible  manner  ?  These  instruments  have  under- 
gone a  complete  revolution  in  their  optical  parts,  and 
become  truly  dignified  and  respectable :  assuredly  their 
mechanical  structure  should  correspond  with  the  advance 
which  has  taken  place  in  their  optical  constitution. 

However,  like  other  things,  they  are  varied  in  their 
construction  to  serve  particular  purposes.  Thus,  if  made 
merely  for  commerce,  or  to  look  at,  or  to  wear  in  the 
waistcoat  pocket,  like  a  snuff-box,  they  must  evidently 
be  made  on  a  plan  quite  different  from  that  required  for 
scientific  observations. 

I  pretend  not  to  meddle  with  matters  concerning  com- 
merce; the  trade  understand  them  far  better  than  I  do, 
and  shall  therefore  merely  observe,  that  several  indivi- 
duals experienced  in  business  have  assured  me,  that  the 
first  thing  to  be  considered  in  the  construction  of  a  mi- 
croscope is  its  price ;  and  the  second,  the  size  of  its  case, 
and  how  it  is  to  look  when  packed  in  it,  with  all  its  little 
eye-traps  and  trinkets  about  it.  It  is  frequently  sold  in 
two  minutes,  long  before  the  merits  of  its  construction 
can  be  known;  therefore  one  kind  is  just  as  good  as 
another,  the  public  at  large  being  no  judges  or  con- 
noisseurs in  such  matters. 

Again,  instruments  may  be  made  expressly  for  trans- 
parent objects,  or  opaque  ones,  or  even  some  particular 
class  of  those  bodies,  for  lamp-light  only,  or  for  that  of 
the  atmosphere,  for  drawing,  for  public  exhibition,  &c. 
all  of  which  circumstances  will   produce  a  variation  in 


ON  CONSTRUCTING    STANDS  OF  MICROSCOPES.         153 

their  fabric,  while  they  are  correctly  adapted  to  their  in- 
tended use,  and,  therefore,  perfect  in  their  kind.  The 
construction  which  I  wish  to  discover  myself,  is  that  of 
an  approximation  to  a  standard  for  general  purposes ;  and 
I  think  the  principles  at  least  of  such  a  structure  may  be 
ascertained,  though  the  best  possible  way  of  carrying  them 
into  effect,  perhaps,  cannot  at  present — at  least  by  myself. 
In  the  first  chapter*  I  have  already  sketched  an  outline 
of  the  kind  of  instrument  which  I  here  propose  now  to 
fill  up  and  reduce  to  a  determinate  form,  but  shall  first 
detail  a  few  of  the  obstacles  which  all  who  attempt  to 
reform  the  construction  of  microscopes  may  be  expected 
to  encounter.  First,  there  is  the  inveterate  hatred  and 
contempt  of  all  innovation  whatever,  which  seems  to 
form  a  part  of  our  nature,  when  arrived  at  a  certain 
period  of  life.  Men  long  used  to  some  particular  way  of 
doing  any  thing,  cannot  endure  the  idea  of  going  to 
school  again,  and  learning  to  act  upon  a  new  system. 
The  very  idea  of  the  possibility  of  being  taught  any  thing, 
galls  and  wounds  their  self-love  to  the  quick  :  if  this 
concerns  a  matter  relative  to  their  particular  profession, 
or  something,  perhaps,  on  which  they  peculiarly  pique 
themselves :  they  become  altogether  indignant  and 
furious.  If  by  any  possibility  they  arc  brought  to  recog- 
nise the  necessity  of  some  change,  they  must  make  it 
themselves  j  what  a  disgraceful  and  lamentable  poverty 

*  Chapter  VII.  in  this  edition. 


154  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

of  genius  would  it  not  shew,  to  copy  a  good  thing  which 
had  heen  invented  by  another  man  ! 

It  cannot  be  denied,  moreover,  that  there  really  is  a  great 
deal  of  trouble  in  getting  up  new  philosophical  instru- 
ments of  all  sorts.  There  are  fresh  patterns  to  be  made, 
and  tried,  and  re-made  ;  workmen  to  instruct  afresh,  and 
after  all,  particular  parts  of  the  instrument  may  not  fulfil 
the  intended  purpose,  and  must  be  remodelled ;  all  of 
which  circumstances  occasion  a  great  deal  of  annoyance 
and  expense,  and  naturally  render  men  averse  from  the 
adoption  of  new  constructions ;  more  especially  as  the 
public  at  large  never  can  be  imbued  with  a  sense  of  the 
difficulties,  expense,  and  loss  of  time,  occasioned  by 
what  are  called  out  of  the  ivay  jobs,  and  consequently 
can  never  be  induced  to  pay  for  them  so  as  to  remunerate 
the  artists  employed. 

If  it  is  indeed  true,  that  conceit  is  given  to  man  to 
console  him  for  want  of  talent,  and  that  the  less  of  one 
of  these  qualities  he  may  possess,  the  more  he  is  likely 
to  have  of  the  other,  what  must  be  the  consequence, 
should  it  happen  that  an  individual,  possessing  seventy- 
five  parts  of  conceit  and  twenty-five  of  talent  in  the 
hundred,  comes  in  contact  with  something  invented,  or 
recommended,  by  a  man  who  has  but  twenty- five  of  the 
former  quality  to  seventy-five  of  the  latter  ?  Is  it  likely 
he  will  adopt  it  ?  Never.  He  will  imagine  that  he  can 
produce  something  infinitely  better,  and  will  be  still 
more  strenuous  in   this  opinion   if  he  happens   not  to 


ON  CONSTRUCTING   STANDS  OK   MICROSCOPES.  155 

possess  a  grain  of  experience  on  the  subject  under  deli- 
beration. 

All  these  considerations  have  had  so  much  weight 
with  me,  that  I  have  more  than  once  determined  never 
to  meddle  with  the  stands  and  apparatus  of  microscopes 
at  all,  but  leave  men  to  settle  them  according  to  their 
own  fancies ;  but  my  friends  have  told  me,  that  I  have 
as  good  a  right  to  consider  an  ounce  of  my  own  wit  equal 
to  a  ton  of  my  neighbour's  as  other  men  have,  and 
that  I  ought  to  make  the  experiment,  of  giving  a  con- 
struction of  my  own,  whether  it  may  be  adopted  or  not. 
I  shall  therefore  state  my  own  views  on  the  subject,  and 
for  every  particular  structure  recommended,  shall  give 
a  reason  which  every  man  may,  of  course,  either  admit 
or  disprove,  together  with  the  construction  deduced 
from  it.  First,  then,  I  say  that  the  stage  should  be  mo- 
tionless, and  that  the  optical  part  only  should  possess  the 
requisite  power  of  traversing  and  adjustment ;  because 
living  objects  are  much  more  quiet  when  allowed  to 
remain  at  rest,  and  therefore  more  easily  observed  :  if 
some  one  who  has  been  less  plagued  by  them  than  I 
have,  chooses  to  say  that  it  makes  no  difference  whether 
they  are  moved  about  or  not,  I  will  give  up  the  point ; 
but  still  insist  on  the  propriety  of  making  the  instrument 
perform  all  its  adjustments  as  perfecthj  without  the  stage  as 
with  it,  for  then  we  may  remove  the  stage  altogether  if 
we  please,  and  substitute  any  thing  we  think  proper  in 
its   place,  and  all  will  go  on  as  before.     This  arrange- 


156  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

raent   gives   us   the  power  of  examining  small  parts  of 
large  bodies  without  detaching  them  from  their  wholes. 

Thus  we  can  examine  the  contents  of  a  vase  of  polypi, 
or  acpiatic  insects,  or  a  small  part  of  a  large  specimen  of 
a  mineral,  or  a  nosegay  of  flowers,  with  the  insects 
which  inhabit  them ;  or  with  an  erecting  eye-piece  we 
may  apply  the  instrument  to  a  turning-lathe  or  some 
piece  of  delicate  machinery,  and  work  upon  it  much 
more  comfortably  than  by  the  help  of  single  lenses.  But 
for  these  purposes  the  space  occupied  by  the  stage  must  be 
left  free  and  open;  and  to  obtain  this  accommodation  the 
bar  of  the  microscope  must  swing  round  on  its  stand  in 
any  direction,  on  a  ball  and  socket  joint,  which  con- 
joined with  a  rotatory  motion  of  the  arm  on  the  top  of 
the  said  bar,  will  almost  always  enable  us  to  gain  the  po- 
sition required.  An  instrument  which  does  not  possess 
all  these  properties  will  only  do  half  the  work  it  ought  to 
perform.  It  must  be  evident,  also,  that  this  construc- 
tion gives  the  utmost  facility  for  introducing  a  lamp  or 
candle,  either  close  behind  the  stage  for  transparent 
bodies,  or  before  it  for  opaque  ones ;  and  this  arrange- 
ment is  a  point  of  the  last  moment  for  demonstrating 
and  verifying  a  variety  of  objects,  particularly  proof 
opaque  ones,  as  I  shall  shew  in  due  season,  when  I  come 
to  treat  on  them  and  on  the  subject  of  verification.  No 
microscope  which  is  from  any  cause  lame  or  impotent, 
either  in  its  optical  or  mechanical  construction,  can  be 
fit  for  such  purposes. 


ON   CONSTRUCTING   STANDS  OF  MICROSCOPES.  157 

The  stage  must  also  possess  a  capability  of  turning 
round  on  a  pivot,  so  that  by  tilting  the  microscope  we 
may  be  enabled  to  view  the  side  or  elevation  of  a  body 
as  well  as  its  plan  ;  for  example,  the  curve  of  a  small 
lens,  when  laid  flat  on  its  face,  the  edge  of  a  razor,  the 
point  of  a  needle,  &c.  without  using  any  particular  ap- 
paratus to  preserve  such  bodies  in  the  position  in  which 
we  wish  to  see  them.  The  use  of  such  a  mode  of  ob- 
serving, in  cases  of  dissection,  must  be  manifest;  for  in 
this  way  the  side  of  an  insect,  &c.  may  be  viewed  and 
worked  upon  without  disturbing  the  parts  laid  open,  in 
the  horizontal  position,  and  thereby  occasioning  much 
extra  trouble  and  confusion.  By  turning  the  subject 
round  on  the  stage,  every  elevation  or  side  view  of  it  may, 
of  course,  be  successively  obtained. 

There  is  yet  another  advantage  to  be  gained  by  a  rota- 
tory motion  in  the  stage;  for  if  we  employ  a  diagonal 
objective,  and  tilt  both  the  stage  and  the  bar  into  a  hori- 
zontal position,  so  that  the  body  of  the  microscope  shall 
be  under  the  stage,  we  can  examine  crystallizations  of 
salts  without  being  annoyed  by  the  steam  which  arises 
from  them  during  consolidation,  and  which  is  almost 
certain  to  condense  on  the  object  glass  when  used  in  any 
other  position.  In  the  present  case  this  is  impossible; 
for  nothing  but  the  under  surface  of  the  glass  on  which 
the  salt  is  placed,  is  presented  towards  the  object  glass. 
All  sorts  of  fluids,  and  the  bodies  contained  in  them,  may 
in  the  same  way  be  managed  without  being  troublesome, 


158  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

and  thus  chemical  actions  of  all  sorts  may  be  studied  under 
a  magnifying  power. 

Moreover,  the  stage  must  be  enabled  to  shift  down  to 
the  end  of  its  bar,  so  that  wTe  may  use  object-glasses  of 
long  foci,  and  also  place  any  large  bulky  body  upon  it 
without  building  up  the  whole  instrument  to  an  extrava- 
gant height,  and  thereby  rendering  it  top-heavy  and 
rickety.  It  must  also  be  of  such  strength  as  not  to  spring 
under  the  weight  of  our  hands  when  used  for  dissection ; 
for  if  it  does,  it  will  be  utterly  impossible  to  preserve  a 
steady  focus,  which  will  be  found  a  dreadful  nuisance 
with  a  high  power,  and  indeed  with  any  power.  Its  size 
must  also  be  such  as  to  afford  a  sufficient  support  for  the 
hands.  The  distance  of  the  hole  in  which  the  slider 
holder  is  fixed  from  the  bar,  must  also  be  such  as  to  allow 
a  slider  to  turn  completely  round,  otherwise  we  cannot 
get  test  objects  into  that  position  relative  to  the  light  in 
which  only  they  can  be  demonstrated.  (This  is  especially 
the  case  with  the  markings  on  the  scales  of  beetles  and 
butterflies.) 

I  do  not  much  approve  of  attaching  illuminators  to  the 
stage,  either  for  opaque  or  diaphanous  objects.  It  will 
be  found  much  more  commodious  to  cause  the  spectrum 
for  opaque  objects  to  travel  along  with  the  body.  Accord- 
ingly, a  condenser  should  be  attached  to  it.  Both  the 
mirror  and  condensing  lens  under  the  stage  should  be 
caused  to  swing  round  by  means  of  a  spring  socket  and 
pinching  screw  working  on  a  round  bar,  so  that  they 


ON   CONSTRUCTING   STANDS  OF  MICROSCOPES.  159 

may   be  instantly   removed  out  of  the   way   when   not 
wanted,  without  being  detached  from  the  bar. 

The  large  illuminating  mirror  should  (if  not  of  very 
considerable  dimensions)  be  made  oval,  and  should  work 
upon  a  swivel  joint  at  the  bottom  instead  of  the  side, 
otherwise  it  will  be  rendered  unserviceable,  for  the  long 
axis  of  the  ellipse  cannot  otherwise  be  brought  into  the 
position  necessary  to  give  a  round  spectrum  when  placed 
at  the  requisite  angle  for  illumination,  say  45  degrees. 
The  reason  for  the  ellipticity  of  the  mirror  is  this  : — An 
image  of  it  is  constantly  formed  in  the  optic  or  visual 
pencil,  at  the  eye-piece,  as  maybe  seen  with  a  magnifier 
whenever  bodies  are  viewed  by  the  intercepted  or  trans- 
mitted light  which  it  furnishes.  Now  unless  this  image 
is  of  equal  size  with  the  said  visual  pencil,  an  effect  is 
produced  not  very  dissimilar  to  that  of  mutilating  the 
pencil  in  some  other  way,  and  exactly  the  same  as  to  the 
quantity  of  light  lost.  Now  a  round  mirror  (unless  it  is 
of  such  size  as  to  allow  for  the  cutting  off  occasioned  by 
its  angular  position,)  gives  an  elliptic  pencil.  But  I 
presume  it  is  always  advisable  not  to  increase  the  bulk 
of  any  part  of  an  optical  instrument  when  it  can  be 
avoided;  consequently  the  true  form  for  the  mirror  is  an 
ellipse.  This  form  does  not  easily  admit  of  the  use  of  a 
concave  reflector;  but  I  disapprove  of  them,  as  they 
always  seem  to  me  to  occasion  a  certain  indistinctness  in 
vision  by  intercepted  light,  and  if  wanted  only  for  illu- 
minating opaque  objects,  by  the  help  of  silver  cups,  may 
be  dispensed  with  ;  for  a  much  better  action  is  produced 


1G0  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

by  a  plane  mirror,  co-operating  with  a  condensing  lens. 
Because  an  angular  plane  mirror  and  a  condensing  glass 
produce  a  round  spectrum;  whereas  a  concave  mirror, 
when  tilted,  always  gives  an  oblong  one ;  however,  in 
the  present  construction,  I  always  suppose  that  when 
silver  cups  are  employed,  the  condenser  is  to  act  by  itself 
without  any  mirror  at  all,  by  which  arrangement  the 
maximum  of  illumination  is  given. 

The  size  of  the  mirror  is  determined  by  its  distance 
from  the  object-glass,  or  single  magnifier  used,  and  by 
the  angle  of  aperture  possessed  by  them.  The  longer 
the  bar,  and  the  greater  the  aperture  of  the  optical  part, 
the  larger  must  be  its  dimensions  to  fill  up  the  visual 
pencil. 

The  reverse  of  the  mirror  will  be  best  occupied  by  a 
surface  of  plaster  of  Paris,  to  reflect  the  light  of  the  sun, 
which  will  be  found  of  great  use  in  ascertaining  the  true 
tints  of  transparent  objects,  the  colours  of  which  are 
shewn  by  this  sort  of  light  with  the  utmost  truth  and 
delicacy,  far  better  than  when  brought  out  by  a  piece  of 
ground  glass  interposed  between  them  and  the  polished 
mirror.  The  double  action  of  the  mirror  will  be  com- 
pletely commanded  by  the  most  inexperienced  observer, 
if  a  milled  head  is  attached  to  its  transverse  axis,  as  will 
be  shewn  in  its  proper  place. 

Now  these  are,  I  think,  the  main  and  capital  points  to 
be  attended  to  in  the  construction  of  a  stand.  As,  how- 
ever, every  question  is  said  to  have  two  handles  to  it,  I 
shall  endeavour  to  discuss  the  merits  of  some  opposite 


ON    CONSTRUCTING    STANDS    OF    MICROSCOPES.         161 

constructions.  First,  then,  it  has  been  said,  that  the 
double  motion  of  a  ball  and  socket  joint  is  of  a  most  un- 
manageable nature,  and  that  a  cradle  joint  is  a  true, 
regular,  and  far  superior  movement :  this  I  admit,  and 
should  say,  that  if  a  telescope  had,  by  means  of  a  ball 
and  socket,  to  follow  the  motion  of  a  star,  no  motion 
could  be  more  unappropriate  and  detestable  ;  but  in  a 
microscope  it  happens  always  to  be  a  fixture,  and  when 
clamped  tight  by  means  of  a  pinching-screw,  is  as  steady 
as  a  rock. 

This  observation  may  appear  very  unnecessary  to  my 
readers  in  general ;  but  I  have  met  with  individuals  of 
such  obtuse  understandings,  that  they  cannot  be  brought 
to  comprehend  that  a  telescope  performs  a  part  of  its 
motion  by  means  of  its  cradle  joint,  whereas  that  of  a 
microscope  is  the  result  of  a  traversing  motion  in  its  arm, 
combined  with  a  rotatory  one  on  the  top  of  the  bar,  and 
therefore  has  nothing  to  do  with  that  on  the  head  of  the 
stand,  be  it  what  it  may,  which  is  always  a  pro  tempore 
fixture. 

Again,  it  has  been  said,  that  by  giving  the  motions  and 
adjustments  to  the  optical  part,  it  is  rendered  much  less 
steady  than  it  might  be  under  other  circumstances  ;  that 
it  is  like  mounting  a  telescope  on  a  mop-stick  ;  that 
immobility  is  of  most  virtual  importance  for  observa- 
tion, &c.  I  answer,  that  by  making  the  work  sufficiently 
strong  and  solid,  and  the  optical  part  no  larger  or  longer 
than  is  necessary,  the  instrument  is  rendered  abundantly 
steady,  and  free  from  tremor  even  with  its  highest  powers. 

M 


1(32  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

At  the  same  time  I  willingly  admit,  that  if  the  body  is 
made  very  long  or  large  it  will  be  almost  impossible  to 
combine  the  stability  requisite  for  practical  purposes 
with  a  capability  of  traversing  and  adjustment. 

It  has  been  asserted,  that  if  after  we  have  adjusted  our 
light  for  viewing  a  transparent  object  satisfactorily,  we 
throw  the  axis  of  the  optical  part  out  of  the  position 
which  we  first  selected,  we  must  begin  our  work  of  illu- 
mination over  again,  or  lose  the  effect  of  the  original 
one.  This  is  true  beyond  certain  limits,  but  the  body  of  a 
microscope  may  be  moved  very  considerably,  without  in 
the  least  affecting  the  vision  of  ordinary  transparent 
objects,  and  to  opaque  bodies,  of  course,  the  observation 
cannot  apply.  Further,  it  is  said  that  the  employment 
of  cones  and  diaphragms  below  the  stage  is  of  vast  use 
in  developing  the  nature  of  many  transparent  bodies, 
and  in  tempering  the  light  to  the  shade  to  produce  a 
maximum  of  distinctness ;  and  that  if  these  are  employed, 
the  most  perverse  and  prejudiced  antagonist  cannot  re- 
fuse to  admit  that  any  diversion  of  the  optical  part  from 
the  line  of  adjustment  must  utterly  destroy,  not  only 
distinctness,  but  nearly  all  vision  whatever. 

To  obviate  these  objections  let  there  be  a  large  roomy 
slider-holder,  with  a  good  steel  spring,  so  as  to  pinch  the 
plates  together  pretty  tight ;  the  object  can  then  be  moved 
about  by  the  hands  in  any  direction,  and  the  body  may  re- 
main a  fixture,  save  as  to  the  adjustment  of  the  focus. 
I  have  always  found  that  people  like  to  move  an  object 
about  with  their  hands,  even  when  they  have  screw  mo- 


OX  CONSTRUCTING   STANDS  OK  MICROSCOPES.         103 

tions  for  traversing,  and  indeed  I  prefer  it  myself,  (pro- 
vided the  object  does  not  yield  too  easily,)  even  with  very 
high  powers. 

Lastly,  it  has  been  remarked,  with  great  justice,  that 
if  we  choose  to  employ  any  of  the  generation  of  camera 
lucidas  for  drawing  objects,  they  can  only  be  used  with 
microscopes  in  which  the  body  is  altogether  immoveable. 
Nothing  is  more  certain.  At  the  same  time  I  cannot  re- 
frain from  expressing  my  hatred  and  contempt  of  the 
Whole!  tribe,  as  rather  impediments  than  helps  to  a  real 
draughtsman.  This  much  I  will  venture  to  say,  that  if 
a  man  cannot  draw  ivithout  them,  he  cannot  ivith  them. 

The  slider-holder  enables  the  present  construction  to 
operate  with  these  nuisances,  for  the  adjustment  of  the 
focus  will  not  sensibly  disturb  that  of  the  image  on  the 
paper,  and  if  it  should,  a  very  little  motion,  backwards 
or  forwards,  given  to  the  drawing,  will  re-arrange  it. 
The  only  aid  which  I  can  with  confidence  recommend*, 
as  of  real  utility,  is  a  micrometer,  composed  of  glass, 
placed  in  the  field  bar  of  the  microscope,  and  divided 
into  about  40  or  50  parts  to  the  inch,  with  double  divi- 
sions, or  very  strong  lines  at  every  fifth  space.  These 
should  be  rubbed  over  with  black  lead,  after  which  they 
must  be  burnished  with  the  edge  of  a  piece  of  hard 
wood,  so  as  to  clean  the  surface  of  the  glass  ivithout  rubbing 
the  black  lead  out  of  the  divisions,  (a  device  of  the  late 
Dr.  Wollaston,  and  bearing  the  stamp  of  his  original  and 

*  See  Micrograpbia,  p.  221. 


164  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

penetrating  genius) ;  then  let  another  piece  of  thin  plane 
glass  be  smeared  with  Canada  balsam,  and  cemented 
upon  the  divisions,  which  will  preserve  them  for  ever. 
Now  if  corresponding  black  lines,  of  any  scale  required, 
are  placed  under  the  paper  on  which  we  draw,  we  can 
with  great  facility  put  in  our  outline  in  the  most  correct 
proportions.  Or  if  the  paper  is  too  opaque,  a  frame 
with  black  silk  threads  stretched  upon  it  may  be  laid 
upon  it  till  the  sketch  is  completed.  The  contrivance 
can  be  used  with  my  microscope  as  well  as  with  any 
other. 

Mr.  Lister  has  constructed  the  stand  of  a  microscope 
with  a  particular  view  to  the  use  of  the  camera  lucida  : 
accordingly  his  body  is  motionless  and  of  considerable 
length,  so  as  to  clear  a  large  space  on  the  table  for  the 
field  of  view.  The  ocular  end  is,  moreover,  firmly  lashed 
to  the  legs  of  the  stand,  (which  is  very  solid,)  by  means 
of  steadying  rods,  forming  altogether  the  best  construc- 
tion for  the  use  of  long  heavy  bodies,  and  cameras  lu- 
cidae,  which  I  have  seen. 

It  must  be  most  evident  that  a  single  microscope  re- 
quires exactly  the  same  powers,  properties,  and  capa- 
bilities as  a  compound  one.  I  should,  therefore,  construct 
its  stand  and  apparatus  precisely  in  the  same  manner  as 
that  of  a  compound  one,  only  it  may  be  made  on  a  much 
smaller  scale  :  as  little  strength  is  required  for  carrying 
single  magnifiers,  triangular  drawn  tubes  may  be  used 
instead  of  the  triangular  gun-metal  bar  of  the  compound 
(to  be  hereafter  described).     The  drawing  of  triangular 


ON  CONSTRUCTING  STANDS  OF  MICROSCOP&S.  ]  65 

tubes  is  a  novelty  produced  by  Mr.  Pritchard  expressly 
for  his  diamond  and  sapphire  instruments. 

I  therefore  conclude  that  the  principles,  at  least,  of  the 
best  possible  construction  for  the  mechanical  part  of 
microscopes,  may  be  denned.  I  have  attempted  to  re- 
duce them  to  practice  in  an  instrument  the  patterns  of 
which  1  have  executed  with  my  own  hands,  and  Mr. 
Pritchard  has  made  a  mechanical  drawing  of  it,  which 
he  will  describe  in  the  next  chapter,  under  the  title  of 
my  Operative  Aplanatic  Engiscope.  Before,  however,  the 
description  proceeds,  I  must  beg  a  boon  of  my  readers 
and  the  microscopic  world  at  large,  viz.  to  permit  me 
to  supplant  the  term  Compound  Microscope  by  the  word 
Engiscope,  which  seems  to  me  more  apposite. 

It  is  derived  from  two  Greek  words,  iyyvg,  near,  and 
oKoniu,  to  view,  and  therefore  well  expresses  an  instru- 
ment for  viewing  close  objects,  or  for  viewing  objects 
closely,  and  is  in  strong  contradistinction  to  the  term 
telescope,  derived,  as  my  readers  well  know,  from  Ttkot;, 
an  end  or  distant  limit,  and  cko-item,  and  therefore  denoting 
an  instrument  for  viewing  distant  objects.  The  term 
microscope,  derived  from  fmywc,  small,  and  (tko-kIw,  sig- 
nifies an  instrument  for  examining  small  objects,  which 
is  perfectly  correct  also,  but  in  bad  contradistinction  to 
the  telescope,  which  would  have  to  be  named  megala- 
scope,  to  oppose  it  (from  /^'yctc,  great,  and  okowIu),)  which 
expression  would  be  perfectly  accurate  when  applied  to 
the  telescope,  for  it  views  very  large  objeets,  such  as  the 
totality  of  a  planet  or  the  sun,  &c.     Now  a  compound 


16G  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

microscope  and  a  telescope  pass  into  each  other  by  in- 
sensible degrees :  a  species  of  telescope  can  always  be 
made  of  the  former,  and  a  kind  of  microscope  of  the 
latter,  but  both  of  the  most  execrable  kind.  To  this  last, 
namely,  a  short  spy-glass,  or  perspective  glass,  with  a 
long  pull-out  tube,  so  as  to  permit  it  to  adapt  itself  to 
rays  which  are  considerably  divergent,  the  term  Engi- 
scope  has  already  been  applied  by  Martin  and  others,  but 
I  think  most  unwarrantably,  for  such  an  execrable  piece 
of  trumpery  is  wholly  unworthy  of  a  separate  existence, 
or  a  separate  name ;  it  is  just  as  easy  to  make  a  piece  of 
velvet  of  an  ass's  hide  as  to  make  an  object-glass  which 
shall  answer  both  for  a  telescope  and  a  compound  mi- 
croscope, be  its  focus  what  it  may.  The  only  veritable 
engiscope  is  the  latter  instrument,  with  an  objective-glass 
truly  adapted  to  act  with  divergent  rays  ;  a  short  tele- 
scope may  be  made  of  six  inches  focus,  and  a  long  com- 
pound microscope  with  an  object-glass  also  of  six  inches 
focus,  but  the  construction  of  each  must  be  utterly 
different,  or  they  will  only  nominally  be  what  they  are 
called. 

I  therefore  hope  that  I  shall  be  allowed  (as  I  have 
reformed  and  revolutionized  both  the  optical  and  mechanical 
structure  of  microscopes)  to  change  their  names  also,  and 
shall  therefore  take  the  liberty  of  using  the  term  engi- 
scope, as  aforesaid,  instead  of  compound  microscope, 
and  retaining  the  expressions  microscope  or  simple  mi- 
croscope, for  convenience  sake,  to  denominate  what  is  now 
called  i\  single  microscope,  in  opposition  to  a  compound, 


ON  CONSTRUCTING   STANDS  OF  MICROSCOPES.  16/ 

The  term  compound  microscope  will  then  be  applied 
appositely  to  all  those  instruments  with  which  we  view 
real  objects  instead  of  images  of  them,  constructed  by  com- 
bining two  or  more  lenses  together;  for  the  optical  part  of 
what  is  commonly  called  a  single  microscope  may  be  made  of 
as  many  as  four  glasses,  whereas  the  optical  part  of  a  com- 
pound (as  it  is  usually  termed)  does  not  necessarily  consist 
of  more  than  two,  viz.  an  object  and  ocular  glass.     Thus 
if  we  retain  the  old  terms,  how  are  we  to  define  accu- 
rately a  magnifier  composed  of  two  double  aplanatics  ? 
Are  we  to   christen   it  a    single   quadruple,  or   double 
doublet  ?  or  a  simple  compound  ?     This  will  be  as  ludi- 
crous as  Mr.  Callaghan  O'Brallaghan's  definition  of  the 
first  bit  of  bread  he  ate  in  England,  which  it  seems  was 
a  roasted  potato,  cooked  in  a  brass  saucepan. 

It  is  presumed,  therefore,  with  due  deference  to  the 
opinions  of  better  men,  that  the  term  engiscope  is  lawful 
and  orthodox,  and  will,  probably,  be  adopted  by  posterity, 
if  not  by  the  present  generation  :  as  to  the  fuss  which 
has  been  made  about  my  using  an  i  instead  of  a  y,  in  the 
conversion  of  the  Greek  upsilon  (both  letters  having 
the  same  sound,  and  having  been  used  indifferently  by 
ancient  English  writers),  I  beg  to  state  that  I  did  so  on 
purpose,  to  make  a  tub  to  amuse  the  ivhale  icith,  and  to 
draw  the  attention  of  the  learned  to  the  term. 

C.  R.  G. 


168 


CHAPTER  IX. 

Description  of  Dr.  Goring' s  Operative  Aplanatic* 
Engiscope. 

It  is  necessary  to  premise  that  figures  J,  8,  10,  11,  12, 
14,  17,  18,  19,  20,  and  letter  A,  are  drawn  one-quarter  of 
the  real  size ;  all  the  rest  are  one-sixth,  exeej>t  figure  23, 
which  is  of  the  true  size. 

Figure  7  represents  a  geometrical  elevation  of  the  in- 
strument, just  removed  from  its  case,  the  body,  «,  being 
screwed  on,  and  the  triangular  bar,  b,  somewhat  ele- 
vated above  the  stage,  which  is  fixed  in  situ.  To  begin 
from  the  foundation, — the  legs  are  all  of  the  same  thick- 
ness, but  tapered  in  breadth  towards  their  extremities, 
in  order  to  obtain  strength  where  most  required.  In 
the  upper  one  is  a  hole  to  receive  the  projecting  pin  at 
the  end  of  the  circular  bar,  c.  Underneath  the  pillar,  d, 
is  a  screw  nut,  e,  which  lets  down,  to  obviate  the  spring- 
ing of  the  legs.  The  pillar,  d,  is  constructed  of  two 
pieces  of  very  stout  tube,  moving  stiffly  in  each  other. 
At  the  head  of  this  pillar  is  a  socket,/^  to  receive  the  ball 
shewn  in  figure  8.     This  universal  joint  is  made  in  the 

*  Jplanatic,  derived  from  the  priv.  a,  and  irAavT),  error,  means  free  from 
both  kinds  of  aberration,  or  devoid  of  all  errors. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  DR.  GORING's  ENGISCOPK.  1G9 

customary  manner,  but  the  socket  lias  a  slit  for  the  neck 
of  the  ball,  only  through  one-quarter  of  a  circle,  to  avoid 
weakening  it  unnecessarily.  It  is  pinched  by  a  screw,  g, 
with  a  vice-handle.  The  ball,  the  socket  of  the  circular 
bar,  h,  together  with  the  stage- pin,  i,  are  all  cast  in  one 
piece,  as  shewn  in  plan,  fig.  8.  The  stage,  j,  has  a  cir- 
cular aperture,  which  has  a  sink  and  two  nicks  in  it, 
together  with  a  square  hole,  k,  (as  seen  in  fig.  9).  There 
is  likewise  an  arrow  pointing  to  a  nick  in  the  socket, 
h,  to  shew  when  it  is  truly  at  right  angles  to  the  bar,  b. 
It  fixes  on  to  the  pin,  i,  which  is  clamped  tight  by  a 
screw,/.-  into  the  bottom  of  this  screw  is  inserted  a 
piece  of  metal,  the  end  of  which  is  worked  to  correspond 
to  the  curve  of  the  pin,  i,  which  causes  it  to  clamp  tight 
with  a  very  slight  effort,  and  preserves  the  pin  from  in- 
jury. Within  the  socket,  h,  is  soldered  a  stout  tube, 
forming  the  external  bar,  c.  On  this  circular  bar  slide 
the  split  sockets,  m,  m,  m,  carrying  the  condensing  lens,  n, 
the  inferior  pin,  i,  for  holding  the  stage,  and  the  oval 
mirror,  o  :  all  travel  up  and  down  at  pleasure,  and  may 
either  be  moved  out  of  the  way,  by  turning  them  one- 
quarter  round,  or  stripped  off  altogether,  if  thought  more 
convenient.  Their  clamping  screws  fix  them  tight  in 
any  required  position.  A  nick  is  made  in  front  of  each 
of  the  sockets,  and  a  line  drawn  on  the  front  of  the  bar, 
to  shew  when  the  condenser  and  mirror,  &c.  are  truly  in 
the  axis  of  the  aperture  of  the  stage.  The  oval  mirror  is 
plaoe,  but  its  reverse  is  formed  of  plaster  of  Paris.  It  re- 
volves on  a  vertical  axis,  />,   and  on  a  horizontal  one,  q, 


1/0  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

the  motions  of  both  of  which  are  governed  by  the  milled 
head,  r.  The  triangular  gun-metal  bar,  b,  is  truncated  at 
its  edges,  and  is  therefore  strictly  speaking  a  hexagon, 
tl us  form  giving  greater  strength  in  proportion  to  the  space 
occupied  by  it  than  a  perfect  triangle  would,  while  it  still 
possesses  the  property  of  being  locked  fast  when  pinched 
on  only  one  side  :  it  is  evident  that  even  an  equilateral 
hexagon  would,  when  pinched  on  one  side,  always  cause 
two  others  to  bear  close  against  a  triangular  containing 
tube.  This  bar  slides  up  and  down  in  the  external  cir- 
cular one,  c,  between  two  plates  of  metal,  pierced  with 
triangular  apertures  to  receive  it:  one  is  soldered  in  at 
the  summit  of  the  socket,  h,  the  other  below  the  milled 
head,  s  ;  and  springs  are  placed  on  the  same  side  as  the 
rack,  both  above  and  below  the  pinion,  to  steady  the 
bar,  and  give  the  friction  necessary  to  prevent  it  from 
falling  from  its  position  by  gravitation.  If  the  present 
stand  was  made  to  operate  solely  with  an  engiscopic  refract- 
ing body,  it  would  be  better  to  omit  the  rack-work  of  the 
upright  bar  altogether,  and  substitute  a  pinching  screw 
for  it,  giving  a  fine  movement  to  the  body  within  the  neck 
of  the  arm,  by  a  screw  on  Ramsden's  principle.  In 
its  anterior  side  is  sunk  the  rack  which  adjusts  the  focus 
by  means  of  the  milled  head,  s,  which  is  repeated  on  the 
opposite  side.  Rack-work  is  not  perhaps  the  best  sort 
of  movement  which  might  be  contrived,  but  it  is  good 
enough,  when  well  executed,  for  all  practical  purposes. 
On  the  top  of  this  triangular  bar  is  fixed  the  gun-metal 
wheel,/,   within    the  teeth  of  which  works  an   endless 


DESCRIPTION  OF  DR.  GORING's  ENGISCOl'K.  l/l 

screw,  the  milled  head  of  which,  u,  is  seen  in  the  draw- 
ing. Above  the  wheel  is  shewn  the  triangular  pinion 
socket,  v,  which  carries  the  arm,  w,  which  is  also  of  gun- 
metal,  truncated  at  its  edges  with  a  sunk  rack  on  its 
superior  side,  exactly  on  the  principle  of  the  other  :  this 
bar  is  worked  by  a  pinion,  x,  seen  in  the  cross  elevation 
of  this  socket  and  bar,  fig.  10.  Diamond  and  sapphire 
lenses,  and  all  sorts  of  simple  microscopes,  are  attached 
to  this  arm,  by  being  thrust  into  the  hole  at  its  other 
extremity,  as  drawn  in  the  engraving. 

The  superiority  of  sapphire  lenses  over  those  of  glass 
seems  now  universally  recognised,  and  virtually,  the  su- 
periority of  diamonds  over  sapphires.  (For  whatever  will 
prove  the  former  of  these  propositions  will  most  assuredly 
prove  the  latter  also.)  If  these  substances  possessed  no 
other  advantages  over  glass,  save  their  invulnerability 
and  capability  of  being  burnished  into  their  brass  settings, 
these  properties,  coupled  with  their  extreme  thinness,  the 
natural  result  of  their  shallow  curves,  when  properly 
executed,  (and  which  allows  more  room  for  the  object 
and  for  the  illumination  of  it,  if  opaque,  with  any  given 
power  and  aperture,)  and  their  superior  magnifying 
power  with  a  given  curve,  also  would  fully  justify  the 
patronage  they  have  received*. 

The  pinion,  x,  fig.  10,  has  a  projecting  square  at  each 
end,  to  receive  the  ivory  milled  lever,  ?/,  or  milled  head, 
z,  on  either  side.     The  whole  of  this  socket  revolves  on 

*  See  Microscopic  Cabinet,  chap.  xiv. 


172  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

the  upright  triangular  bar,  b,  and  is  kept  in  its  place  by 
the  gun-metal  garter-piece,  shewn  at  'a,  and  has  a  saddle- 
piece  well  screwed  on,  covering  it  over,  to  prevent  the 
loosening  the  pinion,  by  the  action  of  the  milled  lever. 
The  endless  screw  may  be  detached  from  the  wheel,  t, 
hy  slackening  the  pinching  screw,  b,  which  serves  to  keep 
the  pinion  in  gear,  the  said  endless  screw  being  affixed 
to  a  separate  piece,  which  turns  round  on  the  project- 
ing and  inferior  part  of  the  socket,  by  means  of  a  pivot : 
the  pinching  screw,  'b,  operating  in  an  arc,  formed  to 
receive  it.  This  wheel  and  endless  screw  are  absolutely 
necessary  to  enable  us  to  command  the  motions  of  the 
arm,  when  the  axis  of  the  body  of  the  instrument  is  not 
perpendicular,  or  nearly  so. 

The  body,  a,  is  constructed  on  the  smallest  scale  on 
which  it  can  well  be  made  without  impairing  its  optical 
properties.  The  only  true  way  of  preventing  the  genera- 
tion of  false  light  is  to  allow  so  much  space  in  the  body  that 
the  rays  proceeding  from  the  object-glass  shall  not  impinge 
on  any  part  of  the  tube  ;  for  no  sensible  light  is  produced 
until  they  flash  against  something.  Into  the  superior  part 
of  the  eye-tube,  'c,  are  screwed  the  various  inverting  eye- 
glasses, and  into  its  inferior  part,  'd,  the  erecting  glasses, 
A.  Upon  the  neck  of  the  object  end,  'e,  are  screwed  the 
various  object-glasses,  oneof  which  is  represented  attached 
in  the  plate.  Upon  this  neck  also  slides  the  illuminator, '/, 
for  opaque  objects ;  it  has  a  split  socket  and  clamping 
screw,  '(/,  by  which  it  is  adjusted,  and  is  composed  of  a 
plain  convex  lens,  having  an  inch  and  a  half  of  aperture 


DESCRIPTION  OF   DR.   CORING's  ENGISCOPK.  173 

and  the  same  focus  operating-  by  lamp-light,  with  another 
isosceles  convex  of  same  power  and  diameter  screwed  to  it : 
these  curves  have  been  found  by  experiment  the  best  both 
for  refracting  the  maximum  of  light,  and  for  preventing 
any  loss  of  it  by  reflection  from  the  convex  surfaces  of 
the  lenses,  'h  is  the  cap  of  one  of  the  eye -pieces  in  dotted 
lines ;  it  is  supposed  to  be  removed  for  the  purpose  of 
applying  the  camera  lutida,  fig.  1 1,  which  is  thrust  on  over 
the  eye-tube,  a  side  view  whereof  is  represented  at  fig.  12. 
By  far  the  best  species  of  camera  lucida  is,  I  think,  this 
(which  is  the  invention  of  Professor  Amici),  and  is  com- 
posed of  a  simple  piece  of  thick  plate  glass,  with  truly 
parallel  surfaces,  placed  at  an  angle  of  45°,  and  reflecting 
an  image  while  we  see  through  it,  for  it  allows  the  point  of 
the  pencil,  the  drawing  on  the  paper, and  the  image,  to  be 
seen  at  the  same  identical  moment,  without  any  dodging 
or  effort.  Care  must  be  taken  to  have  a  sufficient  thick- 
ness of  glass,  to  prevent  the  visual  pencil  from  reach- 
ing the  inferior  surface,  otherwise  there  will  be  two 
images. 

Fig.  13  is  a  micrometer,  to  be  placed  in  the  field-bar 
of  one  of  the  lowest  eye-pieces.  It  is  made  of  glass,  with 
divisions  of  40  or  50  parts  to  the  inch,  which  are  filled 
with  black  lead,  well  burnished  in,  and  secured  by 
another  piece  of  glass  being  cemented  over  them. 

Figure  14  is  a  square  bar,  sliding  up  and  down  in  the 
square  tube  in  the  stage,  k,  fig.  9.  It  carries  the  illumi- 
nator,/, when  it  is  thought  advisable  not  to  load  the  body 
with  it. 


17^  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Fig.  15  represents  the  lengthening  tube,  'i,  with  the 
direct  boot,  7c,  drawn  over  it.  The  lengthening  piece 
screws  on  in  place  of  the  object-glass,  which  is  again 
attached  to  its  extremity.  This  piece,  from  its  narrow- 
ness, will  generate  false  light;  it  must,  therefore,  be  lined 
with  black  velvet,  which  is,  perhaps,  the  best  substance 
to  stifle  it  when  generated. 

Figure  16  is  the  diagonal  boot.  It  is  constructed  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  other,  but  has  a  plane  metallic  specu- 
lum or  rectangular  prism  of  glass  placed  at'/,  to  reflect 
the  rays  received  at  right  angles.  It  is  necessary  that 
the  piece  of  plate-glass  which  is  affixed  to  the  extremity 
of  the  cones  of  these  boots  should  be  very  perfect,  and 
set  in  truly  parallel. 

SirD.  Brewster  first  conceived  the  project  of  causing  an 
aplanatic  objective  to  be  so  constructed  that  it  should  be 
capable  of  acting  in  wrater  instead  of  air  (see  his  Treatise 
on  New  Philosophical  Instruments) .  I  am  afraid  it  would 
be  very  difficult  to  make  a  naked  object-glass  water-tight, 
and  at  the  same  time  to  adjust  it  perfectly ;  and  after  all  it 
would  only  serve  to  act  in  water,  and  would  be  useless  out 
of  it.  The  present  arrangement  really  seems  to  answer 
every  practical  purpose  completely  well,  though  cer- 
tainly Sir  David's  plan  is  the  more  scientific  way  of  doing 
the  thing. 

Figure  17  is  a  cup  or  silver  speculum,  which  slides 
over  the  end  of  the  object-glass. 

Figure  18  is  a  shade  to  slide  over  the  lengthening 
piece,  'i,  figures  15  and  16. 


DESCRIPTION    OF    DR.    GORINGS    ENGJSCOPE.         1/5 

Figure  19  is  a  small  cone,  to  slide  over  the  object- 
glass  when  acting  by  plain  artificial  light. 

Figure  20  is  the  arm  by  which  the  optical  part  of  the 
AmicianCatadioptric  Engiscope*  is  attached  to  thepresent 
stand  :  it  must  be  considerably  longer  than  the  other, 
and,  like  it,  racked  to  its  extremity,  to  admit  of  its  being 
taken  out  of  the  socket.  By  means  of  its  swivel  and 
pinching-screw,  it  allows  the  body  to  turn  round, 
and  present  itself  either  in  front  or  at  the  sides  of  the 
stage. 

Figure  21  is  the  aquatic  live-box,  with  an  extra  pierced 
lid,  'm,  for  aerial  insects  and  land  objects,  &c.  There 
should  be  about  half  a  dozen  of  these,  of  different  sizes, 
varying  from  that  given  in  the  plate,  to  about  2-10ths  of 
an  inch  in  diameter.  It  would  be  found  a  convenience 
if  the  larger  ones  had  watch-glasses  fixed  into  them  with 
their  curves  applying  to  each  other,  and  their  concavi- 
ties pointing  outwards,  instead  of  the  plane  glasses,  as 
given  in  the  drawing ;  for  by  this  arrangement,  when 
used  with  very  low  powers  for  exhibiting  a  grand  melee  of 
aquatic  insects,  &c,  taking  in  nearly  their  whole  area, 
the  edges  of  the  field  will  be  as  distinct  as  its  centre; 
the  foci  of  these  two  parts  of  the  visible  superficies  being 
always  different  with  aflat  object,  and  a  low  power,  even 
with  the  best  aplanatics. 

The  glasses,  whether  flat  or  concave,  must  be  well 
cemented  into  their  cells  by  painters'  ground  white  lead 
or  opticians'  cement,  that  the  box  may  be  completely 

*  Micrographia,  chap.  i. 


1"6  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATION'S. 

water-tight ;  and  the  tubes  themselves  may  be  greased 
for  the  same  purpose  if  necessary.  These  boxes  are  as  useful 
pieces  of  microscopic  apparatus  as  ever  were  invented. 

Figure  22  represents  the  black  ground  box  (an  inven- 
tion of  Mr.  Lister),  which  in  the  present  instrument  also 
forms  a  stage  for  the  single  microscope,  and  for  dis- 
section. 

At  'n  is  seen  its  lid,  of  which  a  side  view  is  given  at  'o  ; 
at  'p,  its  bottom  with  its  side  view  also  j  its  interior 
surface  is  lined  with  black  silk  velvet,  and  so  is  the 
superior  surface  of  ihe  lid ;  the  sides  of  the  cone,  'q,  are 
well  blacked  ;  at  'r  is  seen  a  disk,  also  covered  with  black 
silk  velvet,  which  acts  along  with  the  silver  specula. 
Its  arm  revolves  on  the  top  of  the  cone,  and  can  be 
removed  altogether,  if  necessary ;  at  its  extremity  is  a 
hole,  in  which  is  inserted  the  cradle  joint,  which  carries 
a  brass  needle;  a  small  piece  of  brass  tube,  stuffed  with 
cork,  is  affixed  to  one  of  its  extremities,  and  to  the  other 
a  pair  of  forceps,  which  are  represented  of  their  full  size 
at  figure  23.  These  are  constructed  as  usual,  except 
that  a  hole  is  drilled  through  them  at  's,  to  enable  them 
forcibly  to  grasp  the  head  of  a  common  pin. 

Figure  24  is  the  piece  which  carries  the  wheel  of  dia- 
phragms ;  't  is  the  plan  of  their  under  side.  There  should 
be  about  five  apertures,  varying  from  half  an  inch  to 
1-  10th  in  diameter.  This  apparatus  screws  on  to  any  of 
the  aquatic  boxes,  also  to  the  slider  holder,  figs.  25  and 
26,  and  the  false  stage  or  black  ground,  figure  22,  in 
place  of  the   bottom,  'p.     It  was  invented  by  Monsieur 


DESCRIPTION  OK  DR.  GOFUNg's   ENGISCOPK.  177 

Le  Baillif,  at  Paris  ;  but  we  have  long  been  in  the  habit 
of  using  cones  for  the  same  purpose  in  England. 

Figure  27  is  a  contractor,  which  drops  into  the  sink 
formed  in  the  aperture  of  the  stage,  when  too  large  for 
carrying  on  dissections,  or  other  operations  of  a  similar 
nature ;  it  has  two  bayonet-catches,  which  secure  it  by 
being  turned  one  quarter  round  :  into  the  aperture  of 
this  latter  piece,  a  small  slider-holder  may  be  advan- 
tageously fixed  (to  be  used  with  the  Amician  Engiscope 
or  the  simple  microscope),  which  should  likewise  be 
made  to  fix  to  the  top  of  the  false  stage,  figure  22,  when 
its  lid  is  removed. 

Figure  25  represents  a  plan  of  the  four-pillar-slider - 
holder,  which  is  by  far  the  best  contrivance  hitherto  in- 
vented, for  attaching  all  sorts  of  objects  in  sliders  and 
between  slips  of  glass,  &c.  to  the  stage :  its  elevation  is 
shewn  at  figure  26,  with  the  two  pins  which  secure  it. 
In  the  plan  are  drawn  the  two  cross  connecting  bars, 
'u,  'u,  between  which  and  the  superior  plate  all  large 
opaque  sliders,  &c.  are  placed.  There  is  another  plate 
below  the  first :  between  these  two  a  common  transpa- 
rent slider  is  shewn.  The  helical  spring  is  of  steel  of  some 
strength,  so  that  the  sliders  shall  not  be  permitted  to 
move  about  between  the  plates  too  easily.  The  holes  at 
the  corners  of  the  plates  which  slide  up  and  down  on  the 
pillars,  must  be  sufficiently  large  to  prevent  any  clinging 
or  sticking. 

Figure  28  shows  a  plan  and  profile  of  an  adapter , 
which  carries  a  small  aquatic  live  box,  to  be  used  with 

N 


\J$  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

the  wheel  of  diaphragms  5    it  has  a  bayonet-catch  to  fix 
the  box  securely,  independent  of  its  gravity. 

Figure  29  is  a  frame   and   slip  of  glass  for  crystal- 
lizations of  salts. 

Such  is  the  description  of  an  instrument  which  will  be 
found  a  regular  working  tool,  either  for  amusement  or 
scientific  investigation.  It  is  not  pretended  (be  it  always 
remembered)  that  it  is  a  perfect  or  standard  instrument, 
but  Dr.  G.  hopes  it  will  be  found  an  approximation  to  one. 

A.  P. 

March  1829. 

Most  of  the  apparatus  described  in  Chapter  VI.  as  appli- 
cable to  my  microscope  can  be  applied  to  this.     In  the 
instruments   of  this  kind    manufactured  by  me  I  have 
made  the  socket  at  h  to  extend  an  inch  or  more  above 
the  surface  of  the  stage  :    this  increases  the  steadiness  of 
the  triangular  gun- metal  bar,  b,  which  in  practice  is  not 
required  to  be   depressed  much  lower  than  represented 
in  the  engraving.     The  milled   head,  s,  of  the  pinion  is 
made  of  much  larger   diameter   than  represented  ;    it 
works  against  the  posterior  angle  of  the  triangular  bar, 
and  is  placed  at  h.     The  fine  adjustment  for  the  focus,  as 
also  the  moveable  stage  described  at  page  105,  can  be  at- 
tached to  this  stage,  j,  and  the  foot  of  the  stand  made  of  a 
solid  tripod. 

A.  P. 

May  183P. 


179 


CHAPTER  X. 

Manner  of  Observing   with  and  Managing  the    Operative 
Aplanatic  Engiscope. 

By    C.     R.     GORING,    M.  D. 

General  Observations. — Select  an  apartment  on  the  ground 
floor,  if  possible,  which  has  a  northern  exposure,  and  the 
casement  of  which  (it  should  have  only  one)  is  not  over- 
shadowed by  trees  or  buildings,  but  presents  a  clear  view 
of  the  open  sky — sky-lights  are  not  proper  for  a  micro- 
scopic study.  In  such  a  room  I  would  recommend  you 
to  keep  your  instruments  and  apparatus,  &c.  open,  and  at 
all  times  ready  for  observation  ;  but  take  especial  care  to 
keep  it  locked,  as  if  it  was  the  case  of  your  microscope, — 
which,  in  fact,  it  may  be  termed.  Have  the  fear  of  the 
cat  before  your  eyes,  and  also  of  all  those  busy,  inter- 
meddling, officious  housewives,  who,  under  pretence  of 
dusting,  cleaning,  and  setting  to  rights,  will  subvert  and 
revolutionize  the  whole  economy  of  your  observatory, 
and  perhaps  throw  half  your  tackle  behind  the  fire. 
Never  allow  the  apartment  to  be  cleaned  until  you 
have  secured  your  apparatus.  1  think  it  myself  a  great 
convenience  (and  I  am  not  singular  in  my  opinion)  to 
have  an  apartment  especially  devoted  to  my  microscopes, 
as  much  as  the  observatory  of  the  astronomer  is  to  his 


IgO  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

transit  and  circles,  for  then  there  is  no  loss  of  time  when 
yon  wish  to  go  to  work,  and  you  are  sure  to  find  every 
thing  just  where  you  left  it.     I  cannot  be  plagued  by 
eternally  packing  and  unpacking  my  implements,  &c. 
but  this   is  no  rule  for  those  who  like  such  occupation. 
Have  caps  to  cover  the  objective  and  eye-glasses  of  your 
instruments,  and  get  a  little  nest  of  drawers  to  stand  on 
your  table  to  keep  talc  sliders,  &c.  in,  with  a  glass  cover 
or  two  (like  those  of  watchmakers)  to  secure  the  more 
delicate  parts  of  your  apparatus  ;  the  rest  will  suffer  no 
harm  from  the  dust.     Procure  a  tripod  stand,  like  those 
used  for  small  telescopes,  and  of  such  height,  that  when 
you    sit  down  and   turn   the   body  of  your  instrument 
against  the  sky,   like   a   telescope,  the    eye-piece  may 
present  itself  in  a  commodious  position  for  observation. 
You  will  also,  probably,  want  a  tripod  stool  to  rest  your 
engiscope  upon,  when  placed  in  a  vertical  posture  for 
dissecting   and  similar  uses,  as  tables  generally  run  too 
high  for  the  purpose,    and  are  always  more  or  less  un- 
steady.    In  towns  the  tremor  occasioned  by  the  transition 
of  carriages  is  frequently  a  great  nuisance  in  the  upper 
stories  of  a  house,  more  particularly  if  your  mountings 
are  rickety  and  unstable. 

Now,  courteous  disciple,  I  will  endeavour  to  instruct 
thee  how  to  manage  thy  tackle,  and  will,  moreover,  have 
the  extreme  complaisance  to  suppose  thee  (in  all  micro- 
scopic matters  at  least)  one  of  the  aivkward  squad— as 
stupid  as  an  owl,  and  as  ignorant  as  a  cart-horse.  I  will 
tell  thee  as  well  as  I  can  all  that  thou  art  to  do,  and  all 


OBSERVING   AND   MANAGING   ENGISCOPE.  181 

that  thou  art  not  to  do.  I  will  try  to  make  thee  know  the 
right  end  of  thy  instrument  from  the  wrong-  one  ;  how 
to  put  a  fly's  eye  before  the  object-glass,  and  a  fool's  eye 
before  the  eye-piece;  with  many  other  things  equally 
curious,  important,  and  interesting ;  and  if  perchance  I 
shall  succeed  in  learning  thee  how  to  deal  with  the 
instrument  under  consideration,  the  management  of  all 
others  constructed  on  similar  principles  must  be  per- 
fectly obvious. 

It  will  be  necessary  for  me  to  premise  somewhat  con- 
cerning the  optical  part;  though  it  is  not  my  intention 
to  treat  upon  it  in  a  regular  way  in  this  chapter,  as  a  full 
and  particular  account  thereof  will  be  given  hereafter, 
I  shall  speak  of  it  now  only  as  an  appendage  to  the  me- 
chanical fabric  of  the  engiscope,  and  the  directions  re- 
lative to  its  use  will  be  only  of  a  general  nature,  but  still 
sufficient  for  practical  purposes.  The  optical  part,  then, 
is  divided  into  the  objective  and  ocular;  the  objective 
glass  is  situated  at  'e  in  figure  7,  and  screws  on  to  the 
neck  of  the  body;  it  is  always  next  the  object  of  which  it 
forms  an  image  or  picture,  which  is  viewed  by  the  ocular 
or  eye-glass  at  'c,  always  situated  next  the  eye,  (for  be  it 
remembered,  that  in  strict  language  we  do  not  view  the 
object  itself  in  an  engiscope,  but  its  image  or  picture.) 

Several  aplanatic  object-glasses  and  eye-glasses  ac- 
company the  instrument ;  their  powers  or  foci  are 
generally  marked  upon  them  ;  but  the  high  powers  may 
be  known  from  the  low  ones  by  this  simple  rule,  viz. 
the  largest   object-glasses   are   the  lowest  in  power,  and 


182  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

the   longest  eye-pieces,  having  the  largest  glasses  in  them, 
are  also  the  lowest  powers.     Now  the  total  power  of  the 
body  or  optical  part  of  the  engiscope,  is  the  result  of  that 
of  its  object-glass   multiplied  by  or  combined  with  that 
of  the  eye-piece  ;    therefore   the  highest  power  will  be 
given  by  the  smallest  object-glass  used  with  the  shortest 
eye-piece,  and  the  lowest  by  the  largest  object-glass  with 
the  longest  eye-piece.     The   eye-pieces  mentioned  above 
are  all  of  the   inverting   kind,    like  those  belonging  to 
astronomical   telescopes  ;    there  is,  however,  a  pair  of 
erecting  glasses,  A,  to  screw  into  the  bottom  of  the  pull- 
out  tube,  which,  with  the  former,  make  erecting  eye-pieces ; 
these   are  used  for  dissecting,  &c,  and  also  for  giving 
very   low   powers   when  wanted  below  the  scale  of  the 
weakest  inverting   ones.     The   use   of  all  these  I  shall 
shew  in  their  proper  places.     Each  object-glass  combines 
with   each  eye-piece,  whatever  their   number   may   be, 
according  to  the  fancy  of  the  observer,  but  the  power 
which  results  from  the  combination  can  only  be  known 
by  trial,  and  should  be  given  by  the  maker  of  the  instru- 
ment, in  a  written  paper. 

The  object-glasses  are  frequently  made  to  combine 
with  each  other.  An  increase  of  power  is  obtained  by 
the  elongation  of  the  body,  effected  by  drawing  out  the 
tube,  'c  :  whenever  the  length  of  the  body  is  doubled,  for 
example,  the  power  is  also  doubled  {ceteris paribus). 

In  winter  it  will  be  proper  to  cause  the  instrument  to 
be  slightly  warmed  at  the  fire  before  it  is  used,  until  it  is 
of  about  the  same  warmth  with  the  human  body,  other- 


OBSERVING  AND   MANAGING   ENGISCOPE.  183 

wise  the  perspiration  from  the  eye  will  be  perpetually 
condensing  on  the  eye-glasses,  &c.  and  greatly  impede 
vision. 

Always  begin  to  examine  your  object  with  the  lowest 
power  you  have,  unless  it  is  very  minute ;  it  may  be  laid 
down  as  a  general  rule,  that  large  objects  require  low 
powers,  and  small  ones  high  powers ;  that  the  low 
powers  show  the  whole  or  general  view  of  an  object,  and 
the  high  ones  only  its  parts  in  succession. 

Never  use  high  powers  unless  absolutely  necessary  ; 
for  as  the  power  increases,  so  does  the  difficulty  of 
finding  the  object,  and  of  adjusting  the  focus.  The 
colours  also  grow  fainter  and  more  diluted,  and  the 
shades  darker  and  darker,  until  all  ease  and  satisfaction 
in  observation,  together  with  all  certain  vision,  fade 
away,  and  so  very  small  a  portion  of  the  object  is  seen, 
that  it  is  difficult  to  know  what  we  are  looking  at.  Re- 
collect that  a  really  good  aplanatic  object-glass  shews  every 
thing  ivith  very  low  powers ;  in  fact  in  this  property  its 
goodness  and  beauty  consist :  do  not  plume  yourself, 
therefore,  upon  having  an  instrument  which  shews 
objects  with  very  high  powers,  but  with  very  low  ones. 

Where,  however,  from  the  minuteness  of  an  object,  it 
becomes  really  necessary  to  use  a  high  power,  always 
select  a  small  deep  object-glass,  and  use  it  along  witb  a 
shallow  or  long  eye-piece,  in  preference  to  using  an  object 
glass  of  low  power,  with  a  short  or  powerful  eye-piece, 
for  magnifying  power  is  much  more  valuable  and  effec- 
tive  when   derived  from   the  object-glas^  than  from  the 


184  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATION'S. 

eye-piece  (this   is  a    subject  which    I    shall    recur    to 
hereafter.) 

When  you  clean  the  eye-glasses  (a  point  of  great  im- 
portance to  pure  vision)  do  not  remove  more  than  one 
at  a  time,  and  be  sure  to  replace  it  before  you  begin 
with  another  :  by  these  means  you  will  be  sure  to  pre- 
serve the  component  glasses  in  their  proper  places  : 
recollect  that  if  they  become  intermingled,  they  will  be 
useless.  Keep  a  piece  of  well-dusted  chamois  leather, 
slightly  impregnated  with  some  of  the  finest  putty  or 
crocus  powder,  in  a  little  box  to  wipe  them  with  (for  it  is 
of  consequence  to  preserve  it  from  dust  and  damp), 
the  former  will  scratch  the  glasses,  and  the  latter  pre- 
vent you  from  wiping  them  clean.  As  to  the  object- 
glasses,  endeavour  to  keep  them  as  clean  as  possible 
without  wiping,  and  merely  use  a  camel's  hair  pencil  to 
brush  them  with  ;  for  wiping  them  hard  with  any  thing 
has  always  a  tendency  to  destroy  their  adjustment,  unless 
they  are  firmly  burnished  into  their  cells. 

Now  I  shall  suppose  that  you  want  to  view  some  trans- 
parent inanimate  object  mounted  in  a  slider.  There  are 
several  ways  of  doing  this,  according  to  the  position  in 
which  you  choose  to  preserve  your  instrument,  whether 
directed  upwards  towards  the  sky,  horizontally,  or  ver- 
tically, looking  downwards,  &c.  The  first  is  the  best 
method  for  direct  day-light ;  the  second,  for  lamp  or 
candle-light  ;  the  last  is  the  worst  of  all  for  either,  and 
should  not  be  resorted  to  when  the  others  can  be  used. 
There  are,  however,  intermediate  positions  between  the 


OBSERVING  AND  MANAGING  ENGISCOPE.  185 

horizontal  and  vertical  ones  ;  say  angles  of  40  and  45 
degrees,  which  are  comfortable  and  convenient  for  the 
observer,  though,  1  think,  unfavourable  to  the  action 
of  the  illuminative  part  of  the  instrument.  I  shall  pro- 
ceed to  give  directions,  on  the  supposition  that  you  wish 
to  see  in  the  simplest  and  best  possible  manner. 

1st.  Manner  of  mounting  for  viewing  inanimate  trans- 
parent  objects  by  pure  intercepted  day-light. — When  the 
instrument  is  first  removed  from  its  case,  the  circular 
bar,  c,  will  be  locked  fast  into  the  upper  or  longest  leg, 
by  means  of  its  projecting  pin;  it  is  loosened  by  drawing 
the  internal  tube  of  the  pillar  a  little  out,  for  which  pur- 
pose, grasp  the  ball  and  socket  in  one  hand,  and  the  legs 
in  the  other:  by  pulling  in  opposite  directions,  the  inner 
tube  will  be  detached,  and  the  pillar  heightened  in  any 
degree  requisite  for  observation,  at  the  same  time  the 
bar  will  be  left  at  freedom  to  move  in  any  direction  by 
means  of  the  ball  and  socket :  immediately  underneath 
the  pillar  is  an  adjusting  screw,  e,  by  means  of  which  the 
pillar  gains  the  support  of  a  fourth  leg,  and  is  rendered 
incapable  of  springing ;  it  can  be  used  when  great  stea- 
diness is  required  :  it  should  but  barely  touch  the  table 
or  stand  on  which  the  engiseope  is  placed. 

Having  then  spread  out  the  legs,  and  arranged  the  op- 
tical part  according  to  the  preceding  directions,  attach 
the  slider-holder,  fig.  25,  to  the  stage.  This  is  done  by  in- 
serting the  projecting  catches  into  the  nicks,  and  turning 
it  one  quarter  round  :   this  fixes  it  fast,  so  that  it  cannot 


186  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

fall  out   whatever   may   be   the  position  in  which  it  is 
placed  :  pass  the  slider  between  the  plates  until  the  ob- 
ject appears  within  the  aperture;    slacken  the  pinching 
screws  of  the  split  sockets  belonging  to  the  mirror  and 
condensing  lens  (if  necessary),  and  turn  them  one  quar- 
ter round,  so  as  to  be  out  of  the  way  of  the  body,  or  they 
may  be  removed  altogether,  by  sliding  them  off  the  bar  ; 
then,   by   means   of  the   double  action  of  the  ball  and 
socket,    elevate    the    bar,    until  the  instrument,   when 
placed  on  its  tripod  stand,  comes  into  the  position  of  a  tele- 
scope directed  towards  the  heavens,   at  any  angle  you 
please.     In  fine  weather,  it  will  not  be  improper  to  let 
down  the  upper  part  of  the    casement;    some   micro- 
scopists  have  recommended  us  to  select  a  ivhite  cloud,  if 
possible,  to  furnish  our  transmitted  light ;  I  think  myself 
that  the  blue  light  of  a  clear  atmosphere  is  preferable, 
especially  for  test  objects.     The  ball   performs  the  office 
of  a  cradle  joint,   by  being  moved   up  and  down  in  the 
quadrant  slit  of  the  socket.     Thus,  if  you  wish  the  bar  to 
point  upwards,  and  the  ocular  end  of  the  body  down- 
wards (as  will  be  the  case  in  the  present  instance),  make 
the  following  arrangement  :— Move  the  neck  of  the  ball, 
by  grasping  the  bar  until  it  is  about  half  way  between 
the  upper  and  lower  end  of  the  quadrant  slit,  {just  as  if  it 
was  a  common  cradle  joint)  :  the  body  thus  forms  an  angle 
of  about  45  degrees,  and  will  be  in  the  required  position 
(but  unless  the  motion  now  to  be  described  has  been 
previously  accomplished),  in  a  direction  directly  opposite 
to  that   now  required,  for  you  ivill  only  be  able  to  observe 


OBSERVING  AND  MANAGING   ENGISCOPE.  187 

with  it  by  looking  downwards,  whereas  you  are  to  look 
upwards.  To  effect  the  object  at  present  in  view,  turn 
the  ball  completely  round  in  the  plane  of  the  bar,  until  the 
end  of  the  bar  comes  into  the  place  of  the  eye-piece. 
The  instrument  is  then  fit  for  use  (at  least  when  placed 
on  its  tripod  stand  and  directed  towards  the  sky)  ;  re- 
member, that  by  the  motion  of  the  ball  as  a  cradle  joint, 
conjoined  with  the  rotatory  movement  natural  to  it,  every 
possible  position  is  attained.  All  you  have  now  to  do 
will  be  to  adjust  the  focus,  and  to  bring  the  body  to  bear 
on  the  part  of  the  object  you  wish  to  see.  The  adjust- 
ment of  the  focus  is  accomplished  by  means  of  the  milled 
head,  s,  and  the  traversing  motion  of  the  body  is  go- 
verned by  the  rack- work  at  v,  coupled  with  the  rotatory 
movement  on  the  top  of  the  bar,  which  is  regulated  by 
the  milled-head  at  z  ;  the  method  of  managing  this  part 
of  the  instrument  will  be  gained  with  the  utmost  facility 
by  a  little  practice.  In  the  present  case  it  will  not  be 
very  necessary,  as  you  may  move  the  object  about  at  will 
with  your  hands  between  the  plates  of  the  slider-holder. 

When  you  look  through  the  instrument,  be  sure  to 
place  your  eye  quite  close  to  the  eye-piece,  otherwise 
the  whole  field  of  view  will  not  be  visible,  and  note, 
moreover,  if  you  see  a  round  disk  of  light,  at  least  when 
the  object  is  not  in  the  slider-holder;  if  you  do  not,  it  is 
a  sign  that  something  is  wrong;  perhaps  the  body  is  not 
placed  directly  before  the  aperture  of  the  slider-holder, 
or  may  not  be  truly  directed  towards  the  light,  &c.  It 
only  remains  for  me  to  observe,  that  the  method  of  using 


188  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

the  instrument  just  described,  is  by  far  the  best  and 
simplest  with  which  I  am  acquainted  for  all  sorts  of 
transparent  objects,  and  should,  therefore,  always  be 
used  when  practicable  ;  and  this  observation  applies  to 
all  sorts  of  microscopes  and  engiseopes.  Occasionally, 
however,  the  weather  is  so  dull  and  gloomy,  that  we  see 
better  by  artificial  light :  I  therefore  now  give  the 

2nd.  Method  of  mounting  for  viewing  transparent  objects 
by  artificial  light. — Setting  out  on  the  supposition  that 
the  instrument  has  been  just  removed  from  its  case,  and 
is  in  the  position  given  in  the  plate,  proceed  as  follows  : — 
Place  it  on  a  table ;  detach  the  bar  from  the  front  leg, 
as  before  ;  move  the  mirror  and  condensing  lens  to  one 
side ;  then  turn  the  bar  round  till  it  assumes  a  hori- 
zontal position,  keeping  the  neck  of  the  ball  at  the  bottom 
of  the  quadrant  slit,  in  the  position  in  which  it  is  repre- 
sented in  the  drawing :  its  rotatory  action  is  the  only  one 
at  present  required.  This  arrangement  will  leave  the 
space,  both  behind  and  before  the  stage,  open  for  the  in- 
troduction of  a  lamp  or  candle,  &c.  The  condensing 
compound  lens,  f,  attached  to  the  body,  together  with  the 
plane-convex  one,  n,  under  the  stage,  and  the  mirror, 
must  remain  inert  and  unemployed,  in  this  as  in  the  pre- 
ceding mode  of  observation,  and  may  be  removed  alto- 
gether. Adjust  the  height  of  the  instrument  to  suit  that 
of  your  light  and  eye,  by  drawing  the  tube  of  the  pillar 
in  or  out :  place  your  light  centrically  behind  the  aper- 
ture of  the  stage,  at  two,  four,  or  six  inches  distant  from 


OBSERVING   AND   MANAGING    ENGISCOPE.  189 

it,  according  to  the  strength  of  the  illumination  required, 
observing  always  to  preserve  a  perfect  round  disk  of 
light  in  your  field  of  view,  and  every  thing  goes  on  as 
before,  the  candle  or  lamp  supplanting  the  day-light. 
You  may,  if  you  please,  tilt  the  instrument  a  little  out  of 
the  horizontal  plane,  for  convenience  of  observation. 

3rd.  Mode  of  mounting  for  viewing  diaphanous  bodies 
by  refected  day-light,  either  in  a  horizontal  or  vertical 
position. — For  the  horizontal  position  every  thing  is  ar- 
ranged in  the  same  way  as  when  artificial  light  is  em- 
ployed ;  only,  now  the  oval  mirror  comes  into  use,  which 
must  be  placed  truly  in  the  axis  of  the  body,  and  of  the 
aperture  in  the  stage.  For  this  purpose,  cause  the  mark 
on  its  split  socket  to  tally  with  the  line  drawn  on  the  bar, 
and  then  clamp  the  split  socket  tight  by  the  screw,  m : 
then,  having  first  removed  your  instrument  out  of  the 
direct  light  proceeding  from  the  window,  by  placing  it 
in  the  middle  of  the  apartment,  proceed  to  reflect  the 
light  given  by  the  said  window  into  the  body  of  your  in- 
strument, as  follows.  I  must  premise  that  it  will  be 
necessary  that  the  engiscope  should  so  present  itself  to- 
wards the  window  that  its  pillar  and  bar  should  not  im- 
pede the  light :  thus,  supposing  the  window  is  on  your 
left  hand,  the  pillar  and  bar  must  be  on  your  right,  and 
vice  versa,  so  that  nothing  shall  be  bettoeen  the  window  and 
the  mirror.  Observe,  that  a  direct  lateral  position  of  the 
window  is  the  most  convenient  and  manageable.  Then, 
by  means  of  the  milled  head,  draw  the  mirror  round  on 


190  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

its  axis,  at  the  bottom  of  the  arm  p3  until  it  fronts  the 
casement;  then  all  that  is  requisite  is,  to  turn  the  milled 
head,  r,  and  along  with  it  the  mirror,  round,  until  its 
light  fills  your  field  of  view  ;  which  will  be  at  an  angle 
of  about  forty-five  degrees,  if  the  window  is  directly  op- 
posite the  mirror,  and  your  bar  parallel  with  it.  You 
may  now,  if  you  please,  use  the  condensing  lens,  n,  but 
I  do  not  recommend  it,  as,  along  with  an  increase  of 
brightness,  it  generates  a  degree  of  confusion  and  nebu- 
losity. If  employed,  see  that  it  is  clamped  tight  into  its 
true  position  on  the  bar.  Like  the  mirror,  it  should  be 
as  close  to  the  stage  as  possible. 

If  you  wish  to  be  exactly  acquainted  with  the  colour  of 
transparent  bodies,  use  the  plaster  of  Paris  side  of  the 
mirror  to  reflect  the  light  of  the  sun,  in  an  apartment 
exposed  to  it.  With  this  intent,  place  the  instrument  on 
a  table  on  which  the  sun  falls,  in  such  a  manner,  how- 
ever, that  it  shall  only  impinge  on  the  plaster,  and  leave 
the  rest  of  the  engiscope  in  shade ;  then  proceed  with  it 
as  if  it  were  day-light.  This,  in  my  opinion,  is  the  only 
way  in  which  the  light  of  the  sun  can  be  employed  with 
advantage  for  illumination,  and  it  brings  out  colours 
with  the  most  perfect  fidelity. 

When  the  instrument  is  used  in  the  vertical  posi- 
tion, it  is,  of  course,  in  the  altitude  represented  in  the 
plate,  and  is  governed  precisely  in  the  manner  just  de- 
scribed. I  do  not  like  this  position  at  all :  it  should,  I 
think,  only  be  used  with  bodies  which  must  be  confined 
to  the  stage  by  their  gravity  alone,  which  case  may  some- 


OBSERVING   AND  MANAGING   ENGISCOPE.  191 

times  occur;  but  I  have  made  most  ample  provision  for 
presenting  all  sorts  of  objects  in  any  position,  without  re- 
gard to  their  gravitation,  by  means  of  the  aquatic  wet  and 
dry  glass  boxes,  and  the  slider-holder,  &c.  I  think  that 
the  practice  of  poring  downwards  (the  ordinary  way  of 
observation  with  microscopists  of  the  old  school,)  is  pe- 
culiarly detrimental  to  the  head  and  eyes,  having  a  great 
tendency  to  determine  the  blood  to  them.  We  never 
hear  of  astronomers,  ivho  are  perpetually  looking  upwards, 
having  their  sight  injured,  like  observers  with  microscopes, 
though  they  have  to  look,  if  possible,  still  more  stead- 
fastly and  intently  than  the  latter,  with  the  highest 
powers.  I  had  nearly  forgot  to  mention  a  circumstance 
very  necessary  to  be  attended  to  in  the  management  of 
the  mirror;  it  is  this, — to  keep  the  milled  head,  r,  inva- 
riably outwards.  It  is  not  made  to  travel  completely 
round,  nor  is  it  necessary ;  for  every  possible  position 
required  for  practical  purposes  can  be  attained  withou  t 
its  traversing  more  than  the  half  of  a  circle,  by  reversing 
the  superior  or  inferior  end  of  the  ellipse,  according  to 
circumstances.  Thus,  supposing  there  were  two  win- 
dows in  an  apartment;  one  on  the  right,  and  the  other 
on  the  left  of  the  instrument,  it  would  command  either, 
without  revolving  on  its  inferior  axis,  merely  by  being 
tilted  on  the  right  or  left  side. 

Way  of  viewing  Crystallizations  of  Salts  and  various 
Chemical  Actions. — Use  the  mounting  (No.  2);  screw  on 
the  lengthening  piece,  "i,  and  attach  the  diagonal   boot 


192  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

(fig.  16)  to  it.  By  means  of  the  wheel  and  endless  screw 
let  down  the  arm  of  the  instrument  till  the  body  shall  be 
considerably  below  the  aperture  of  the  stage ;  then  take 
off  the  lid  of  one  of  the  aquatic  boxes,  and  fix  the  other 
part,  first  warmed  at  the  fire,  upon  the  stage ;  which 
turn  round  on  its  pivot  until  its  surface  with  the  box 
shall  point  downwards ;  then  insert  a  drop  of  the  salt  to 
be  viewed  upon  the  inferior  glass  of  the  box  (now,  by 
virtue  of  its  position,  the  superior  one);  turn  the  boot 
round  on  the  lengthening  piece  until  its  projecting  cone 
shall  look  upwards,  and  adjust  the  focus  by  means  of  the 
wheel  and  endless  screw,  which  noiv  performs  this  office, 
while  the  rack-work  used  under  other  circumstances,  for 
the  same  purpose  now  only  gives  a  traversing  movement. 
Many  chemical  actions,  between  various  bodies,  both 
fluid  and  solid,  may  also  be  viewed  in  this  way.  More- 
over, crystallizations,  &c.  can  be  seen  under  any  of  the 
usual  modes  of  mounting,  by  placing  the  salts  or  other 
bodies,  between  the  glasses  of  the  aquatic  boxes,  with 
the  closed  or  pierced  lids,  as  the  occasion  may  demand  ; 
only,  whenever  there  is  evaporation  or  evolution  of  gas, 
remember  to  employ  the  pierced  lids. 

I  think,  nevertheless,  that  the  best  way  of  viewing  salts 
is  to  use  the  glass  slip,  with  its  frame  (fig.  29),  and 
merely  to  rub  the  liquid  salt  over  its  surface,  allowing  it 
to  drip  a  little  at  an  angle  of  45,  before  it  is  placed  in 
the  slider-holder.  The  glass  must  not  be  ivarmed  in  this 
method;  and  the  salt  must  be  allowed  to  crystallize 
very  slowly,  in  its  own  natural  way.     By  this  process, 


OBSERVING   WITH    AND   MANAGING   KNGISCOPE.        193 

though  somewhat  tedious,  none  but  the  veritable  micro- 
scopic crystals  are  obtained.  Deliquescent  salts,  in  damp 
weather,  can,  however,  hardly  be  brought  to  consolidate 
in  this  way. 

I  hope  the  description  of  the  method  of  management 
is  now  tolerably  complete,  as  concerns  transparent  inani- 
mate objects ;  but  the  method  of  dealing  with  living  ones 
requires  some  illustration. 

4th.  Way  of  Mounting  for  Transparent  Living  Objects. — 
These  are  not  seen  well  by  artificial  light,  as  I  have 
already  observed,  their  internal  machinery  being  more 
or  less  confused  by  it,  whether  its  rays  come  diverging, 
converging  to  a  focus,  or  parallel. 

It  will  be  rather  difficult  to  get  a  power  low  enough, 
with  the  present  instrument,  to  obtain  a  general  view  of 
a  number  of  the  larger  aquatic  larvae  ;  for  I  do  not  think 
the  present  engiscope  will  carry  an  object-glass  of  longer 
focus  than  two  inches ;  which,  with  the  lowest  inverting 
eye-piece,  will  be  fully  twice  too  high — (for,  be  it  ob- 
served, the  lower  the  power  is  the  more  of  an  object  it 
will  include  in  the  field  of  view,  and  the  higher  the  less); 
but,  with  the  erecting  eye-piece  thrust  pretty  far  into 
the  body,  a  power  will  be  obtained  that  will  easily  in- 
clude a  space  of  one  and  a  half,  two,  or  even  three 
inches;  therefore  use  the  erecting  glasses  A,  screwed 
on  to  the  bottom  of  the  internal  tube  of  the  body,  and 
draw  it  in  or  out,  until  it  just  takes  in  the  area  of  your 

o 


194  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

largest  aquatic  live-box,  and  use  the  first  or  third  way  of 
mounting. 

The  method  of  using  the  aquatic  live-box  is  as  follows  :  — 
Take  off  the  lid,  applying  your  finger  to  the  hole  in  it,  or 
stop  it  up,  pro  tempore,  with  a  bit  of  wax ;  then  pour 
in  some  water  to  the  depth  required,  and  insert  your 
larvee,  and  apply  the  inner  part  to  it,  observing  still  to 
keep  the  lid  undermost :  having  slid  it  on  far  enough  to 
keep  the  water  from  escaping,  place  the  box  in  such  a 
position  that  the  hole  in  the  lid  shall  point  upwards ;  then, 
by  squeezing  the  lid  on  further  (having,  of  course,  first 
removed  your  finger  orbit  of  wax  from  the  hole),  you 
may  expel  all  the  air,  and  as  much  of  the  water  as  may 
be  superfluous.  It  is  now  fit  for  use  (for  the  pressure  of 
the  atmosphere  prevents  the  water  from  coming  out  of 
the  hole)  by  being  placed  in  the  aperture  of  the  stage, 
and  turned  one  quarter  round.  A  single  drop  of  water, 
containing  animalcules,  may  be  placed  between  the 
glasses  of  the  smaller  boxes  ;  and,  if  the  tubes  are  made 
air-tight  by  a  little  grease,  and  the  hole  stopped  up,  may 
be  kept  for  wTeeks  together  without  evaporating. 

If  very  delicate  and  exceedingly  transparent  animal- 
cules are  to  be  examined,  use  the  adapter  (fig.  28),  with 
the  smallest  aquatic  live-box  mounted  upon  it,  and  se- 
cured by  the  bayonet-catch  :  let  it  be  placed  between  the 
connecting  cross-bars,  'u  'u,  and  the  superior  plate  of  the 
slider-holder,  which  arrangement  permits  the  adapter 
to  be  moved  about:  screw  the  wheel  of  diaphragms 
(fig.  24)  on  to  the  bottom  of  the  slider-holder,  and  sec 


OBSERVING   WITH    AND  MANAGING  ENGISCOPE.       195 

that  the  body  of  the  engiscope  is  truly  concentric  with 
the  hole  or  diaphragm  ;  otherwise  you  will  have  no  light. 
Recollect,  that  the  body  of  the  instrument  must  now  be 
stationary,  and  that  you  must  move  the  slip  about  with 
your  fingers.  Whenever  the  diaphragms  are  employed,  the 
body  must  be  a  fixture,  or  nearly  so. 

A  very  useful  way  of  observing  aquatic  insects  and 
larvae  is  by  means  of  the  direct  or  diagonal  boot  drawn 
over  the  lengthening  piece,  'i,  of  your  object-glass,  which 
may  then  be  inserted  into  the  reservoir  in  which  they 
are  kept.  The  method  of  mounting  is  as  follows  :  — Un- 
screw the  body  from  the  arm,  iv,  and  attach  fig.  15  or  16 
to  it,  instead  of  its  usual  neck  :  see  that  the  plane-glass  at 
their  ends  is  as  far  removed  from  the  object-glass  as  pos- 
sible {for  the  less  water  you  have  to  look  through  the  more 
distinct  will  be  the  vision) ;  detach  the  stage  from  its  pivot 
by  slackening  the  screw,  I,  and  clamp  it  tight  on  the 
lower  pivot,  i,  having  previously  removed  the  con- 
denser, n,  altogether :  then  place  the  glass  vessel  on  the 
stage,  which  must  be  truly  horizontal,  and  clamped  tight 
by  the  pinching  screw,  I .-  insert  the  body  into  the  reser- 
voir, by  rescrewing  it,  with  its  new  appendage,  on  to  the 
arm,  iv,  again.  If  you  want  to  observe  laterally,  or  to 
take  a  periscopic  view  of  the  contents  of  the  vessel,  use 
the  diagonal  boot  in  place  of  the  direct  one  ;  and,  by 
turning  it  round  on  the  lengthening  piece,  any  object 
situated  on  the  sides  of  the  vessel,  such  as  polypi  or  vor- 
ticelhe,  may  be  observed  without  disturbing  them.  The 
object-glasses   apply  either  to  the  ordinary  neck  of  the 


196  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

body,  or  to  the  lengthening  piece  over  which  the  boots 
slide.  Dissections  may  frequently  be  carried  on  under 
the  surface  of  fluids  by  means  of  these  boots,  with  great 
effect,  which  can  hardly  be  accomplished  in  the  common 
way. 

Whenever  the  instrument  is  in  a  vertical  position  (as  will, 
of  course,  be  the  case  in  the  present  instance,)  or  when  it 
is  not  far  off"  from  it,  the  lever  y  may  be  used  with  great 
advantage.  In  observing  live  subjects  it  is  peculiarly  use- 
ful, for  it  enables  us  to  follow  their  movements  much  more 
rapidly  than  can  be  done  by  means  of  the  wheel  and  end- 
less screw ;  and  the  double  motion  of  the  arm  being,  by  its 
assistance,  governed  entirely  by  one  hand,  the  other  is  left 
at  liberty  to  adjust  the  focus  (which  is,  of  course,  perpe- 
tually changing,  according  to  the  motion  of  the  insects 
observed)  ;  it  is  attached  to  the  pinion  on  either  side  of 
the  rack-work,  according  to  circumstances,  by  being 
pushed  on  the  square  projecting  pin.  The  wheel  must 
then  be  detached  from  the  endless  screw,  by  slackening 
the  clamping  screw,  'b,  and  drawing  the  piece  which 
carries  the  said  endless  screw  backwards  away  from  the 
wheel,  causing  it  to  traverse  over  a  portion  of  the  arc 
which  it  forms  on  its  pivot,  and  fixing  it  afresh,  so  that 
it  shall  not  catch  the  teeth  of  the  wheel :  the  arm  then 
moves  freely  round  on  the  top  of  the  bar,  and  is  subservient 
to  the  action  of  the  lever,  the  milled  head  of  which  operates 
upon  the  pinion  in  place  of  the  ordinary  one,  and  is 
governed  by  the  thumb  and  index. finger ;  while  the  others 


OBSERVING   WITH    AND    MANAGING   KNGISCOVE.        197 

act  upon  its  extremity,  and  give  the  rotatory  movement 
which  was  before  performed  by  the  wheel,  &c.  More- 
over, whenever  the  lengthening  piece  is  in  use  for  trans- 
parent objects  not  contained  in  fluids,  the  shade  (fig.  18) 
may  be  employed.  It  slides  down  completely  over  the 
object  observed,  and  guards  it  effectually  from  all  rays  of 
light  not  transmitted  through  it,  so  that  it  is  observed  purely 
as  a  diaphanous  body,  and  not  partially  also  as  an  opaque 
one  (as  is  frequently  the  case  with  transparent  objects 
treated  in  the  common  way).  This  piece  of  apparatus  is 
of  much  use  in  verification. 

The  stage  may,  moreover,  be  removed  altogether;  and 
the  bar  being  in  the  horizontal  position,  the  vase  may  be 
placed  on  a  proper  support  in  its  stead,  and  observed 
from  without  as  well  as  from  within. 

5th.    Method  of  mounting   the   Diamond  and  Sapphire 
Microscopes  for  Transparent  Objects. — When  the  use  of 
the  engiscopic   part  of  the   instrument    is    thoroughly 
attained,  nothing  can  be  more  easy  than  the  management 
of  these.     All   that  is  requisite  is   to  unscrew  the  body 
from  the  arm  ;  and  by  detaching  the  teeth  of  the  wheel 
from  the  endless  screw,  according  to  the  directions  already 
given,   to  reverse  the  ends  of  the  arm,  so  that  the  micro- 
scope shall  come  into  play  ;  whent  he  rotatory  movement 
must  be  again  secured,  by  bringing  the  endless  screw  in 
contact  with  the  wheel,  and  clamping  it  tight :  thus  the 
instrument  becomes  converted  into  a  simple  microscope 
of  the   first  quality,  which   is   to  be  used  exactly  as   the 


198  microscopic  illustrations. 

engiscope  was :  I  can  give  no  better  directions  concerning 
it.  The  sapphire  and  diamond  lenses  have  their  own 
peculiar  settings  in  a  species  of  dish  or  cup,  which  is 
attached  to  the  arm  by  being*  thrust  into  the  hole  at  its 
extremity.  The  superior  cohesion  of  the  precious  stones 
admits  of  their  being  burnished  into  a  cell,  which  is  again 
fixed  into  the  setting.  This  arrangement  allows  the 
lenses  to  be  shifted  about  without  difficulty,  or  risk  of 
losing  them.  If  they  are  plano-convex,  as  they  should 
be,  another  advantage  results,  which  is,  that  they  may 
be  used  either  with  their  flat  or  convex  side  towards  the 
object,  according  as  great  distinctness,  or  a  large  field  of 
view,  may  be  required  (for  you  cannot  have  these  quali- 
ties combined).  Remember,  therefore,  if  you  want  a 
large  field  of  view,  and  do  not,  at  the  same  time,  require  a 
large  aperture,  united  with  great  distinctness,  to  place  the 
lens  with  its  flat  side  next  the  eye.  If,  on  the  contrary,  you 
must  have  a  very  large  aperture,  conjoined  with  the  utmost 
possible  degree  of  distinctness,  then  place  the  convex  side 
next  your  eye.  The  aplanatic  lenses  should  also  have  set- 
tings on  which  they  can  be  screwed  at  pleasure,  to  be  used 
as  simple  microscopes.  If,  at  any  time,  when  bodies  are 
merely  laid  upon  the  stage,  and  confined  to  it  only  by  their 
gravity  (the  stand  being  used  vertically,  as  in  dissections, 
for  example),  the  face  should  come  into  too  close  contact 
with  the  stage,  the  apparatus  (fig.  21)  must  be  used, 
which  is  inserted  into  the  aperture,  like  the  live-boxes  and 
slider-holder  :  the  object  being  laid  upon  it,  due  space  will 
be  afforded  for  the  nose,  and  the  breath  will  be  less  likely 


OBSERVING  WITH   AND   MANAGING   ENGISCOPE.       199 

to  steam  the  lenses.  The  arm,  w,  is  made  to  turn  round 
in  any  position  most  convenient  to  the  observer.  The 
adapter  (fig-.  28),  which  is  to  be  used  between  the  bars  of 
the  slider-holder,  to  carry  a  small  aquatic  live-box,  or  the 
like,  affords  another  species  of  convenience  of  a  similar 
nature,  and  serves  to  elevate  the  face  of  the  observer 
above  the  stage. 

Opaque  Objects. — Opaque  objects  seldom  require  such 
high  powers,  or  such  large  apertures,  as  transparent  ones. 
Their  colours  are  best  brought  out  by  daylight,  natural 
or  condensed ;  but  artificial  light,  perhaps,  shews  them 
best  in  all  other  respects. 

They  should  always  be  viewed  upon  a  black  ground  of 
some  description.  The  more  sombre,  and  dingy,  and 
faint,  their  tints  are,  the  greater  need  there  is  of  a  black 
ground  to  stifle  all  heterogeneous  light. 

As  they  only  reflect  or  radiate  light,  a  much  stronger 
illumination  is  requisite  for  them  than  for  diaphanous 
bodies,  which  almost  always  transmit  a  great  deal  more 
light  than  opaque  ones  are  capable  of  reflecting.  More- 
over, they  seldom  present  flat  surfaces,  as  most  pellucid 
bodies  can  be  made  to  do.  This,  when  the  power  is  con- 
siderable, causes  one  part  of  the  object  to  be  indistinct, 
while  another  is  seen  accurately  :  this  must  always  be 
allowed  for.  A  very  perfect1  instrument  can  only  have 
one  point  in  focus  at  once,  and,  consequently,  can  only 
shew  one  point  distinctly  at  once,  all  the  rest  not  on  the 
plane  of  the  focus  being  confused. 


200  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

The  direct  light  of  the  sun  is  utterly  improper  for 
exhibiting-  opaque  bodies,  being  polarized  and  decom- 
posed by  them,  so  as  to  give  rise  to  all  sorts  of  optical 
deceptions  :  neither  can  it  be  modified  or  dulled  by 
refraction  through  rubbed  glass,  or  any  sort  of  semi- 
pellucid  substances,  and  thus  rendered  fit  for  use  :  by 
reflection  from  white  toipolished  surfaces  it  may,  but  it  is 
then  no  stronger  than  the  light  of  the  atmosphere. 

6th.  Method  of  observing  Opaque  Objects  by  Day-light, 
plain  or  condensed. — Employ  the  mounting  (No.  2)  recom- 
mended for  transparent  objects  by  artificial  light. 

If  your  object  is  contained  in  a  slider,  insert  it  into  the 
holder  in  the  usual  manner :  turn  your  back  diagonally 
towards  the  window,  and  place  the  engiscope  on  a  table, 
in  a  convenient  position  for  observation  in  that  direction, 
so  that  the  light  of  the  window  may  fall  full  upon  your 
object,  without  being  intercepted  by  your  head :  the 
nearer  you  are  to  the  window  the  better,  provided  its 
direct  light  does  not  get  into  your  eyes.  You  then  pro- 
ceed to  the  adjustment  of  the  focus,  &c.  as  before  de- 
scribed. If  your  power  is  considerable,  or  the  day  dull, 
you  will  require  a  condensed  light :  to  obtain  it,  attach 
the  condenser,  '/*,  to  the  neck  of  the  body,  by  means  of 
its  clamping  screw  and  split  socket,  'g ;  unscrew  the 
double  convex  lens  from  the  other,  and  remember  to  use 
only  the  piano- convex,  with  its  plane  side  presented 
towards  the  light,  and  its  convex  side  towards  the  object  : 
slide  it  up  or  down  upon  the  neck  of  the  body;  and  adjust, 


OBSERVING    WITH    AND   MANAGING   KNGISCOPK.        201 

also,  by  the  help  of  the  joint,  v,  until  you  get  a  good 
spectrum  of  light  upon  your  slider.  (It  will  be  well,  in 
the  first  instance,  to  form  an  image  of  the  window  upon 
your  object,  and  then  to  push  the  illumination  a  little 
closer  to  it,  so  as  to  obliterate  the  image.)  You  will  in 
this  way  get  the  maximum  of  brightness  : — The  crown  of 
the  convex  side  of  the  bull's  eye,  or  condenser,  when 
properly  adjusted,  will  be  about  an  inch,  or  an  inch  and 
a  quarter,  from  the  object. 

If  you  think  it  more  commodious,  you  may  attach  the 
condenser  to  the  stage,  instead  of  the  body — (only,  in  this 
case,  if  you  move  the  optical  part,  you  will  lose  your 
light).  To  effect  this,  remove  the  setting  of  the  lens 
altogether  from  the  split  socket,  by  unscrewing  the 
joint,  v,  and  fix  it  afresh,  by  means  of  its  screw,  into  the 
square  bar,  fig.  14,  which  insert  into  the  square  hole  in 
the  stage.  The  adjustment  is  effected  now  by  pushing 
the  illuminator  up  and  down  in  the  stage,  combined  with 
the  motion  of  its  joint,  r,  as  before.  I  think,  however,  it 
will  be  found  advisable  only  to  attach  the  condenser  to 
the  stage  ivhen  artificial  light  is  employed ;  for,  in  this  latter 
case,  the  weight  of  an  additional  lens  is  applied  to  the 
condenser,  which  might  overload  the  body,  if  depen- 
dent from  it. 

If  you  wish  to  view  opaque  terrestrial  living  objects, 
put  them  into  the  suitable  live-boxes,  with  the  pierced 
covers,  to  admit  air.  These  said  boxes,  with  one  or  the 
other  of  their  lids,  may  be  used  to  hold  nearly  any 
object. 


202  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

7th.  Method  of  observing  Opaque  Objects   by  Artificial 
Light,   either  plain,  condensed,  or  reverberated,   by  Silver 
Cups. — Use  the  mounting   (No.  2),  as  before:  close  the 
shutters  of  your  apartment,  if  you  mean  to  observe  in  this 
way  in  the  day-time  :  procure  a  telescope  candlestick,  or 
one  which  has  an  arm  moving  up  and  down  upon  a  bar, 
so  that  it  can  be  adjusted  to  any  height  as  a  candle  burns 
down — (the  sliding-tube  of  the  pillar  will,  in  some  mea- 
sure, serve  this  purpose,  if  you  have  not  a  proper  candle- 
stick), and  get  a  wax  taper,  or,  what  is  better,  a  piece  of 
old  rushlight,  to  afford   your  illumination.     Don't  laugh  ! 
but  do  as  I  bid  you  :  and,  moreover,  a  pair  of  scissars,  to 
trim  it.     A  piece  of  rushlight  (please  your  worship)  well 
trimmed,  gives  a  remarkably  steady  light,  without  flaring 
or  flickering ,  and  is  just  as  intense  as  that  afforded  by  oil, 
or  tallow,  or  gas  itself,  burnt   in  any  other  way.     The 
intensity  of  the  light  is  the  thing  wanted,  not  the  quantity. 
Perhaps  a  wax  rushlight  might  be  an  improvement.  Now 
this  rushlight,  adjusted- to  the  proper   height,  is  to  be 
placed  before  your  stage,  and  as  near  to  your  object  and 
object-glass  as  may  be,  without  burning  them  :  but  you 
must  take  especial  care  that  its  direct  light  does  not  get 
into  the  body  of  the  engiscope,  or  it  will  utterly  destroy 
all  distinct  vision  :   on  this  account  it  must  be  always 
placed  a  little  on  one  side  of  the  objective  :  and  if  the 
focus  of  the    said  object-glass  is  longer  than   half  an 
inch,    it    will    be   highly   advisable    to  use    a    conical 
shade  (fig.  19),  drawn  over  it,  reaching  almost  to  the 
object   itself;    which   will,  moreover,   always   be   some 


OBSERVING   WITH  AND   MANAGING   ENOISCOPE.      203 

security  against  burning  it,  or  injuring  the  object- 
glass  itself.  The  object,  if  below  a  certain  size,  will 
of  course  be  seen  upon  a  ground  of  some  sort,  and  this 
must  be  a  black  one:  if  on  a  slider,  it  must  be  gummed 
upon  black  paper  ;  or,  if  mounted  upon  a  cork  cylinder, 
having  a  pin  thrust  through  it,  the  surface  of  the  cylinder 
must  be  blacked  with  lampblack  and  glue,  before  the 
object  is  applied  to  it :  but  if  it  is  of  a  nature  to  be  held 
by  the  nippers,  Mr.  Lister's  black  ground  (fig.  22)  must 
be  employed  to  bring  it  out  in  true  relief;  for  it  is  far 
blacker  than  any  other,  and  stifles  all  heterogeneous 
light  much  more  perfectly.  This  is  attached  to  the 
stage  in  the  same  way  as  the  live-box  or  slider-holder  ; 
and  is,  in  fact,  the  same  piece  of  apparatus  which  con- 
stitutes the  false  stage  for  the  simple  microscopes,  and 
for  dissecting  ;  with  the  top  and  bottom,  'u,  'p,  applied 
in  their  proper  places,  to  close  it  up.  In  the  present 
case,  its  dark  abyss  is  to  form  the  ground  against  which 
the  object  is  examined.  At  the  other  end  of  the  needle 
is  a  piece  of  cork,  contained  in  a  bit  of  brass  tube.  This 
is  to  receive  the  pin  by  which  insects  are  retained  in 
their  drawers  in  entomological  cabinets,  which  can  thus 
be  taken  out  and  examined  without  injury ;  more  espe- 
cially if  the  pins  have  been  thrust  through  them  diago- 
nally, which  is  a  great  convenience  when  applied  to  the 
microscopes,  as  it  allows  their  backs  and  bellies  to  be 
freely  presented  to  the  action  of  the  object-glass.  The 
nippers,  seen  of  their  natural  size  at  fig.  23,  are  drilled 
through  at  .9,  so  as  to  lay  hold  of  the  head  of  a  pin,  and 


204  MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS. 

retain  it  firmly,  so  that  it  can  be  twisted  about  in  any 
direction,  without  risk  of  detaching-  it.  This  will  be 
found  a  most  useful  contrivance  for  holding  the  cork 
cylinders,  and  all  objects  ivhat soever  mounted  on  pins. 
The  swivel  which  carries  the  nippers,  &c.  is  thrust  into 
the  arm,  and  in  that  manner  used,  as  shewn  in  the  plate. 

The  mode  of  observation  by  plain  artificial  light 
corresponds  with  that  by  plain  daylight.  It  is  one  of 
the  simplest  and  best  ways  of  viewing  opaque  objects  ; 
and  the  contrast  of  the  strong  divergent  lights  and 
shadows  cast  by  the  rushlight,  brings  out,  and  enables 
us  to  comprehend,  the  forcshortenings  and  perspective 
of  the  complicated  details  frequent  in  irregular  opaque 
subjects,  and  thus  to  verify  their  true  nature,  construc- 
tion, and  relative  position,  much  better  than,  I  think, 
any  other  sort  of  illumination. 

Never  forget  that,  when  observing  with  the  candle 
before  the  stage,  you  must  hold  your  breath,  or  have  a 
handkerchief  tied  over  your  mouth  :  a  single  puff  is  all 
that  is  necessary  to  cause  the  flame  of  the  light  to  play 
over  the  object  and  destroy  it  (and  thus  in  fits  of  absence 
have  I  destroyed  many  valuable  ones).  What  renders  a 
rushlight  so  useful  is,  that  it  will  not,  of  itself,  flare  over 
your  object  :  it  can,  moreover,  on  account  of  its  small- 
ness,  be  got  closer  to  an  object  with  impunity  than  any 
other  artificial  light ;  and  thus,  in  fact,  gives  the  most 
intense  sort  of  plain  illumination  ;  for  the  intensity  of 
light  decreases  according  to  the  square  of  its  distance 
from  the  object. 


OBSERVING   WITH  AND   MANAGING  JSNGISCOPE.      205 

When  observing  faint,  sombre,  and  dull  opaque  ob- 
jects, especially  if  high  powers  are  used,  a  vast  increment 
of  apparent  brightness  is  obtained,  if  all  light  is  excluded 
from  the  eye,  save  that  of  the  visual  pencil.  Thus,  it 
will  be  found  a  great  assistance  if  a  large  blackened 
pasteboard  shade,  nearly  a  foot  in  diameter,  is  made  to 
fasten  upon  the  eye-piece,  and  thus  completely  to  ex- 
clude the  direct  light  of  the  candle,  &c. ;  or  still  better, 
if  a  black  hood,  like  those  used  by  astronomers,  is  made 
to  cover  up  the  face  completely,  but  with  an  aperture  for 
the  body  of  the  instrument.  Such  an  arrangement  also 
saves  us  the  trouble  of  shutting  one  eye;  and  the  en- 
largement produced  in  the  aperture  of  the  iris,  by  keep- 
ing the  eyes  in  the  dark,  enables  the  faintest  rays  to 
affect  the  retina. 

Condensed  Artificial  Light  is  procured  by  the  action 
of  the  double  illuminator,  'f;  whenever  it  is  used  by 
lamp  or  candle-light,  the  double  convex  must  be  screwed 
on,  still  preserving  the  convex  side  of  the  piano,  or  bull's 
eye,  next  the  object.  The  split  socket  must  be  clamped 
tight  in  such  a  position  on  the  neck  of  the  body,  that  it 
shall  present  the  face  of  the  illuminator  in  a  lateral 
position  relative  to  it,  so  that  the  rays  of  the  candle,  &c. 
shall  fall  conveniently  upon  it  ;  its  distance  from  which 
should  be  about  an  inch  and  a  half,  and  its  distance  from 
the  object  should  also  be  about  an  inch,  which  will  give 
the  maximum  of  illumination,  with  a  large  spectrum,  so 
as   to   illume   a  considerable  space.     I  think,  whenever 


206  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

this  condenser  is  used,  the  flame  of  an  Argand  lamp 
should  be  employed,  shaded,  however,  by  an  external 
copper  tube,  with  an  aperture  in  its  inferior  part  just 
large  enough  to  expose  the  flame,  placed  over  the  usual 
glass  one.  This  will  give  increased  effect  and  splendour 
to  the  object,  by  preserving  the  apartment  in  gloom,  and 
thus  allowing  the  iris  to  expand  itself. 

I  do  not  think  a  more  intense  light  is  got  with  an 
Argand  lamp  than  with  a  rushlight,  but  certainly  a 
far  greater  quantity  of  it. 

Silver  Cups,  or  Specula,  afford  a  very  brilliant  and 
intense  light,  almost  ivithout  shadow,  because  it  plays 
vertically  upon  the  summit  of  an  object,  like  the  sun  of 
tropical  climates.  This  is  the  only  species  of  illumination 
which  will  bring  out  many  opaque  objects  properly  (a 
fly's  foot,  or  human  hair,  for  example) ;  but  for  others, 
requiring  shade  for  their  verification,  it  is  altogether 
improper.  (The  markings  on  the  scales  of  butterflies, 
&c.  are  a  good  illustration  of  this  position.) 

Each  object-glass  must  have  a  cup  attached  to  it  ca- 
pable of  adjustment,  by  being  moved  up  and  down  upon 
the  tube  in  which  the  object-glass  is  set,  so  as  to  cause  the 
focus  of  the  latter  to  coincide  with  that  of  the  cup,  (the 
maximum  of  brightness  cannot  otherwise  be  easily 
attained) .  The  object  must  alivays  be  held  by  the  nippers 
or  mounted  on  a  cork  cylinder,  when  it  is  to  be  illuminated 
by  cups  :  when  the  nippers  only  are  employed,  the  disk, 
7,   must  be  placed  between  them  and  the  illuminating 


OBSERVING   WITH   AND   MANAGING    ENGISCOPK.      20/ 

lens,  &c.  so  as  to  prevent  any  false  light  from  getting 
into  the  ohject-glass,  and  also  to  furnish  a  black  ground. 

Remove  the  bottom  of  the  black  box,  'p,  and  fix  the 
condenser,  n,  in  such  a  position,  by  means  of  its  tight- 
ening screw,  that  its  convexity  shall  be  inserted  into  the 
bottom  of  the  said  black  box,  which  will  be  found  its 
best  position  either  for  day-light  or  candle-light.  The 
cngiscope  must  then  be  placed  on  the  tripod- stand 
mounting,  No.  1,  and  directed  against  the  sky,  (the 
best  way,  perhaps,  of  using  the  cups,  with  da;/- light), 
or  it  may  be  used  in  an  horizontal  or  vertical  position, 
and  the  light  reflected  by  the  oval  mirror;  but  when 
artificial  light  is  preferred,  use  the  mounting  No.  2, 
and  place  an  Argand  lamp  about  an  inch  and  a  half 
from  the  condenser,  n,  taking  care  that  its  flame  is  con- 
centric with  it,  and  a  most  intense  illumination  will  be 
procured,  even  with  powers  equal  to  the  l-60th  of  an 
inch  focus.  Cups,  when  properly  managed,  give  a 
brighter  light  than  can  be  procured  by  any  other 
means.  They  may  be  used  without  the  assistance  of 
the  condenser,  but,  of  course,  in  this  way  give  a  much 
more  feeble  light. 

Please  to  remember  that  the  condenser  under  the 
stage,  and  that  represented  attached  to  the  body,  are 
expressly  and  exclusively  devoted  to  opaque  objects. 

8th.  Mounting  for  Dissections,  §c. — Dissections  are  ge- 
nerally performed  on  opaque  subjects,  though  it  may  be 
sometimes  necessary    to  dissect   transparent   ones  also. 


208  MICROSCOPIC  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

The  erecting  eye- piece  must,  of  course,  always  be  em- 
ployed, by  sliding  it  up  and  down  in  the  body ;  with 
various  objectives  the  power  may  be  made  gradually  to 
advance  from  a  mere  nothing-  up  to  the  l-20th  of  an  inch 
(which  I  conceive  to  be  the  utmost  which  can  be  used), 
and  still  allow  sufficient  space  between  the  object  and 
the  object-glass  for  the  anatomist  to  manage  his  imple- 
ments, and  to  procure  the  necessary  illumination. 

Mount  the  engiscope  in  the  vertical  position,  and  see 
that  the  bar  is  locked  fast  in  its  front  leg,  to  give  the 
utmost  degree  of  stability  ;  place  it  on  the  tripod  stool, 
before  recommended,  with  the  front  of  the  stage  before 
you,  and  the  pillar  next  to  the  window — (a  diagonal  po- 
sition for  yourself  and  the  instrument  relative  to  it,  will 
be  most  convenient,  to  allow  the  light  to  fall  freely  on 
your  subject.)  Use  the  single  condenser,  n,  to  furnish 
your  light,  if  necessary ;  it  may  be  moved  round  the 
neck  of  the  body,  to  suit  your  convenience.  You  may 
also  employ  the  lengthening  piece,'/,  if  you  please,  which 
will  allow  you  to  fix  the  stage  on  the  pivot  and  sliding 
socket,  i,  and  give  a  lower  position  for  it.  If  you  use  the 
latter,  see  that  it  is  clamped  very  fast,  that  it  may  not 
give  way  with  the  weight  of  your  hands. 

If  you  do  not  find  it  advisable  to  employ  the  false  stage, 
fig.  22,  which  procures  a  separate  rest  for  the  little 
fingers,  while  the  thumb  and  index  finger  operate,  drop 
the  piece,  fig.  27,  into  the  aperture  of  the  stage,  and  fix 
it  by  turning  it  one  quarter  round.  Then  place  the 
piece  of  cork  or  wood,  he.  on  which  you  dissect  in  the 


OBSERVING  WITH    AND   MANAGING    ENCISCOPE.       209 

smaller  aperture  of  this,  and  proceed.  I  should  recom- 
mend you  to  get  the  leaves  of  two  Pembroke  or  other 
tables  placed  on  each  side  of  you,  to  rest  your  elbows 
upon  at  pleasure,  and  likewise  to  procure  several  pieces 
of  board,  about  one  and  a  half  inch  thick,  to  place  under 
the  instrument,  to  depress  or  elevate  it  without  the  help 
of  the  slide  in  the  pillar  (which,  when  called  into  effect, 
always  unlocks  the  bar.) 

Your  operations  can  always  be  carried  on  under  the 
surface  of  liquids,  by  the  help  of  the  direct  or  diagonal 
boots. 

When  you  wish  to  get  at  the  side  of  your  subject  with 
out  disturbing  its  surface,  mount  in  the  position,  No.  2, 
and  turn  your  stage  round  on  the  pivot,  i,  until  it  comes 
to  be  in  the  plane  of  the  bar  :  every  lateral  view  can  then 
be  obtained  at  pleasure,  by  turning  the  object  round, 
and  you  can  operate  in  this  position  as  well  as  in  the  ver- 
tical one.  You  may  also,  by  help  of  the  ball  and  socket, 
tilt  the  body  at  any  required  angle,  and  still  adjust  the 
stage  to  the  horizontal  position,  as  before,  taking  care  to 
pinch  it  fast  by  means  of  the  screw,  I,  before  you  begin 
to  work  again. 

There  are  no  tools  for  dissection  equal  to  very  fine 
scissars, — they  always  cut  without  dragging  or  tearing , 
there  is,  however,  the  greatest  difficulty  in  procuring 
them.  The  Sheffield  workmen  are  the  oidy  ones  capable 
of  making  them  sufficiently  delicate.  Miniature  scissars 
have  been  made  only  half  an  inch  in  length  quite  perfect  J 
now,  a  pair  constructed  with   blades  like  these,  but  in 


210  MICROSCOPIC    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

other  respects  like  those  for  some  operations  on  the  eyes, 
(i.  e.  without  bows),  having  one  arm  inserted  in  a  long 
handle,  and  the  other  left  short,  playing  against  a  feeble 
spring  to  keep  it  open,  is  the  sort  of  tool  required.  It  is 
held  like  a  pin,  and  cuts  by  the  pressure  of  the  index 
finger  on  the  short  arm.  You  may,  of  course,  dissect 
with  simple  microscopes  of  loiv  powers  as  well  as  with  the 
engiscope,  but  the  present  stand  is  not  so  well  adapted 
for  them  as  a  separate  one  would  be. 

9th.  Mounting  the  Diamond  and  Sapphire  Microscopes 
for  opaque  objects. — It  is  one  of  the  vices  of  simple  mi- 
croscopes that  they  can  only  shew  opaque  objects  with 
cups — at  least  if  their  powers  exceed  one  quarter  of  an 
inch.  The  lower  foci  shew  opaque  objects  admirably 
with  day- light,  the  stand  being  in  the  vertical  position. 
When  used  for  plain  day-light  in  a  horizontal  one,  all 
that  is  necessary  is  to  assume  such  an  attitude  relative  to 
the  window  that  the  head  shall  not  intercept  its  light. 
For  example,  if  you  sit  with  the  bar  horizontal  and  pa- 
rallel with  the  window,  the  light  will  naturally  fall  be- 
tween the  stage  and  the  magnifier  upon  the  object.  When 
cups  are  employed,  they  act  precisely  like  those  attached 
to  the  engiscope,  and  magnifiers  thus  mounted  are 
managed  in  the  same  way. 

10th.  The  Amician  Catadioptric  Engiscope  is  attached 
to  the  present  stand  by  means  of  the  arm,  fig.  20,  and  is 
managed  precisely  on  the  same  principle  as  the  refracting 


OBSERVING    WITH    AND   MANAGING   ENGISCOPK.       211 

aplanatics.  The  body  turns  round  upon  a  swivel,  by 
means  of  the  pinching  screw,  to  suit  the  convenience  of 
the  observer ;  and  the  only  real  peculiarity  in  observing 
with  the  reflecting  engiscope  is,  that  the  optical  part  is 
always  at  right  atigles  to  that  of  the  refracting  one  in  any 
given  mode  of  mounting  or  observation — just  as  the  eye- 
tube  of  the  Newtonian  telescope  is  relatively  to  that  of  a 
refractor,  cat  eris  paribus ;  but  this  instrument,  as  well  as 
the  simple  and  compound  microscopes,  are  probably  best 
on  their  appropriate  stands,  of  which  full  and  particular 
descriptions  will  be  given  hereafter*.  It  is  only  for  the 
sake  of  those  who  should  like  to  have  the  three  instru- 
ments jumbled  together,  that  they  are  adapted  to  the 
same  stand  in  the  present  case. 

Courteous  reader,  I  have  endeavoured  to  supply  the 
place  of  a  viva  voce  lecture  on  the  instrument,  and  to  in- 
fuse into  thee  such  knowledge  as  I  possess,  touching 
the  management  of  the  aplanatic  engiscope,  &c.  The 
directions  given  will,  I  hope,  be  found  more  explicit, 
clear,  and  intelligible,  as  well  as  more  full,  particu- 
lar, and  diffuse,  than  any  others  hitherto  given  in  print. 
Vale  ant  quantum  valere  possunt.  By  their  assistance  thou 
shalt  be  enabled  to  enter  into  a  course  of  researches  very 
nearly  as  profitable  to  thyself  and  fellow  creatures  as  if 
thou  wert  engaged  in  the  sublime  and  important  occu- 
pation of  determining  whether  the  small  star  of  e  Bootis, 
is  of  a  greenish  blue,  or  bluish  green  ;  or  whether  some 
nebula  is  very  gradually  or  very  suddenly  much  brighter 
in  the  middle. 

*  Vide  Micrographia,  chap.  i. 


APPENDIX. 


No.  1. 


On  the  Optical  Phenomena  of  certain  Crystals. 
By  H.  F.  TALBOT,  Esq.  F.R.S.* 


Some  time  ago  I  had  the  honour  to  communicate  to  the 
Royal  Society  an  account  of  my  invention  of  the  pola- 
rizing microscope.  This  instrument  possesses  so  great 
a  power  of  developing  the  internal  structure  of  trans- 
parent bodies,  even  in  their  minutest  visible  particles, 
that  I  feel  confident  the  employment  of  it  will  lead  to 
many  new  and  interesting  results.  At  present  I  mean 
to  confine  myself  to  the  description  of  a  phenomenon 
which  shews  strikingly  the  beautiful  order  and  regula- 
rity with  which  nature  disposes  the  fabric  of  some  of  her 
minutest  visible  works. 

The  object  I  speak  of  is  a  kind  of  minute  crystalliza- 
tion which  may  be  obtained  in  peculiar  circumstances, 
and  I  doubt  not  in  many  different  ways ;  but  the  manner 
in  which  it  has  presented  itself  to  my  observation  is  as 
follows  : — 

A  crystal  of  borax  is  placed  in  a  drop  of  phosphoric 

•  From  Phil.  Trans.  Part  I.  for  IE37. 


214 


APPENDIX. 


acid,  somewhat  diluted,   upon  a   plate  of  glass,  and  then 
moderately  heated  until  the  crystal  dissolves  in  the  acid. 
It  is  then  set  aside  to  crystallize.     It  is  well  to  prepare 
a   number  of  these  plates  at  once,  varying  the  relative 
proportion  of  the  acid  and  salt,  in  order  that  the  desired 
kind  of  crystallization  may  be  found  in  one  or  other  of 
them;  for  there  is  a  considerable  variety  in  the  crystal- 
line forms  obtained  by  this  method,  some  of  which  indeed 
are  very  singular-     But  when  that  kind  of  crystallization 
takes  place  which  it  is  more  particularly  my  intention  to 
speak  of,  the  field  of  view  of  the  microscope   is  seen 
covered  with  minute  circular  spots,  each  of  which  is  like 
a  tuft  of  silk  radiating   from  a  centre,  and  is  composed 
of  a  close  assemblage  of  delicate  acicular  crystals  forming 
a  star.     But  besides  these,  are  seen  interspersed  among 
them  a  number  of  circular  transparent  bodies,  which  are 
evidently  modifications  of  the  former,  being,  in  fact,  tufts 
or  stars  of  acicular  crystals,  in  such  close  assemblage  as  to 
be  in  optical  contact  with  each  other,  and  to  produce  the 
appearance  of  a  single  individual.     Now  let  us  suppose 
a  group  of  these  circles  to  be  under  examination  with  the 
polarizing  microscope,    and    when   the    polarizers    are 
crossed    we  observe  the   following  phenomenon  : — The 
field  of  view  being  dark,  the  little  circles  become  lumi- 
nous, and  we  see  upon  each  of  them  a  well  defined  and 
dark  cross,  dividing  the  crystal  into  four  equal  parts. 
All  these  crosses  are  placed  similarly,  and  are  parallel  to 
each  other,  and  their  direction  remains  unaltered  when 
the   crystals   arc   turned  round  in  their  own  plane   by 


ON  THE   OPTICAL  PHENOMENA  OF  CRYSTALS.  215 

revolving  the  plate  of  glass  upon  which  they  stand.  This 
beautiful  appearance  can  be  seen  with  a  moderate  mag- 
nifying power.  I  measured  the  diameter  of  some  of  the 
larger  crystals,  which  I  found  to  be  from  1 -300th  to 
1 -600th  of  an  inch.  But  there  are  many  much  smaller, 
and  indeed  they  may  be  seen  decreasing  in  size,  until 
nothing  remains  visible  of  their  structure  but  the  four 
luminous  quadrants,  appearing  like  four  minute  dots  of 
coloured  light  placed  close  together. 

I  proceeded  to  examine  the  circles  with  a  high  magni- 
fying power,  and  under  favourable  circumstances  of  illu- 
mination, and  I  observed  in  them  a  very  admirable 
structure. 

Each  circle  has  upon  it  one  or  more  coloured  rings 
arranged  concentrically,  but  the  number  as  well  as  the 
colour  of  these  rings  is  different  in  different  individuals. 

The  innermost  ring  is  deeply  coloured  or  black,  and 
incloses  a  central  space  of  white  light,  which  is  traversed 
by  the  arms  of  the  cross  intersecting  in  the  centre.  This 
part  of  the  cross,  which  stands  within  the  innermost  ring, 
is  beautifully  well  defined,  and  perfectly  black.  The 
general  appearance  resembles  the  figure  98,  in  Brewster's 
Optics,  which  is  a  representation  of  the  rings  seen  in 
uniaxal  crystals.  It  especially  resembles  it  in  the  circum- 
stance above  mentioned,  viz.  the  more  defined  outline 
of  the  part  of  the  cross  which  is  within  the  innermost 
ring. 

We  have  hitherto  supposed  the  polarizers  to  be  crossed; 
but  if  we   place  them  in  a  parallel  position  we   shall  sec 


216  APPENDIX. 

a  phenomenon  complementary  to  the  above.  The  circle 
now  presents  four  patches  of  coloured  light,  one  in  each 
quadrant ;  and  we  generally  see  near  the  centre  four 
black  or  obscure  spots,  which  correspond  to  the  arms  of 
the  cross  in  the  other  position. 

Such  is  an  outline  of  the  microscopic  appearances 
presented  by  these  little  crystals,  which  are  probably  the 
minutest  bodies  in  which  so  complicated  an  optical  struc- 
ture has  hitherto  been  witnessed.  I  find  that  the  smaller 
circles  are,  the  more  perfect  is  their  form,  and  the 
brighter  their  colours. 

These  crystals,  as  1  have  already  observed,  probably 
consist  of  spicula  diverging  from  a  point,  but  which  are 
in  the  closest  possible  contact,  and  in  a  state  of  complete 
mechanical  cohesion.  It  seems  to  follow  as  a  conse- 
quence from  such  a  structure,  that  their  density  must 
increase  from  their  circumference  towards  their  centre. 
Now  it  is  worthy  of  remark,  that  Sir  David  Brewster  has 
discovered  very  similar  phenomena  by  polarized  light  in 
the  crystalline  lenses  of  certain  fishes,  which  are  known 
by  direct  experiment  to  increase  in  density  towards  the 
centre.  Indeed  the  figure  which  he  has  given  of  the 
lens  of  the  codfish  in  the  Philosophical  Transactions  for 
1816  (Plate  XII.  fig.  1,)  is  so  like  the  appearance  of  one 
of  the  crystals  which  I  have  described,  that  it  might  be 
supposed  to  have  been  intended  for  a  representation  of  it. 

Having  pointed  out  this  resemblance,  I  may  also  men- 
tion another  class  of  facts  to  which  I  think  those  I  have 
described  possess  a  considerable  analogy,     I  mean   the 


ON  THE  OPTICAL   PHENOMENA   OF  CRYSTALS.  217 

optical  figures  which  Brewster  lias  discovered  in  spheres 
of  glass  whose  density  was  rendered  variable  by  heating 
them. 

He  says*  that  "  if  we  take  a  cold  sphere  of  glass  and 
immerse  it  in  a  trough  of  hot  oil,  placed  in  a  polarizing 
apparatus,  we  shall  observe  a  black  cross  with  four  sectors 
of  polarized  light.  If  the  sphere  is  turned  round,  it  will 
exhibit  in  every  position  the  very  same  figure.  If  we 
now  suppose  the  trough  to  be  filled  with  such  spheres, 
they  will  exhibit  the  same  phenomena  in  whatever  direc- 
tion the  polarized  light  is  transmitted  through  them,  and 
even  if  they  were  in  a  state  of  motion.  A  fluid  com- 
posed of  such  spherical  particles  would  exhibit  the  same 
polarizing  structure  in  every  possible  direction,  and  even 
if  it  were  in  a  rapid  state  of  gyration.  If  the  particles 
possessed  the  structure  that  produces  circular  polariza- 
tion, the  fluid  would  develop  the  phenomena  exhibited 
by  oil  of  turpentine,  &c." 

And  again-]- ,  "  The  structure  of  the  particles  of  a  cir- 
cularly polarizing  fluid  must  be  exactly  the  same  along 
every  one  of  its  diameters ;  that  is,  the  structure  must 
be  symmetrical  round  the  centre  of  the  particle,  or 
analogous  to  that  which  takes  place  in  common  polariza- 
tion when  a  sphere  of  glass  has  its  density  regularly 
increasing  or  regularly  diminishing  towards  its  centre." 

I  have  quoted  these  remarkable  passages  at  length, 
because   it  appears  to  me  that  what  is  there  advanced 

*  Library  of  Useful  Knowledge,  ait   "  Totalization  oi  Light,"  p.  51. 
t  Ibid.  p.  15. 


218  APPENDIX. 

merely  as  a  hypothesis,  acquires  a  considerable  degree  of 
probability  from  the  facts  which  I  have  stated,  since  I 
have  succeeded  in  rendering  actually  visible  circular 
particles  of  excessive  minuteness,  in  each  of  which 
the  microscope  detects  the  very  structure  imagined  by 
Brewster,  viz.  the  black  cross  and  four  sectors  of  light. 
So  that  it  appears  not  improbable  that  the  circular 
polarizing  properties  of  fluids  may  be  owing  to  the 
presence  of  multitudes  of  particles  similar  to  these,  which 
they  hold  in  solution. 


219 


No.  2. 

Further  Observations  on  the  Optical  Phenomena  of  Crystals. 
By  H.  F.  TALBOT,  Esq.  F.R.S.* 


Sect.  I. — In  my  former  paper  on  this  subject  I  have 
described  the  remarkable  circular  mode  of  crystallization 
which  sometimes  occurs  when  borax  crystallizes  from  a 
solution  in  phosphoric  acid. 

I  have  stated  that  when  examined  by  the  polarizing 
microscope,  a  black  cross  and  four  sectors  of  light  are 
seen  upon  each  crystal  j  and  upon  that  kind  which  is 
most  easily  and  frequently  obtained,  there  are  seen  in 
addition  one  or  more  rings  of  vivid  colour.  Some 
deviations,  however,  from  this  usual  form  occur  occa- 
sionally ;  one  of  which,  being  extremely  beautiful  as  a 
microscopic  object,  deserves  a  separate  mention.  This 
variety  of  crystalline  circles  differs  from  the  one  first 
described  in  the  following  particulars. 

1.  The  circles  are  much  larger,  attaining  the  diameter 
of  one-tenth  of  an  inch  ;  whereas  those  first  observed  did 
not  exceed  one-two-hundredth  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 

2.  They  are  flat,  whereas  the  former  ones  were  convex, 
and  frequently,  1  believe,  of  a  spherical  form. 

*  From  Phil.  Trans.  Part  I.  for  1837. 


220  APPENDIX. 

3.  In  consequence  of  which  probably,  they  are  seen  to 
exhibit  no  coloured  rings,  but  only  a  cross. 

4.  The  cross  is  brightly  coloured,  red,  green,  blue,  &c. 
upon  a  white  ground  (the  polarizers  being  supposed  to 
be  parallel  to  each  other).  This  has  a  beautiful  appear- 
ance, especially  when  several  circles  seen  at  once  have 
crosses  of  different  colours. 

5.  When  the  polarizers  are  placed  at  right  angles,  the 
phenomenon  complementary  to  the  above  is  seen.  For  in- 
stance, the  circle  which  presented  a  red  cross  upon  a  white 
ground  now  presents  a  black  cross  upon  a  green  ground. 

6.  In  an  intermediate  position  of  the  polarizers,  the 
circle  just  mentioned  presents  a  red  cross  alternating 
with  a  green  one,  thus  dividing  the  circle  into  eight 
sectors  of  coloured  light. 

Other  circles  present  other  colours,  but  they  all  follow 
the  same  analogy,  and  the  crosses  upon  all  the  crystals 
are  in  a  parallel  position. 

7.  These  crystals  last  longer  than  the  former  ones. 
1  have  found  some  of  these  retain  their  structure  for  two 
months ;  the  former  kind  seldom  last  in  perfection  more 
than  a  day. 

8.  It  sometimes  happens  that  their  circumference  is 
imperfect,  and  presents  a  notched  or  jagged  outline. 
These  have  a  very  beautiful  appearance,  and  have  been 
almost  universally  compared  by  those  who  have  looked 
at  them  to  highly-coloured  flowers  with  four  petals ;  the 
cross  upon  them  being  so  dark  as  to  have  the  appearance 
of  being  a  division  between  the  petals. 


ON  THE  OPTICAL  PHENOMENA  OF  CRYSTALS.  221 

All  the  circles,  when  viewed  by  common  light,  appear 
transparent,  white,  and  very  uniform.  If  they  are  com- 
posed of  acicnlar  crystals  diverging  from  a  point,  these 
latter  must  be  exceedingly  slender  and  numerous,  and  in 
perfect  optical  contact,  since  a  high  magnifying  power 
does  not  render  them  separately  visible. 

Sect.  2. — With  respect  to  the  chemical  nature  of 
these  crystals,  it  appears  to  me  evident  that  they  consist 
of  boracic  acid.  They  are  obtained  by  dissolving  borax 
in  phosphoric  acid ;  and  it  may  be  inferred  that  this 
latter  substance  unites  with  the  alkali,  and  isolates  the 
boracic  acid.  In  order  to  see  if  this  supposition  were 
correct,  I  dissolved  boracic  acid  in  alcohol,  and  I  found 
that  a  drop  of  this  solution  evaporated  on  a  plate  of  glass 
frequently  yielded  an  abundant  crop  of  the  crystalline 
spherules.  But  these  are  generally  exceedingly  small, 
requiring  a  high  power  to  display  in  them  the  cross  and 
four  sectors  of  light,  and  they  speedily  grow  opaque  ;  for 
which  reason  they  are  not  so  well  suited  for  observation 
as  those  prepared  by  the  former  method.  They  establish 
the  fact,  however,  that  this  mode  of  crystallizing  is  a 
property  of  the  boracic  acid.  It  is  highly  improbable 
that  it  should  be  peculiar  to  that  substance,  but  I  have 
not  yet  met  with  it  in  any  other. 

Sect.  3.  Explanation  of  some  of  the  Optical  appearances. 
— 1.  When  any  doubly  refracting  crystal  is  examined 
with  the  polarizing  microscope,    (the   polarizers   being 


222  APPENDIX. 

transverse  to  each  other,  and  the  field  of  view  conse- 
quently dark,)  if  it  be  turned  round  in  one  plane,  it  is 
seen  to  grow  four  times  luminous  and  four  times  dark  in 
the  course  of  one  revolution.  This  I  have  found  to  be 
universally  the  case  with  all  the  substances  which  I  have 
tried,  and  it  also  is  in  accordance  with  theory. 

2.  In  the  case  of  an  acicular  crystal  one  of  the  optical 
axes  always  coincided  with  the  axis  of  figure,  or  length 
of  the  crystal ;  so  that  if  a  crystal  of  this  sort  appears 
unilluminated,  all  the  others  that  are  either  parallel  to  it 
or  perpendicular  to  it  are  likewise  dark. 

3.  It  results  from  the  above,  that  a  circle  composed  of 
acicular  crystals  diverging  from  a  point  must  present  the 
appearance  of  a  black  cross,  and  that  the  crosses  on  all 
the  circles  will  be  parallel. 

4.  With  respect  to  the  rings  of  colour,  they  are  a  con- 
sequence of  the  variable  thickness  of  the  crystalline  circle 
at  different  distances  from  its  centre.  Their  being  visible, 
and  indeed  very  conspicuous,  upon  a  body  of  such  small 
diameter,  arises  from  the  very  energetic  action  of  boracic 
acid  upon  polarized  light. 

Sect.  4.  I  have  remarked  that  the  circular  crystalli- 
zation of  boracic  acid  is  frequently  entirely  superseded 
by  other  modes  of  crystalline  formation  ;  which  circum- 
stance appears  to  be  chiefly  owing  to  the  presence  or 
absence  of  combined  water.  Some  of  these  variations 
deserve  to  be  particularly  specified. 

1.  Instead  of  circles  there  often  occurs   a  formation 


ON  THE  OPTICAL  PHENOMENA  OF  CRYSTALS.  223 

of  crystals  resembling  two  opposite  sectors  of  a  circle 
combined.  This  form  may  be  traced  in  different  crys- 
tals, from  its  commencement  when  the  angle  of  the 
sector  is  small,  through  all  degrees  of  increase,  until  at 
length  the  opposite  sectors  unite  and  form  a  complete 
circle. 

2.  The  crystals  are  frequently  of  a  very  irregular  elon- 
gated shape,  which  does  not  approximate  either  to  a 
prismatic  or  a  cylindrical  form.  This  stem,  as  it  may  be 
termed,  subdivides  itself  at  both  extremities  into  an 
immense  multitude  of  diverging  fibres,  giving  it  the  ap- 
pearance of  a  bundle  of  elastic  filaments  firmly  held  to- 
gether in  the  central  part,  but  with  its  extremities  left  at 
liberty  to  diverge*. 

3.  Another  variety  resembles  in  the  same  way  irregu- 
lar stems  or  branches,  which,  however,  instead  of  being 
subdivided,  are  abruptly  truncated  at  both  extremities 
perpendicularly  to  the  general  line  of  their  direction. 

4.  Sometimes,  on  the  contrary,  the  ramification  is 
much  more  developed,  and  then  resembles  two  plumes 
united  by  a  common  stem. 

5.  Crystals  of  regular  geometric  form.  These  appear 
to  require  the  presence  of  combined  water. 

Whichever  of  these  formations   occurs,  it  is  for  the 

*  This  appearance  is  not  very  uncommon  in  the  crystallization  of  other 
substances,  though  I  believe  it  has  not  yet  been  described.  The  divergence 
of  the  filaments  suggests  the  idea  of  electrical  repulsion  as  being  at  least  its 
primary  cause. 


224  APPENDIX. 

most  part  seen  in  all  the  crystals  at  once,  to  the  exclusion 
of  any  of  the  other  forms. 

Sect.  5.  These  crystals  generally  undergo  a  sponta- 
neous change  in  the  course  of  one  or  two  days  after  they 
have  been  formed.  Those  (No.  4)  resembling  plumes 
usually  break  up  and  resolve  themselves  into  small 
rhombs  and  other  geometric  forms.  The  elongated 
crystals  (Nos.  2,  3)  undergo  a  remarkable  change.  They 
become  traversed  with  innumerable  fissures  transverse 
to  their  length,  and  thus  break  up  into  thin  plates,  which 
either  cohere  loosely  or  separate  entirely. 

Sect.  6.  All  these  forms  are  very  pleasing  objects  for  the 
polarizing  microscope.  This  arises  from  the  very  high  de- 
polarizing power  of  boracic  acid,  which  enables  its  thinnest 
plates  to  exhibit  colours  of  great  variety  and  brilliancy, 
and  causes  even  its  dust  or  smallest  particles  to  appear 
luminous.  The  more  energetically  any  substance  acts 
upon  polarized  light,  the  closer  and  more  crowded  are 
the  band  and  lines  of  colour  which  appear  upon  its 
crystals.     These  isochromatic  lines,  of  which  there  are 

frequently  many  alternations,  denote  lines  of  equal  thick- 
ness in  the  crystal.  In  the  case  of  boracic  acid,  when 
anhydrous  or  nearly  so,  these  lines  are  more  crowded 
than  in  any  other  crystal  that  I  have  yet  examined,  inso- 
much that  to  exhibit  them  distinctly  is  as  fine  a  test  of  the 
performance  of  a  microscope  as  to  resolve  the  more  diffi- 


OPTICAL  PHENOMENA  OF  CRYSTALS.  225 

cult  lines  on  the  scales  of  a  butterfly's  wing,  or  any  other 
of  the  known  test-objects.  And  in  many  cases  the 
microscope  only  indicates  the  existence  of  a  still  more 
delicate  structure,  which,  at  least  in  its  present  state,  it 
has  not  power  distinctly  to  exhibit. 

Sect.  /•  On  Analytic  Crystals. — I  now  come  to  de- 
scribe a  property  of  crystals  which  I  met  with  while  em- 
ployed in  pursuing  the  above  investigation.  This  is,  the 
power  which  certain  crystals  have  of  analyzing  polarized 
light  in  a  manner  analogous  to  the  tourmaline ;  for 
which  reason  I  shall  propose  for  them  the  name  of 
Analytic  Crystals. 

If  I  am  not  mistaken,  this  property  has  been  hitherto 
confined  to  the  tourmaline  and  a  few  other  natural 
minerals:  and  it  has  not  been  known  that  their  effects 
could  be  imitated,  much  less  surpassed,  by  crystals  arti- 
ficially made.  I  trust,  therefore,  that  it  will  be  of  some 
interest  to  describe  a  method  of  procuring  such  crystals. 

In  the  following  experiments  it  will  be  understood 
that  the  analyzing  plate  of  the  microscope  (or  the  pola- 
rizer next  the  eye)  is  removed. 

1.  A  good  example  of  this  kind  of  crystal  is  obtained 
by  dissolving  the  sulphate  of  chromium  and  potash  in  tar- 
taric acid  by  the  aid  of  heat.  A  drop  of  this  solution 
placed  on  a  plate  of  glass  soon  yields  by  evaporation 
filmy  crystals,  which  very  frequently  have  the  charac- 
teristic property  of  tourmaline  :    that  is  to  say,  that  if 

Q 


226  APPENDIX. 

polarized  light  is  transmitted  through  them,  in  one  posi- 
tion they  suffer  it  to  pass  freely,  but  if  they  are  turned 
round  90  degrees,  they  arrest  and  absorb  it  entirely. 

When  the  experiment  has  been  successfully  conducted, 
the  crystals  will  not  in  this  position  allow  the  smallest 
portion  of  light  to  pass. 

If  now  we  consider  the  extreme  thinness  of  these  crys- 
talline films,  it  will  appear  how  energetic  must  be  their 
action  upon  light ;  since,  although  white  and  transparent, 
they  are  able  to  produce  an  absorption  equalling  that  of 
the  best  tourmalines,  notwithstanding  that  the  effect  of 
the  latter  is  aided  by  their  natural  dark  colour. 

But  if  these  crystals  are  analogous  to  the  tourmaline, 
they  must  have  the  power  which  that  substance  has  of 
analyzing  the  light  that  has  been  transmitted  through 
other  crystals. 

Accordingly,  if  we  place  in  the  path  of  the  polarized 
ray  a  plate  of  sulphate  of  lime  of  a  proper  thickness,  the 
crystal  which  before  absorbed  the  light  and  appeared 
black,  becomes  splendidly  coloured  with  that  colour 
which  the  sulphate  of  lime  produces,  and  which  a  tourma- 
line would  shew  if  it  were  employed  as  an  analyzing  plate. 

On  reversing  the  polarization  of  the  ray  (or  turning 
round  the  crystal),  the  complementary  tint  appears.  The 
same  results  occur  if  the  crystal  is  employed  in  the  first 
place  to  polarize  the  light,  and  tourmaline  or  calcareous 
spar  is  used  to  analyze  it,  so  that  the  analogy  or  rather 
identity  of  effect  with  the  tourmaline  is  complete. 


OPTICAL  PHENOMKNA   OF  CRYSTALS.  227 

1  will  now  mention  some  other  crystals  which  possess 
the  analyzing  property,  but  not  in  such  a  high  degree. 

2.  Boracic  acid. — If  dissolved  in  boiling  water,  it  yields 
in  cooling  irregular  crystals  which  have  considerable 
analytic  power.  A  crystal  which  in  one  position  is  so 
translucent  as  to  be  hardly  distinguishable  from  the 
water  in  which  it  floats,  is  in  the  transverse  position 
very  strongly  defined.  It  does  not  become  dark  all  over, 
but  only  in  its  outline. 

If  now  we  employ  it  to  analyze  the  tints  of  sulphate  of 
lime,  its  outline  becomes  beautifully  coloured.  Nothing 
can  exceed  the  delicacy  of  colouring  which  a  number  of 
these  crystals  exhibit  when  viewed  together ;  those  which 
lie  in  one  direction  appearing,  for  instance, green;  those 
in  a  transverse  direction,  red.  The  appearance  is  very 
unlike  any  other  optical  phenomenon  that  I  know  of,  in 
consequence  of  two  colours  being  seen  in  strong  contrast, 
and  without  any  intermediate  tints  ;  and  also  from  the  out- 
line only  of  the  objects  being  coloured,  while  their  interior 
remains  without  colour.  It  is  only  when  the  crystals 
have  a  fibrous  or  striated  structure  that  the  tint  extends 
over  all  their  surface. 

The  boracic  acid  has  the  same  analytic  property,  and 
precisely  the  same  appearance,  when  it  crystallizes  from 
a  solution  of  borax  in  phosphoric  acid.  The  plumose 
crystals  of  it  (No.  4,  supra)  are  very  delicately  coloured 
with  the  two  opposite  tints. 

I  obtained  a  very  beautiful  result  by  placing  a  drop  of 
phosphoric  acid  upon  a  group  of  circular  crystals.     This 


228  APPENDIX. 

caused  a  fresh  deposition  of  boracic  acid  upon  them  as 
nuclei,  which  assumed  the  form  of  very  delicate  cilia, 
spreading  in  all  directions  as  from  a  centre.  These 
fringed  circles  shewed  the  analytic  property  in  an  admi- 
rable manner,  exhibiting  four  quadrants  coloured  alter- 
nately with  complementary  colours  of  great  vivacity. 

3.  Another  instance  which  is  worthy  of  mention  is  the 
oxalate  of  potash  and  chromium,  a  salt  whose  optical  pro- 
perties have  been  investigated  by   Sir  David  Brewster*. 
If  some  gum  arabic  is  added  to  a  solution  of  this  salt,  and 
a  drop  of  it  put  between  two  plates  of  glass,  it  abandons 
its  usual  mode  of  crystallization  for  another,  which  re- 
sembles a  microscopic  vegetation  composed  of  minute 
prisms  growing  one  out   of  another,  and  variously  ar- 
ranged in  sprigs  and  branchlets  ;     while  in  other  places 
it  assumes  an  undulating  capillary  form,  much  resem- 
bling  in    miniature   the  tufts   or  locks    of  a  species  of 
Conferva  which  is  seen  growing  in  pools  of  water  or  in 
the   sea.     Now  these  objects  are   possessed   of  a   high 
analytic  power,  insomuch  that,  when  a  plate  of  sulphate 
of  lime  is  placed  beneath  them,  they  assume  a  colour  of 
great  intensity  and  splendour,  which  is  changed  for  the 
complementary  tint  when  the  polarization  of  the  incident 
ray  is  reversed. 

4.  Nitre. — If  nitre  and  gum  arabic  are  dissolved  to- 
gether in  hot  water,  a  drop  of  the  solution  put  on  a  glass 
plate  yields  very  good  analytic  crystals.     These  have  a 

*  Philosophical  Transactions  for  1835,  p.  91. 


OPTICAL  PHENOMENA  OF  CRYSTALS.  229 

branched  or  plumose  appearance,  and  assume  beautiful 
colours  in  polarized  light  when  a  plate  of  sulphate  of 
lime  is  placed  beneath  them.  The  microscope  shews  the 
colour  to  reside  principally  in  the  outline,  but  to  the 
naked  eye  the  whole  film  appears  coloured.  As  these 
films  may  be  obtained  of  large  size,  the  phenomenon  can 
be  well  seen  by  the  unassisted  eye. 

A  very  interesting  experiment,  and  one  which  throws 
much  light  upon  the  cause  of  these  appearances,  is  to 
transmit  a  beam  of  polarized  light  very  obliquely  through 
a  small  prism  of  nitre  immersed  in  gum,  and  viewed 
with  the  microscope.  Its  outline  then  generally  exhibits 
two  colours  instead  of  one ;  for,  while  the  edge  of  the 
prism  which  is  on  that  side  from  whence  the  ray  of  light 
comes,  is,  for  instance,  of  a  red  colour,  the  opposite  ci\ge 
Mill  appear  green.  Reverse  the  polarization  of  the  light, 
and  these  colours  are  exchanged  one  for  the  other.  This 
observation  enables  us  to  explain  the  origin  of  the  pheno- 
menon in  a  satisfactory  manner,  and  to  shew  why  it  only 
occurs  in  crystals  possessing  strong  double  refraction, 
like  nitre,  in  which  the  refractive  indices  of  the  two  rays 
are  materially  different. 

When  a  ray  of  common  light  is  incident  upon  such  a 
crystal,  and  therefore  divides  itself  into  two  rays  oppo- 
sitely polarized,  both  rays  are  transmitted  through  the 
central  parts  of  the  crystal,  which  are  bounded  by  parallel 
planes,  or  by  planes  approaching  to  parallelism.  But 
when  the  bounding  planes  of  the   crystal  are   much    in- 


2?0  APPENDIX. 

dined  to  each  other,  and  therefore  refract  the  light  in 
the  manner  of  a  prism,  the  refractive  indices  of  the  rays 
may  differ  so  much,  that  while  one  of  them  passes  freely 
through  such  a  prism,  the  other  cannot  pass  at  all,  but 
suffers  total  internal  reflexion,  and  is  thereby  dispersed ; 
just  as  if  the  prism  had  a  larger  refracting  angle  with 
respect  to  that  ray  than  to  the  other.  Therefore  if  two 
oppositely  polarized  rays  are  presented  successively  to 
such  a  crystal,  as  in  our  experiment,  one  of  them  will  be 
transmitted,  and  the  other  not.  That  this  is  the  true 
explanation  appears  from  this,  that  when  the  oblique 
planes  are  well  formed  and  clearly  defined  by  the  micro- 
scope, the  colour  also  is  accurately  limited  by  the  same 
boundary  :  so  that  while  this  part  analyzes  the  tints  of 
a  plate  of  sulphate  of  lime,  the  rest  of  the  crystal  is 
inactive. 

It  may  be  inferred  by  analogy,  that  the  same  cause 
produces  the  analyzing  power  of  striated  or  fibrous  sur- 
faces, and  of  those  in  which  the  striae  are  too  minute  to 
be  discernible  (as  in  No.  1,  supra,  page  225)  :  for  it  is  not 
the  property  of  all  crystals  with  striated  surfaces  to  have 
the  analytic  power,  but  only  of  such  as  are  doubly 
refractive  in  a  high  degree, 

I  have  said  that  the  capillary  crystals  (No.  3)  possess 
the  analytic  property,  although  their  diameter  is  often 
evanescent  even  with  a  microscope.  An  important  infer- 
ence may  be  drawn  from  this,  viz.  that  a  ray  of  light  imme- 
diately on  entering  one  of  these  crystals,  subdivides  itself 


OPTICAL  PHENOMENA  OF    CRYSTALS.  231 

into  two  rays  of  different  refractive  indices,  or  at  least 
that  the  thickness  of  crystal  which  is  requisite  to  pro- 
duce this  effect  is  insensible  to  observation. 

When  nitre  is  made  to  crystallize  in  gum,  it  often 
shoots  into  prismatic  crystals,  which  are  very  interesting1 
objects,  the  more  so,  that  they  are  of  a  permanent  nature, 
and  not  liable  to  spontaneous  change.  When  examined 
by  polarized  light,  these  prisms,  in  one  position  of  their 
axis,  frequently  disappear  completely.  This  arises  from 
the  refractive  power  of  the  gum  being  equal  to  that  of 
one  of  the  two  rays  in  the  crystal.  Reverse  the  polari- 
zation of  the  ray,  and  the  crystal  appears,  as  it  were,  to 
start  into  existence,  acquiring  great  strength  and  black- 
ness of  outline,  and,  not  unfrequently,  entire  opacity. 
Again,  when  the  sulphate  of  lime  is  interposed,  this 
opacity  disappears,  and  the  crystal  becomes  brightly 
coloured.  Since  it  is  probable  that  many  better  methods 
may  be  found  of  obtaining  this  kind  of  crystal  than  have 
hitherto  presented  themselves,  I  have  hopes  that  it  will 
be  possible  to  obtain  large  and  permanent  artificial 
crystals,  which  may  possess  the  advantages  of  the  tour- 
maline without  the  inconvenience  resulting  from  its  dark 
colour. 


232 


No.  3. 

E  X  0  11 1)  I  U  M  *. 

By  C.   R.  GORING,  M.U. 


The  discovery  of  a  set  of  objects  for  ascertaining  the 
defining  and  penetrating  powers  of  microscopes,  has 
founded  a  new  era  in  the  history  of  those  instruments. 
The  thick  aplanatic  object-glass  for  diverging  rays,  and 
the  Amician  reflecting  microscope,  have  in  consequence 
been  perfected.  The  substitution  of  diamond  and  sap- 
phire lenses,  for  those  made  of  glass,  in  the  single  micro- 
scope, with  the  ingenious  apparatus  for  illumination 
contrived  by  Dr.  Wollaston,  may  also  in  some  measure 
be  attributed  to  the  same  source.  It  may  surely  be 
affirmed  that  no  improvements  at  all  commensurate  to 
these  in  magnitude  and  importance  are  likely  to  be  made 
hereafter.  Microscopes  are  now  placed  completely  on 
a  level  with  telescopes,  and,  like  them,  must  remain 
stationary  in  their  construction. 

In  the  present  work  I    have  endeavoured   to  establish 
the  mechanical  part  of  the  construction  of  microscopes, 

*  From  First  Edition,  with  corrections.     By  C.  R.  G. 


EXORDIUM.  233 

that  is  to  say,  their  mountings,  carriages,  and  apparatus, 
&c.  on  true  and  philosophical  principles,  and  I  Hatter  my- 
self not  totally  without  success,  most  of  the  better  class  of 
instruments,  which  have  been  made  of  late  years,  being 
more  or  less  constructed  according  to  the  plans  I  have 
suggested.  This,  however,  is  a  subject  on  which  no  man 
must  pretend  to  dogmatize  or  dictate,  for  such  is  the  spirit 
of  contradiction,  and  of  renitency  against  conviction,  in 
mankind,  that  they  will  make  it  a  point  of  honour  to  go 
the  wrong  way  if  you  urge  them  too  forcibly  on  in  the 
right  one,  just  to  shew  that  they  will  have  their  own  way, 
and  are  determined  to  think  and  act  for  themselves. 

Though  it  may  savour  somewhat  of  egotism,  I  cannot 
refrain  from  stating  some  of  the  difficulties  which  I 
experienced  in  making  the  drawings  of  the  living  objects, 
though  I  know  very  well  that  people  of  first-rate  talent 
explode  difficulties,  and  will  hardly  allow  of  their  exist- 
ence, except  with  bunglers  and  half-taught  amateurs. 
I  wish  I  had  been  one  of  those  favoured  individuals  with 
whom  the  most  arduous  achievements  of  all  sorts 

"  are  no  more  difficile. 


Than  for  a  blackbird  to  whistle." 

Hudibras. 

If  any  portrait  painter  had  to  execute  a  likeness  of 
some  person  afflicted  with  chorea,  who  could  not  be 
prevailed  upon  to  be  quiet  for  more  (ban  ball  a  mi- 
nute together,  who  was  perpetually  jigging  about  the 
apartment,  and  exhibiting   his   tail   instead  of  his  head, 


234  APPENDIX. 

&c.  &c,  I  think  he  would  be  compelled  to  admit 
that  he  had  undertaken  a  task  which  would  at  least 
require  time  and  patience  for  its  completion  ;  but  if, 
in  addition,  the  said  person  was  to  be  removed  to  a 
distance,  so  that  the  artist  could  only  see  him  with  a 
powerful  telescope,  and  had  to  follow  his  motions  as 
well  as  he  could,  and  be  content  to  catch  a  glimpse  of  him 
crossing  his  field  of  view  now  and  then,  according  to  the 
humour  and  good  pleasure  of  the  said  individual,  I 
think  the  worthy  limner  would  begin  to  think  that  after 
all  there  was  some  difficulty  to  contend  with. 

Now  this  case  I  conceive  to  be  an  exact  parallel  to 
that  of  drawing  living  objects  with  a  microscope. 

Their  incorrigible  restlessness  so  baulks  and  baffles  the 
artist,  that  he  is  frequently  compelled  to  lay  down  his 
pencil  to  regain  his  lost  temper,  and  fresh  courage  to 
proceed  :  in  many  cases  his  best  resource  is  to  study  the 
object  till  he  has  got  all  its  features  by  heart — then  to  set 
them  down  on  paper — study  again,  and  gradually  cor- 
rect them  :  by  the  time  he  has  made  half  a  dozen  rough 
sketches  he  will  get  pretty  near  the  truth  :  he  may  then 
commence  a  regular  drawing.  I  can  safely  say  that  I 
have  drawn  many  of  my  objects  five  or  six  times  over 
before  I  could  arrive  at  my  portraiture.  I  have  heard  a 
great  deal  about  shutting  one's  eyes  after  having  made  an 
observation,  and  drawing  from  the  impression  left  on  the 
retina.  This,  I  suspect,  is  better  in  theory  than  in  prac- 
tice, and  it  is  evident  that,  unless  the  object  is  stationary, 


EXORDIUM.  235 

the   last  impression  must  be    so    confounded  with    the 
preceding  ones  that  no  distinct  image  can  be  left. 

But  it  will  probably  be  asked,  why  I  did  not  kill  my 
object  before  J  drew  it,  instead  of  giving  myself  all  this 
unnecessary  trouble  ?  I  answer,  that  I  never  could  make 
a  drawing  to  my  mind  from  a  dead  aquatic  larva  or 
insect.  Such  is  the  extreme  delicacy  of  their  organs, 
and  so  rapid  their  decomposition  in  water,  that  long 
before  a  drawing  can  be  executed,  the  main  and  capital 
parts  of  the  internal,  and  even  external  structure,  in 
most  subjects,  will  become  confused  and  unintelligible. 
If  they  are  removed  out  of  the  water,  a  still  greater 
change  is  effected  by  their  drying  :  their  colours  vanish, 
and  their  whole  appearance  is  totally  changed ;  to  say 
nothing  of  the  fact,  that  a  dead  aquatic  insect  so  loses 
the  peculiar  distinctive  character  derived  from  its 
favourite  attitude  and  position,  that  though  the  com- 
ponent parts  might,  in  some  instances,  be  correctly  given, 
the  tout  ensemble  would  be  scarcely  recognized.  Some 
of  the  proportions — length  of  the  body  and  legs,  &c. — may, 
however,  be  measured  from  the  dead  subject ;  and  this 
help  I  have  always  had  recourse  to  when  I  could  spare  a 
specimen  for  destruction.  All  attempts  to  preserve  these 
creatures  in  spirits,  turpentine,  &c.  are  useless,  from  the 
excessive  corrugation  these  liquids  produce.  I  also  made 
various  attempts  to  confine  them  in  a  narrow  compass 
so  as  to  prevent  much  latitude  of  motion  ;  but  was  com- 
pelled to  desist  from  the  project,  finding   that  they  got 


236  APPENDIX. 

into  constrained  and  unnatural  positions,  and  injured 
themselves  by  struggling-. 

At  the  period  the  drawing's  were  made,  it  is  proper  for 
me  to  observe,  that  the  happy  method  of  preserving 
aquatic  insects  in  Canada  balsam  or  varnish  was  not 
discovered;  still,  however,  a  live  subject  is  far  superior 
to  a  dead  one,  under  any  circumstances  whatever ;  which 
proposition  I  consider  so  self-evident  that  I  shall  not 
set  about  proving  it. 

]  suspect  that  other  individuals  have  met  with  the  same 
obstacles  as  myself  in  making  drawings  of  living  micro- 
scopic objects ;  for  I  think  it  may  be  affirmed,  without  any 
illiberality,  that,  with  very  few  exceptions,  those  of  my 
predecessors  are  proportionally  more  rude  and  incorrect 
than  those  of  any  other  subjects  of  natural  history  what- 
ever; their  various  lineaments  and  features  being  fre- 
quently false,  and  exaggerated  to  a  degree  amounting  to 
caricature  ;  nevertheless,  they  have  been  handed  down 
from  one  bookmaker  to  another,  ever  since  the  days  of 
Swammerdam,  as  if  they  needed  no  improvement  what- 
ever. I  have  made  my  drawings  at  that  period  of  the 
growth  of  the  larva  or  crysalis  in  which  I  thought  it 
made  the  best  and  most  interesting  object,  and  that  they  vary 
greatly  in  their  appearance,  according  to  the  degree 
of  maturity  to  which  they  have  arrived.  There  are  also 
many  varieties,  very  closely  resembling  each  other,  which 
it  is  not  very  easy  to  particularize  ;  but  I  am  quite  con- 
fident;, that  when  the  genuine  object  is  procured,  in  the 


EXOKDfUM.  237 

state  in  which  I  drew  it,  the  correctness  of  my  execution 
will  be  recognised. 

The  specimens  which  I  have  selected  are  those  which 
experience  has  shewn  to  excite  the  strongest  emotions  of 
pleasure  and  satisfaction  in  the  great  mass  of  observers 
of  all  ranks;  whom  I  have  always  found  to  be  most 
delighted  by  comparatively  large  living  objects,  seen  with 
medium  powers.  In  fact,  they  seem  to  afford  the  same 
sort  of  gratification  with  a  menagerie  of  living  wild 
beasts  on  the  large  scale ;  and  most  certainly  many  of 
them  wonderfully  emulate  the  ferocity,  voracity,  cunning, 
and  cruelty  of  the  mammalia.  They  prey  on  each  other, 
and  fight  with  a  degree  of  determined  obstinacy  not 
inferior  to  that  of  any  beings  whatever.  They  have  like- 
wise a  thousand  diverting  pranks  and  humours,  quite 
peculiar  to  themselves.  In  addition  to  these  amiable  and 
amusing  qualities,  they  possess  such  a  high  degree  of 
transparency,  that  their  unique  and  beautiful  internal 
machinery  is  as  clearly  perceptible  as  if  they  were  made 
of  glass;  so  that,  without  any  dissection,  we  can  unravel 
all  the  mysterious  workings  of  their  nature;  such  as  the 
circulation  of  the  blood,  the  pulsations  of  the  heart,  the 
peristaltic  motion  of  the  intestines,  and  the  play  of  every 
muscular  fibre.  This  property  of  transparency  is  not 
possessed  by  any  other  living  beings  with  which  I  am 
acquainted,  except  the  animalcula  infusoria.  I  may 
observe,  that  no  perfect  insects  present  so  many  facilities 
for  adaptation  to  the  microscope,  or  can  be  so  easily 
preserved  and    managed  ;  so  that  the  larvae,  &c,  appear 


238  APPENDIX. 

to  me  peculiarly  and  exclusively  devoted  to  the  conside- 
ration of  microscopists. 

Their  natural  history  will  be  given  by  Mr.  P.,  with 
every  particular  likely  to  interest  the  reader  concerning 
their  peculiar  habits  and  instincts  :  such  as  their  mode  of 
locomotion,  and  of  taking  their  prey ;  the  food  which 
they  most  affect;  their  relative  dispositions  towards  each 
other,  and  other  beings  with  whom  they  associate;  with 
full  directions  how,  when,  and  where  to  procure  them  ; 
and  how  they  may  be  preserved  in  health  and  vigour  for 
observation,  &c.  &c. 

I  do  not  feel  myself  called  upon  to  state  more  con- 
cerning the  nature  and  object  of  this  work  ;  and  1  humbly 
hope  that  truth  and  justice  to  myself  and  partner,  and 
our  joint  publication,  does  not  require  me  to  have  said 
less. 

I  shall  conclude  this  introduction  by  a  vindication  of 
microscopic  science  and  its  votaries,  from  the  aspersions 
which  have  been  cast  upon  them  by  the  inconsiderate ; 
many  of  whom  have  been  pleased  to  assert,  that  micro- 
scopes have,  of  late,  received  a  degree  of  patronage  from 
the  most  illustrious  and  distinguished  savans,  to  which 
they  are  not  legitimately  entitled.  Were  they  applicable 
to  no  other  purposes  than  the  dissection  of  blackguard 
vermin,  the  observation  of  stinking  ditch-water,  or  the 
amorous  passions  of  ants  and  worms,  I  should,  perhaps, 
for  argument's  sake,  admit  that  they  were  but  the  tools 
of  a  puny,  pitiful  pedant,  whose  passions  and  amusements 
were  of  a  trifling,  if  not  of  a  degrading  complexion  :  but 


EXORDIUM.  239 

I  would  ask  whether,  in  the  hands  of  men  like  Bauer, 
they  are  not  applied  to  the  development  of  the  most 
curious,  important,  and  interesting  details  of  anatomy 
and  physiology,  which,  without  their  assistance,  could 
never  have  been  known  ?  and  whether  the  finest  and 
most  delicate  parts  of  the  structure  of  animals,  in  their 
extreme  penetralia,  are  not  rendered  equally  intelligible 
with  the  coarsest  and  most  evident  parts  of  their  fabric, 
by  means  of  these  instruments? 

None  are  apt  to  treat  microscopists  with  more  contempt 
than  some  astronomers,  and  even  mere  star-gazers. 

I  shall  always  possess  the  most  profound  veneration 
for  astronomy,  as  the  most  sublime  of  all  the  sciences ; 
but  star-gazing  is  a  distinct  department,  though  fre- 
cpiently  confounded  with  it ;  and  is,  in  my  opinion,  little 
better  than  downright  microsophizing.  To  the  telescope 
certainly  belongs  the  inspection  of  the  great  and  sublime 
works  of  the  creation  ;  to  the  microscope  belongs  the 
petites  and  beautiful  ones  :  if  the  former  shews  us  the 
world  above,  the  latter  exhibits  the  world  beneath  us. 

I  must  here  positively  chant  the  vast  superiority  of  a 
microscope,  as  a  hobby-horse,  over  a  telescope,  at  least 
when  the  latter  is  used  merely  as  a  star-yaziny  in&trut 
ment.  Let  us  suppose  you  have,  at  a  great  expense, 
procured  a  very  fine  telescope.  How  many  hours  in 
the  year  will  you  be  able  to  use  it  ?  Not  above  one 
hundred,  says  Sir  W.  Herschel,  even  if  you  lose  not 
one  in  other  avocations.  How  many  colds  and  quinzies 
are  you   to  get  by  exposure  to  the  night  air,  when  you 


240  APPENDIX. 

might  be  much  better  employed  in  your  warm  bed  ? 
How  many  disappointments  are  you  to  endure  from 
finding  the  wind  suddenly  shift  into  the  wrong  quarter, 
after  you  had  counted  on  a  good  night's  sport  ?  How 
many  scoldings  and  curtain  lectures  from  your  wife  ? 
After  all,  when  you  have  seen  all  the  double  stars,  clus- 
ters, nebulae,  within  reach  of  your  instrument,  together 
with  the  planets,  mountains  in  the  moon,  and  spots  on 
the  sun,  &c.  together  with  any  curious  terrestrial  objects 
about  your  habitation,  and  exhibited  the  same  to  your 
friends,  what  remains  but  to  dispatch  your  charmer  up 
to  the  garret,  as  of  no  further  use  ?  You  may,  certainly, 
on  high  festivals,  transport  it  down  again,  in  order  to 
convince  people  what  a  prodigiously  scientific  personage 
you  are,  even  to  be  able  to  possess  such  an  instrument, 
and  to  know  the  right  end  of  it  from  the  wrong  one. 

A  microscope,  on  the  other  hand,  is  available  at  all 
times  and  seasons.  There  is  no  end  to  the  number  of 
objects  it  may  investigate.  In  the  solitude  of  the  most 
dismal  prison,  you  would  only  need  a  lamp,  a  microscope, 
and  some  vegetable  infusions,  to  furnish  you  with  an 
inexhaustible  fund  of  amusement,  totally  independent  of 
other  external  objects.  When  employed  in  researches 
on  animal  and  vegetable  physiology,  where  are  your  in- 
vestigations to  terminate  ?  Your  life  will  not  suffice 
to  study  sufficiently  the  wonders  of  the  minutiae  of 
natural  history. 

The  supreme  Author  of  Nature  has  been  pleased  to 
bestow     so     exquisite     a    degree    of     finishing      upon 


EXORDIUM.  241 

many  of  his  works,  that  they  can  he  only  appreciated 
hy  man  with  the  assistance  of  the  microscope.  Surely 
he  who  is  hut  a  work  of  God  may  he  allowed  to  admire  the 
works  of  his  Creator,  without  incurring-  derision  or  ridi- 
cule, even  though  they  are  minutiae.  Trifles  are  said  to 
take  only  with  frivolous  minds  ;  hut  minutice  are  not  ne- 
cessarily trifles,  as  it  will  be  easy  to  prove.  It  is  not 
only,  in  my  own  opinion,  unscientific,  but  even  swinish 
and  ridiculous,  to  contemn  any  thing  merely  on  account 
of  its  minuteness.  To  say  nothing  of  the  hackneyed  ar- 
gument, that  greatness  and  littleness  exist  only  by  com- 
parison, I  will  ask,  if  the  Automaton  Chess-player  had 
been  made  on  a  scale  of  l-20th  of  an  inch  to  a  foot,  or 
even  much  less,  it  would,  in  consequence,  become  despi- 
cable as  a  work  of  art  ? 

Suppose  some  individual,  greatly  distinguished  by  his 
talents  in  shipbuilding,  in  making  astronomical  instru- 
ments, or  steam  engines,  &c,  was  also  to  evince  a  passion 
for  making  minute  automata  and  watch-work,  such  as 
tarantula  spiders,  minute  singing-birds,  musical  seals,  or 
even  such  curiosities  as  a  coach  drawn  by  fleas,  &c. 
would  it  shew  good  breeding,  or  good  taste,  to  despise  or 
ridicule  his  minute  labours,  while  we  admired  his 
grander  and  more  imposing  works  ? 

Now  it  does  appear  to  me,  that  the  Supreme  Being 
docs,  in  some  sense,  resemble  such  an  individual ;  for 
his  power  loves  to  display  itself  in  every  way  in  which  it  can 
be  displayed,  whether  upon  the  minute  or  grand  scale,  in  the 
creation  of  animalcules,  as  well  as  of  fixed  stars      and  I 

it 


242  APPENDIX. 

cannot  help  thinking-  myself,  that  those  who  spurn  and 
scoff  at  the  minute  ivorks  of  God,  be  they  what  they  may, 
while  they  affect  an  admiration  of  his  great  wonders,  are 
guilty  of  a  species  of  impiety,  and  must  be  either  liars,  or 
hypocrites,  or  fools. 

Men  are  perpetually  wondering  what  can  be  the  use  of 
bugs,  and  fleas,  and  wasps,  and  such  kind  of  vermin,  and 
speak  of  them  as  absolute  blots  in  the  escutcheon  of  the 
Almighty.  The  use  of  these  little  insects  is  surely  to 
teach  man  a  perpetual  lesson  of  humility.  He  is  extremely 
apt  to  fancy  himself  the  only  being  of  real  importance  in 
this  planet,  and  that  every  thing  in  it  has  been  made  for 
his  exclusive  use  and  accommodation  :  whereas  a  very 
little  consideration  must  teach  him  that  the  said  fleas,  and 
bugs,  and  wasps,  &c.  are  intended  to  enjoy  themselves  in 
their  own  ivay  just  as  he  does ;  that  is  to  say,  without 
greatly  considering  the  convenience,  comforts,  or  happi- 
ness of  other  beings,  I  consider  it  as  certain  that  bugs 
were  intended  to  prey  upon  man,  as  that  man  and  the 
other  prredaceous  mammalia  were  intended  to  destroy 
the  weaker  animals.  If  a  bug  (I  beg  pardon — a  cimex 
lectularius)  could  reason,  it  would  probably  suppose  that 
man  was  of  no  other  use  in  the  creation  than  to  prepare 
its  habitation  and  supply  its  food  ;  and  would  think  that 
no  better  evidence  need  be  adduced  to  prove  the  immense 
importance  of  a  bug  than  that  such  bountiful  provision 
had  been  made  for  it,  &c. 

If  mere  utility  is  to  be  made  the  standard  of  excellence, 
what  a  large  part  of  that  of  most  of  the  sciences  consists 


EXORDIUM.  243 

in  their  effect  as  counterpoises  to  superstition  and  barbarism  ! 
and  in  this  point  microscopic  science  surely  1ms  its  voice 
among  the  rest.  All  men  are  apt  to  despise  their  neigh- 
bours' pursuits,  and  to  dignify  their  own  as  the  only  ones 
of  real  importance  and  value  :  but  while  the  use  of  the 
microscope  is  sanctioned  by  the  examples  of  Pond,  of 
Amici,  of  Wollaston,  of  Herschel,  and  of  Brewster, 
who  disdain  not  to  relax  from  their  severer  studies  in 
such  pursuits,  he  must  be  very  hardy  and  fastidious  in- 
deed who  dares  to  deride  and  condemn  them. 

Great  disgrace  has  been  brought  on  microscopic 
science  by  the  manner  in  which  it  has  been  perverted  to 
the  support  of  preconceived  opinions  and  hypothetical 
views,  as  well  as  to  a  spirit  of  M'onder-making.  I  hope 
that  a  new  and  golden    age   of  observation    will    now 

commence. 

C.  R.G. 

March  1837. 


241 


No.  4. 

Observations  on  Sivammer dam's  method  of  Dissecting  and 
Preparing  Objects  for  the  Microscope*. 

Referred  to  at  page  121. 


In  the  preparation  of  objects,  no  man  was  more  success- 
ful or  more  indefatigable  than  Swammerdam  :  in  minutely 
anatomizing-,  in  patient  investigation,  and  in  curiously 
exhibiting  the  minute  wonders  of  creation,  he  stands 
unrivalled,  far  exceeding  all  those  that  preceded,  as 
well  as  those  that  succeeded  him.  Deeply  impressed 
and  warmly  animated  by  the  amazing  scenes  that  he 
continually  discovered,  his  zeal  in  pursuit  of  truth  was 
not  to  be  ahated  by  disappointment  or  alarmed  by  diffi- 
culty, and  he  was  never  contented  till  he  had  attained  a 
rational  and  clear  idea  of  the  organization  of  the  object 
whose  structure  he  wished  to  explore. 

We  have  only  to  regret  that  we  are  ignorant  of  the 
methods  he  employed.  To  discover  these,  the  great 
Boerhaave  examined  with  a  scrupulous  attention  all  the 
letters  and  manuscripts  of  Swammerdam,  and  has  com- 
municated the  result  of  his  researches,  which,  though  but 

*  Adams's  Essays  on  the  Microscope,  p.  134,  from  the  Life  of  Swammer- 
dam, by  Boerhaave,  ed.  1758. 


OBSERVATIONS  ON   DISSECTING,  ET(  .  215 

small,  may  enable  us  to  form  some  idea  of  this  great 
labourer  in  the  field  of  science. 

His  chief  art  seems  to  have  been  in  constructing  very 
-fine  scissars,  and  giving  them  an  extreme  sharpness ; 
these  he  made  use  of  to  cut  very  minute  objects,  because 
they  dissected  them  equally  ;  whereas  knives  and  lancets, 
let  them  be  ever  so  fine  and  sharp,  are  apt  to  disorder 
delicate  substances,  as  in  going  through  them  they  gene- 
rally draw  after  and  displace  some  of  the  filaments.  His 
knives,  lancets,  and  styles,  were  so  very  fine  that  he 
could  not  see  to  sharpen  them  without  the  assistance  of 
a  magnifying  glass  ;  but  with  them  he  could  dissect  the 
intestines  of  bees  with  the  same  accuracy  and  distinctness 
that  the  most  celebrated  anatomist  does  those  of  large 
animals.  He  was  particularly  dexterous  in  the  manage- 
ment of  small  glass  tubes,  which  were  no  thicker  than  a 
bristle,  and  drawn  to  a  very  fine  point  at  one  end,  but 
thicker  at  the  other.  These  he  made  use  of  to  show  and 
blow  up  the  smallest  vessels  discoverable  by  the  micro- 
scope— to  trace,  distinguish,  and  separate  their  courses 
and  communications,  or  to  inject  them  with  very  subtile 
liquors. 

He  used  to  suffocate  the  insects  in  spirits  of  wine,  in 
water,  or  spirit  of  turpentine,  and  likewise  preserved 
them  some  time  in  these  liquids;  by  which  means  he 
kept  the  parts  from  decomposition,  and  consequently 
eollapsing  and  mixing  together  ;  and  added  to  them  such 
strength  and  firmness  as  rendered  the  dissections  more 
easy  and  agreeable.     When  he  had  divided  transversely 


246  APPENDIX. 

with  his  fine  scissars  the  little  creature  he  intended  to 
examine,  and  carefully  noted  every  thing  that  appeared 
without  further  dissection,  he  then  proceeded  to  extract  the 
viscera  in  a  very  cautious  and  leisurely  manner,  with  other 
instruments  of  great  fineness  ;  first  taking  care  to  wash 
away  and  separate,  with  very  fine  pencils,  the  fat  with 
which  insects  are  very  plentifully  supplied,  and  which 
always  prejudices  the  internal  parts  hcfore  it  can  be 
extracted.  This  operation  is  best  performed  while  the 
insect  is  in  the  pupa  or  chrysalis  state. 

Sometimes  he  put  into  the  water  the  delicate  viscera 
of  the  insects  he  had  suffocated  ;  and  then  shaking 
them  gently,  he  procured  himself  an  opportunity  of 
examining  them,  especially  the  air-vessels  or  trachaea, 
which  by  this  means  he  could  separate,  from  all  the 
other  parts,  whole  and  entire,  to  the  great  admiration  of 
all  those  who  beheld  them  :  as  these  vessels  are  not  to  be 
distinctly  seen  in  any  other  manner,  or,  indeed,  seen  at 
all  without  damaging  them,  he  often  made  use  of  water, 
injected  by  a  syringe,  to  cleanse  thoroughly  the  internal 
parts  of  his  insects ;  then  blew  them  up  with  air,  and 
dried  them,  by  which  means  he  rendered  them  durable, 
and  fit  for  examination  at  a  proper  opportunity.  Some- 
times he  has  examined  with  the  greatest  success,  and 
made  the  most  important  discoveries  in  insects  that  he 
had  preserved   in  balsam*,  and  kept  for  years  in  that 

*  It  is  probable  that  the  beautiful  plan  now  adopted  of  mounting  and 
preserving  insects  in  Canada  balsam  is  the  same  as  that  here  alluded  to ; 
notwithstanding  it    may  be   considered    as    a    new  discovery,  because   the 


OBSERVATIONS  ON    DISSECTING,  ETC.  21/ 

condition.  Again,  he  has  frequently  made  punctures  in 
other  insects  with  a  fine  needle,  and  after  squeezing  out 
all  their  moisture  through  the  holes  made  in  this  manner, 
he  filled  them  with  air,  hy  means  of  very  slender  glass 
tubes;  then  dried  them  in  the  shade;  and,  last  of  all, 
anointed  them  with  oil  of  spike,  in  which  a  little  rosin 
had  been  dissolved,  by  which  means  they  retained  their 
proper  forms  for  a  long  time.  He  had  a  singular  secret 
whereby  he  could  so  preserve  the  nerves  of  insects  that 
they  used  to  continue  as  limber  and  perspieuous  as  ever 
they  had  been. 

He  used  to  make  a  small  puncture  or  incision  towards 
the  tail ;  and  after  having  gently  and  with  great  patience 
squeezed  out  all  their  humours,  and  great  part  of  their 
viscera,  he  then  injected  them  with  wax,  so  as  to  give 
and  continue  to  them  all  the  appearance  of  healthy, 
vigorous  living  creatures.  He  discovered  that  the  fat  of 
all  insects  was  perfectly  soluble  in  oil  of  turpentine: 
thus  he  was  enabled  to  shew  the  viscera  plainly,  only 
after  this  operation  he  used  to  cleanse  and  wash  them 
well  and  often  in  water.  He  frequently  spent  whole 
days  in  thus  cleansing  a  single  caterpillar  of  its  fat,  in 
order  to  discover  the  true  construction  of  this  insect's 
heart. 

His  singular  sagacity  in  stripping  off  the  skin  of  cater- 
pillars that  were  on  the  point  of  spinning  their   cones, 


account  given  by  Swammerdam   is  not  sufficiently  explicit  to  point  out  the 
mode  of  applying  it. 


2-18  APPENDIX. 

deserves  particular  notice.  This  he  effected  by  letting 
them  drop  by  their  threads  into  scalding  water,  and 
suddenly  withdrawing  them  ;  for  by  this  means  the 
epidermis  peeled  off  very  easily  ;  and  when  this  was 
done  he  put  them  into  distilled  vinegar  and  spirit  of 
wine  mixed  together  in  equal  proportions,  which,  by 
giving  a  proper  firmness  to  the  parts,  afforded  an  oppor- 
tunity of  separating  them,  with  very  little  trouble,  from 
the  exuviae,  or  skins,  without  any  danger  to  the  parts  ; 
so  that  by  this  contrivance  the  pupa  could  be  shewn  to 
be  wrapped  up  in  the  caterpillar,  and  the  butterfly  in  the 
pupa.  Those  who  look  into  the  works  of  Swammerdam 
will  be  abundantly  gratified,  whether  they  consider  his 
immense  labour  and  unremitting  ardour  in  these  pursuits, 
or  his  wonderful  devotion  and  piety.  On  one  hand,  his 
genius  urged  him  to  examine  the  miracles  of  the  great 
Creator  in  his  natural  productions ;  while  on  the  other, 
the  love  of  that  same  All-perfect  Being,  rooted  in  his 
mind,  struggled  hard  to  persuade  him  that  God  alone, 
and  not  His  creatures,  was  worthy  of  his  researches, 
love,  and  attention. 


THE  END. 


Wilson  and  Son,  Printers,  57,  Skinner  Street,  London. 


A    LIST    OF 

NEW  OPTICAL  INSTRUMENTS, 

CONSTRUCTED 

By  ANDREW  PR1TCHARD,  No.  162,  Fleet-Street,  London. 


All  the  following  instruments  drawn  and  described  in  the  Micrographia  are  marked 
with  the  letter  M.,  and  the  number  following  it  refers  to  the  page  ;  those  described  in  the 
Microscopic  Cabinet  have  the  letters.1)/.  C.j  and  those  given  in  the  new  edition  of  the 
Microscopic  Illustrations  have  31.  I. 


£.    s.    d. 

1.  Pocket  Microscope,  with  single  magnifiers,  (M.  C.  243)  2     2     0 

2.  Vertical  Microscope,  with  solid  gun-metal  bar,  (M.  I.)     5     5     0 

3.  ,,  „  Achromatic,  (M.  I.)    7     7     0 

4.  ,,  „  „  »  (1  set  best  glasses)  ...  10  10     0 

5.  Achromatic  Microscope,  with  stand  and  round  foot  (M.I. ),  ^lO.  10s.  to  15  15     o 
6-  »  „  »  tripod,,    (M.I.)  ^12.  12s.  to  18  18     0 

7.  Single  „  „  „  „    (M.I.) ..10  10     0 

8.  Achromatic        „  „  „  „     with  candle  holder, 

condenser,  dissecting  rest,  aquatic  live-box,  &c.  in  maho- 
gany cabinet,  with  drawers  21     0     0 

9-  „  „  u  „  „  ditto,  with  2  sets 
object-glasses,  1  best  and  1  foreign,  moveable  stage,  phial- 
holder,  6cc.  in  cabinet   26     5     o 

10.  „  „  „  „  „  ditto,  with  from  3 

to  6  sets  best  object-glasses — 3  Huygenean  eye-pieces, 
micrometer,  drawing,  and  camera  lucida  eye-pieces — fine 
adjustment;  dissecting  apparatus,  &c.  as  described  in 
M.I.  chapter  vi ,,£35  to 

11.  Goring's  Aplanatic  Engiscopes,  (M.  I.)  o£25  to 

12.  ,,         Improved  Amician  Reflecting  Engiscopes,  (M.) ^18  to  50     0     0 

13.  „        Phial  Microscopes,  (M.  I.)   5     5     0 

14.  Wollaston's  Doublet  Microscopes o£2. 12s.  6rf.  to  10  10     0 

15.  Solar  Microscopes  15  15     q 

16.  „  „  with  achromatic  glasses 

17.  „  „  with  opaque  apparatus    

18.  Lucernal  Microscopes 

19.  Microscopes  for  measuring  refractive  powers 

20.  Single  Dissecting  Microscopes 7     7     0 

21.  Oxy-hydrogen  Gas  Microscopes    40     0     0 

22.  ,,  ..  »  second  size  o£l0.  10s.  to  25     0 

23.  „  „     Polariscopes  

This  apparatus  exhibits  on  a  screen  the  system  of  rings,  colours  of 
thin  plates  of  crystals,  unanuealled  glasses,  prismatic  spectrum,  &c. 

24.  „                „     Apparatus  for  either  of  the   above  instruments,  on 
various  constructions     ^8.  8s.  to  25     0 

The  construction  of  this  apparatus  is  greatly  simplified,  and,  independent 
of  its  use  for  the  microscope  and  polariscope,  is  admirably  adapted  for 
shewing  the  combustion  of  metals  and  chemical  experiments  re- 
quiring intense  heat. 

25.  Improved  Clock-lime  Holders   

26.  Object-glasses,  cylindrical,  or  Stanope    

07.  grooved  sphere,  or  Coddiugton    

28.  „  concentric,  or  Brewster's    ... 

29.  n  Goring's  double    

;50.  „  Herschel's  aplanatic 


0 


£.    s.    d. 

31.  Object  glasses,  Achromatic,  foreign  (seconds)  1  10    0 

32.  „  „  >,       (^st)   

33.  „  »  English  (best)    

For  the  foci,  apertures,  and  powers,  given  by  achromatic  object-glasses, 

see  M.  I. 

34.  Spherule  magnifiers,  from  l-30th  to  l-300th  of  an  inch  focus    

35.  Single,  Doublet,  and  Triplet  Glass  Magnifiers,   mounted  

Focal  Magnifying  Power.       Single  Lenses.    Doublets.        Triplets, 

lengths  in  „.,  j,  j         it      .     j       V     *      d 

parts  of  inch  Linear.      Superficial.  £.    «•    d.       £.    s.    d.      t.    s.    a. 

One  inch  10  ...  100  times  ...  0  4  6  ...  0  7  6  ...  — 
l-2d  ...  20  ...  400  —  ...  —  •••  —  —  ~ 
l-3d  ...  30  ...  900  —  ...  —  ...  —  -  — 
l-5th  ...  50  ...  2500  —  ...  —  •••  —  —  — 
l-10th  ..  100  ..  10000  —  ...  0  9  0  ...  1  0  0  ...  1  10  0 
l-20th  ...  200  ...  40000  —  ...  0  12  0  ...  1  10  0  ...  — 
l-30th  ...  300  ...  90000  —  ...  0  16  0  ...  —  ...  — 
l-40th  ...  400  ...  160000  —  ...  —  •••  —  —  — 
l-50th  ...  500  ...  250000  —  ...  —  —  —  •••  — 
l-60th  ...  600  ...  360000  —  ..  —  —  —  •••  ~ 
l-80th  ...  800  ...  640000     —     ...       —         •••      —         •••      _ 

36.  Single  and  Doublet  Diamond,  Sapphire,  and  Garnet  Magnifiers    

37*  Pocket  Magnifiers,  in  tortoise-shell  frames,  various    

gg'  '  2  lenses,  in  neat  frame    ., 

39"  ,,         and  1  Coddington    

4q\  Coddington  mounted,  in  silver 

41.  M  Stanope 

40'  in  pearl  and  silver •••• 

„  3  crystal  lenses,  in  best  flat  mounting     2     2     0 

44'  fJ  2  crystal  lenses,  and  1  tourmaline  ...     2  12     6 

45'  Tourmalines,  mounted  in  silver  and  pearl,  for  the  pocket      ...  18*.  to     1  10     0 

46*.  Telescopes,  Achromatic,  day  and  night,  1  foot,  2  feet,  and  30-inch  ... 

47  )(  Astronomical,  3£  feet  and  upwards ... 

48*  ■Reflecting,  from  2  to  8  inches  diameter  

49'#  "         Stands,  brass,  for  the  table,  various 

50>'  „       wood,  improved  garden    • 

gj  t  ,,        equatorial   \ • 

52*  Microscopic  Gnoneometers,  for  measuring  the  angles  of  object-glasses 
and  specula,  (M.  C.  223)  

53.  Machines  for  making  thin  sections  of  woods 

54.  Knives  for  ditto   •  •'."'*',' 

55  Solid  Pyramid  Opera-glasses,  mounted  in  silver 

56  Prism  Telescopes,  for  exhibiting  Fraunhofer  s  lines 

5/  Pocket  Apparatus,  for  showing  the  interference  of  light     

5s!  Telescope  and  ditto  „  „  »  complete 

59.  ,,  „  „  „  „  improved  mounting 

60.  Heliostats,  with  clock-work  

61.  Gowland's  Self-adjusting  Artificial  Horizons  V^TT  a  m  n 

62.  Polariscopes,  with  5  to  8  crystals £%•  f  to  4  lu  n 

63  ?>  Pritchard's  improved  slider ,^1.  8s.  to  4     4  0 

This  Polariscope  enables  the  possessor  to  examine  sections  of  any 
crystals  that  present  themselves,  and  to  augment  their  number  at  any 
time. 

64.  Slides,  containing  three  crystallized  plates,  for  exhibiting  the  systems 

of  coloured  rings  by  the  above  instrument,  each  slide  ...  10s.  6d.  to     1     1     0 

65.  Japanned  Reflectors,  for  polarizing  light • ••     0     4     6 

66.  Polarizing  Prisms  mounted  to  Microscopes     for  shewing  coloured 

tints,  &c.  in  minute  crystals,  (M.  I.)    30s.  to     4     4      0 

67  Stage,  Double  Object-glass/Tourmaline,  &c.  for  shewing 

unannealled  glasses,  selenite  devices,  system  of  rings, 
structure  of  quartz,  &c.  by  the  Microscope,  (M.  I .)    ... 


£.    s.     d. 
63.  Moveable  Stages,  (M.  I.) =£2. 10s.  to 

69.  Fine  Adjustments,  (M.  218)    7<T»'T 

70.  Dissecting  Instruments,  in  cases    £Z.Zs.\o 

71.  „  Scissars  (M.  C.  244)  0    7     0 

72.  ,,        Handles     

73.  ,,         Needles    • 

74.  Writing  Diamonds,  for  marking  names  on  slides   

f5#'  turned  points.: 

76.  Microscopic  Lamps,  with  shades 

77.  Condensers  and  Mirrors,  various  sizes    

78.  Cylindrical  Glass  Vessels,  for  holding  aquatic  insects  and  plants 

79.  Flattened  ditto  

80.  „  Troughs,  (M.  14) 

81.  Aquatic  Live-Boxes,  (M.  I.)    

82.  ,,  with  thin  glass  covers      

03  M  and  Micrometers 

84.  Micrometers  on  glass,  mounted  in  ivory,  l-50th  to  l-200th 0     3    < 

1 -500th  to  1 -5000th 

86.  >>  on  pearl  slips    

87.  ,,  fine  screw,  for  the  stage  ...  

88.  ,,  ,,  eye-piece   

89]  ,,  Drawing  Eye-pieces,  with  improved  adjustment,  (M.  I.) 

90.  Camera  Lucida  Eye-pieces,  various  

91.  Rectangular  Prisms  Boots,  (M.  I -•••• 

9*.  Phantasmagoria  and  Magic  Lanthorns    •••  *2.  2s.  to 

°3.  Improved  Astronomical  Slides,  for  Magic  Lanthorns,  &c.  (the  motions 

obtained  by  wheel-work)— Solar  System,  shewing  the  Motion  of 
all  the  Planets;  Parallelism  of  Earth's  Axis;  Comet's  Elliptic 
Orbit  ;  Earth's  Annual  and  Diurnal  Motion,  with  the  Moon's 
periodical  Revolution  ;  Phenomenon  of  the  Tides  illustrated ; 
Apparent  Retrograde  Motion  of  Venus ;  Rotundity  of  the  Earth  ; 
Diurnal  Motion  of  the  Earth,  the  Rising  and  Setting  of  the  Sun  ; 
Annular  and  Partial  Eclipse ;  Spots  on  the  Sun— in  sets  or  single 
94  Slides,  for  ditto,  of  Costume,  Buildings,  Natural  History,  Comic 
Subjects  &c per  dozen 

95.  Ditto,  moveable    •••■• per  dozen 

96.  Sylphitrope  figures,  for  revolving  on  a  wet  inclined  plane  ..each     0     j     6 

97.  Unannealled  glasses,  for  shewing  coloured  tints  by  polarized  light  ... 

98.  Devices  of  Selenite,  for  ditto    «"T« ™     \     n 

99.  Windows,  Figures,  &c ^1.  10s.  to  20     0     0 

100.  Tourmalines,  unmounted,  each £s- t0     *  1U 

101.  Single  Image  Calc  Prisms,  £  to  2  inches  long    7s.  to 

102.  Double  Image  QuaTtz  Prisms    - '-"."'"" 

103.  Crystallized  Plates  of  Amethyst,  Arragonite,  Beryl,  Borax,  Sulphate 

of  Barytes,  Chromate  of  Potash,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Calc  Spar, 
Quartz,  right  and  left,  Iolite,  Nitre,  Rochelle  Salt,  Topaz,  Tour- . 
maline,  &c.  for  exhibiting  the  system  of  rings  by  polanscope  .  each 

104.  Polished  Calcareous  Spar,  exhibiting  white  double  elliptic  rings    ... 
10-  n  multiplication  of  coloured  images 

106.  Fresnel's  Rhombs 

107.  Microscopic  Objects,  cases  of,  40  transparent  0     7     6 

108.  „  11  36  opaque • y, 

109°  f  „  prepared  in  balsam  12s.  to     5     5     0 

110'  M  large,  for  solar  and 

gas  microscopes 

HI,  ,,  in  cabinets  <£?>•  &*■  to 

These  collections  of  objects  consist  of  preparations  of  insects  :  their 
larvae;  the  different  parts  illustrative  of  the  varied  construction  of 
their  locomotive,  prehensile,  manducatory,  visual,  and  other  organs  ; 
dissections  shewing  the  structure  of  the  alimentary,  respiratory,  and 
nervous  systems- fossil  infusoria-parts  of  plants— ferns -algte— 
mosses,  &c— Objects  mounted  in  this  way  (as  first  described  in  the 
•■  List  of  2000  Microscopic  Objects")  are  rendered  transparent  and 
permanent. 


120 


112.  Microscopic  Objects,  consisting  of  British  Insects/arranged  in  con- 
formity with  their  organization,  with  printed 
names,  forming  an  excellent  guide  to  the  study 
of  Entomology,  in  glazed  cases,  shewing  the 
_  entire  classification  at  one  view  ...  £5.  5s.  to  21     0     0 
113#  »  in  cases  containing  12  thin  sections  of  woods, 

neatly  mounted,  ABCD     0     6     0 
"*'  "  »  30      „     A.  B.  C.  exogens     0  15     0 

"2*  "  "  20      "     D.  endogens 

llb-  »  „  90 to 200 (choice)    

The  endogenous  woods  are  cut  in  two  directions,  and  the  exogenous  in 
three,  so  that  the  structure  of  the  plant  may  be  accurately  seen  •  that 
placed  next  the  name  is  a  horizontal  or  transverse  section,  the  others 
are  longitudinal,  the  middle  one  being  parallel  to  the  medullary  rays 
(radial),  and  the  end  section  perpendicular  to  them  (tangental)  Thev 
afford  excellent  examples  of  the  elementary  structure  of  vegetables,  and 
exhibit  most  of  the  forms  and  disposition  of  the  cellular  and  vascular 
tissues,  and  woody  fibres  of  plants,  in  situ. 

117>  >>  thin  sections  of  fossil  woods 2s.  to 

®*  "  »  cut  in  two  or  three  directions 

"  »  „  cases  of    2     2     0 

These  sections  are  cut  so  thin,  that  they  transmit  light  as  readily  as  the 
recent  woods j  and  shew  the  form  and  disposition  of  the  woody  fibre 
vascular  tissue,  medullary  rays,  glands,  pith,  &c. 

"  cases  of,  consisting  of    organic  fabrics,  viz. 

flax,  cotton,  mummy  cloths,  &c.  ... 
121'  "  »  botanical,    to    illustrate    vegetable 

organography 

122*  »  thin  Sections  of  Coal,  Charcoal,  Jet,  Lepido- 

dendrons,  Flint  with  organic  remains,  Topaz 
and  Quartz  with  moveable  fluids,  Prismatic 
Felspar,  Hyperstene,  Recent  and  Fossil  Bone, 
Turbinolia,  .(Erolites,  Limestone  with  organic 

remains,  &c 

123-  "  consisting  of  the  ashes  of  vegetables  ............ 

124,  »  sets  of  minute  crystals,  for  shewing  coloured" 

tints,  black  cross,  dichroism,  &c.  by  polarizing 

microscope,  (M.  I.)  neatly  mounted    

JJ?;  "  sets  of  test  objects,  (M.  C.  144,) 7s.  6d.  to     1     l     0 

~°'  »  cases  and  cabinets,  containing  specimens   se- 

149    pi     i   on       r  lected  from  each  of  the  above  classes  £2. 2s.  to  50     0     0 

1-7.  .Blank  fehdes,  foi  mounting  objects,  plain  glass,  2  inch  ...  per  dozen 

„  bevelled  edges  2     ,, 

"  »  3     ,,  t) 

plate  glass,  edges  greyed  2     „ 

>>  ,,  3     ,, 

>>  polished  2     „  ,, 

"  >>  5     ,,  s 

prepared  with  mica  2     „ 
"  >»  3    ,,  >, 

..     ,.        »  circular,  various  sizes       „ 

138.  Blank  Discs,  for  ditto,  opaque,  i  inch  diameter  per  eross 

lo9-  "  »  l-8th         „  ...  s 

140.  Thin  Glass,  l-30th  to  l-100th  of  an  inch  thick,  for  covering  objects 

BOOKS. 

The  Microscopic  Cabinet,  with  coloured  plates  s>  n  1a     „ 

The  Micrographia =i  0  18     0 

The  Natural  History  of  Animalcules   ?.     ?  6 

List  of  2000  Microscopic  Objects '.'.'.'.'.'.'."". 0 

A  Catalogue  of  British  Insects,  arranged  accord\:ng'to'their  organization".*"  0     I  o 

Ihe  Microscopic  Illustrations,  a  new  edition,  emended  and  enlarged ,  o  lo  < 


130. 
131. 
132. 
133. 
134. 
135. 
136. 
137. 


/•;;/  a 


•Fii/.  T: 


■y,.i  u 


■ 


Fig.  /■> 


/■,./  Iff. 


1 


h;  .7 


- 


•■; 


-5 


I "~  r 

>  §  *? 

^  -  ~ 

*i  z  •_ 

gj  £|  69 

-  5  - 


111 

i  a  ^ 

1H 


5. 


:■:■,,.' 


In  the  Press,  price,  to  Subscribers,  Eighteen  Shillings, 

THE    NATURAL    HISTORY 

INFUSORIA; 

WITH  AS  ABRWGEiir.ST  OF 

Bit  3nfu£f!on$t0trrr&rn 

OF 

C.  G.  EIIREXBERG. 


ILLUSTRATED  BY  ENGRAVINGS   OF  ALL   THE   GENERA  GIVEN  IX  THAT  WORK     IND 
ORIGINAL  DRAWINGS  OF  FOSSIL  INFUSORIA, 

BY  F.  BAUER,  Esq.,  F.R.S. 


BY  ANDREW  PRITCHARD. 

In  announcing  to  the  public  a  new  Work  on  Infusory  Animalcules,  some  explanation 
may  be  required,  why  the  Author  has  departed  from  the  system  of  arrangement  given 
in  his  "Natural  History  of  Animalcules,"  published  in  1834;  the  more  especially, 
after  the  very  nattering  reception  that  publication  met  with,  not  only  in  England,  but 
throughout  Germany  and  France.  At  the  time  that  Work  was  being  prepared,  in 
which  the  arrangement  is  that  of  F.  O.  Muller,  founded  on  the  external  characteristics 
of  these  minute  creatures,  Dr.  Ehrenberg's,  derived  from  their  internal  organization,  was 
not  complete;  and  drawings  of  19  species  only  had  appeared  in  this  country.  Hence 
it  was,  that  the  Author  adopted  the  former ;  the  latter  is  now  preferred  ;  notwithstand- 
ing which  the  opinions  of  naturalists  opposed  to  it  will  be  fairly  stated. 

Although  descriptions  of  every  known  species  will  be  given,  it  is  not  intended  that 
the  forthcoming  Work  shall  be  merely  a  catalogue  of  dry  and  technical  specifications  j 
for  it  will  contain  so  many  curious  and  interesting  particulars  respecting  the  extraordi- 
nary forms,  internal  organization,  locomotion,  habits  and  instincts  of  these  wonderful 
creatures— together  with  the  best  methods  of  procuring  and  examining  them  under 
the  microscope— which,  it  is  hoped,  will  render  the  Work  as  complete  a  History,  as  up 
to  this  period  it  can  possibly  be  made. 

The  recently-discovered  Fossil  Remains,  as  incorporated  with  the  Flint,  or  heaped 
together  in  countless  myriads,  forming  vast  beds  or  mountains  on  the  surface  of  our 
globe,  will  also  be  brought  under  review;  and  the  whole  illustrated  by  Engravii 
SEVERAL  HUNDRED  INFUSORIA,  highly  magnified. 

In  translating  and  abstracting  so  technical  and  extensive  a  Work  as  the  "Die 
Infusionsthierchen,"  occupying,  as  it  does,  nearly  COO  large  folio  pages,  many  diffi- 
culties would  necessarily  arise  ;  these,  however,  by  the  great  assistance  which  has  linn 
rendered  him,  the  Author  has  been  able  to  surmount;  and  it  is  believed,  thai  whilst, 
on  the  one  hand,  this  Work  will  be  disencumbered  of  long  lists  of  synonymes  and  his- 
torical references,  so,  on  the  other,  it  will  comprise  all  those  important  discoveries, 
which,  as  the  arrangement  depends  upon  them,  it  would  be  unjust  and  unwise  to  have 
omitted. 

With  respect  to  the  Engravings,  on  the  execution  of  which  the  value  of  the  Work 
will  so  greatly  depend,  few  words  only  need   be  Baid;    since   the  Author's   long   c\- 

ice,  and  the  high  character  attained  already  by  the  Illustrations  of  bis   ' 
Works,  will  he  the  best  guarantee  of  what    lie  is' likely  to  produce.      It  may  b( 
however,  to  state,  that  the  Examples  of  Genera  will  be  entirely  selected  from  the  mag- 
nificent Engravings  of  the  "Die  Infusionsthierchen;"  and  thai  the  Illustrations  i 
Fossil  Infusoria, discovered  since  Ehrenberg's  Work  was  printed,  are  from  the  handoi 
F.  Bauer,  Esq.,  a  gentleman  whose  skill  in  this  exquisite  art  is  beyond  all  comparison. 
Thus,  on  the  whole,  it  is  presumed,  that  the  Engravings  of  this  Work  will  sun 

accuracy,  finish  and  colouring,  all  that  have  yet  appeared  :  and  the  Author  i 
enough  to  hope,  that  the  Manual  will  take  its  place  as  the  Standard  English  W( 
this  interesting  branch  of  .Natural  History. 

Subscribers'  Names  received  at  162,  Fleet  Street,  London. 


Just  Published,  by  Whit  taker  and  Co.,  Ave  Maria  Lane,  London, 
price  10s.  Gd. 

MICROSCOPIC   ILLUSTRATIONS 

LIVING    OBJECTS: 

THEIR  NATURAL  HISTORY,  ETC.,  ETC.; 

muti)  fttgmtins 

CONCERNING  THE  MOST  ELIGIBLE  METHODS  OF  CONSTRUCTING  MICROSCOPES, 
AND  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR   USING   THEM, 

BY    C.    R.    GORING,    M.D. 

&  $ciu  (SUttton,  cmcirtrctt  &  cttlanrcr/,  SHutftratca"  unth  Colour^  <£i\%vnbii\$8, 

BY  ANDREW  PRITCHARD,  M.R.L, 

HON.    MEM.    SOC.    ARTS,    EDIN.;     AUTHOR   OF    "NATURAL    HISTORY   OP    ANIMALCULES," 
ETC.,    ETC.,    ETC. 

"  Contemporaneous  with  the  publication  of  the  First  Edition  of  this  Work  a  new 
Era  sprung  up  in  Microscopic  Science,  disclosing  to  the  students  of  nature  and  diligent 
investigators  into  her  more  recondite  operations,  an  illimitable  field  for  observation. 
Antecedent  to  the  period  just  alluded  to,  Microcosm  might  almost  have  been  termed  a 
world  of  its  own,  wherein  myriads  of  living  occupants,  countless  in  species  as  in  indi- 
viduals, 'lived  and  moved  and  had  their  being,'  unperceived  by  the  intelligent  faculty 
of  man ;  and  wherein  they  are  as  assiduously  and  dexterously  engaged  in  the  business 
of  life  as  those  whose  famed  exploits  resound  throughout  the  earth.  The  vast  pro- 
ficiency arrived  at  in  the  constructing  of  Microscopes,  and  more  especially  the  invest- 
ing those  instruments  with  effective  achromatic  lenses — an  achievement  we  believe 
entirely  attributable  to  the  authors  of  the  '  Microscopic  Illustrations,'  has  thrown  a 
light  upon  this  most  interesting  subject,  that  can  never  again  be  obscured.  In  this 
Edition,  emended  and  considerably  enlarged,  Mr.  Pritchard  has  furnished  over  and 
above  his  descriptions  of  Aquatic  Insects,  and  the  almost  incredible  metamorphoses 
they  undergo,  a  comprehensive  sketch  of  the  uses  of  the  Microscope  and  all  its  recent 
improvements ;  and  also  an  excellent  illustration  of  its  application  to  the  various  sciences 
and  useful  arts,  especially  Geology,  Botany,  Animal  and  Vegetable  Physiology.  He  has 
further  explained,  in  popular  language,  the  theory  wherein  consists  the  superiority  of 
the  achromatic  over  the  common  Microscope. 

"  In  his  additional  chapters  will  be  found,  a  practical  account  of  the  most  approved 
achromatic  Microscope,  for  exhibiting  the  infinite  variety  of  transparent  and  opaque 
objects — all  its  apparatus — the  mode  of  selecting  magnifying  powers  suitable  for  the 
purposes  either  of  deep  investigation  or  pleasurable  amusement — the  moveable  stage — 
the  spring  phial-holder  for  retaining  plants  and  living  creatures  in  such  a  position  as  to 
render  clearly  perceptible  the  circulation  through  them — the  polarizing  Microscope,  with 
all  the  curious  and  beautiful  phenomena  elicited  from  crystalline  bodies  by  the  aid  of 
polarized  light,  including  Mr.  Talbot's  experiments — the  apparatus  for  dissecting  under 
the  Microscope — the  camera  lucida,  with  the  micrometer  eye-pieces  for  drawing  and 
measuring  of  objects — the  mode  of  illuminating  on  a  black  ground — a  new  method  of 
determining  the  forms  of  minute  bodies,  and  observing  the  currents  in  fluids  during 
the  process  of  evaporation  : — all  these,  and  various  other  highly-interesting  subjects, 
are  so  copiously  treated  of,  and  so  accurately  elucidated  by  means  of  Engravings,  as  to 
render  this  Work  a  complete  practical  guide  for  using  the  Microscope,  and  constituting 
it  one  of  the  most  delightful  and  serviceable  instruments  for  man,  in  promoting  his 
researches  after  truth." — Gateshead  Observer. 

"  Impressed  as  we  are  with  the  high  importance  of  this  branch  of  science,  and  with 
the  great  value  of  the  improvements  which  these  gentlemen  have  introduced,  we  looked 
fonvard  with  the  most  sanguine  expectations ;  and  we  have  now  no  hesitation  in  stating 
it  as  our  opinion,  that  Dr.  G.  and  Mr.  P.  have  both  accomplished  their  difficult  tasks 
with  the  greatest  success.  The  coloured  Engravings  are  executed  in  such  a  masterly 
manner,  that  they  will  themselves  bear  to  be  seen  by  the  Microscope." — Brewster's 
Edinburgh  Journal  of  Science. 

"  The  present  publication  cannot  fail  to  recommend  itself  generally,  for  it  is  asso- 
ciated with  elaborate  descriptions  and  beautiful  coloured  Engravings  of  a  variety  of 
diverting  and  popular  objects." — Journal  of  the  Royal  Institution. 


Preparing  for  the  Press, 
1. 

DESCRIPTIONS  OE  VARIOUS  APPARATUS 

FOR    ILLUSTRATING   THE 

INTERFERENCE  OF  LIGHT. 


2. 


ILLUSTRATING   THE 


WONDERS  OF  THE  MINUTE  CREATION ; 

WITH 

Scs"m|)ttan$  at  the  Ohjerte, 

BY  ANDREW  PRITCHARD. 


1  By  the  beauty  of  the  creatures,  proportionably,  the  mightiness  of  the  Maker  of  them 
is  seen."  —  Wisdom  of  Solomon. 


The  design  of  this  Work  is  an  attempt  to  elucidate  those  parts  of  the  creation, 
which  from  their  extreme  minuteness  are  known  to  us  only  by  the  aid  of  the  Micro- 
scope. So  manifold  and  various  are  these  productions,  all  equally  wonderful  and 
beautiful  in  their  kind,  and  alike  indicative  of  the  wisdom  and  power  of  "  the  Maker 
of  them" — so  full  of  interest  is  the  study  of  them,  that  there  is  no  branch  of  Natural 
Philosophy  to  which  our  attention  may  be  directed  with  a  greater  promise  of  instruc- 
tion and  delight. 

Whilst  the  press  absolutely  teems  'with  Works  explanatory  of  organic  and  inorganic- 
bodies,  might  we  not  expect,  that  the  Illustrations  of  these  Works  would  chiefly  result 
from  the  personal  observations  of  the  Authors  ?  Such,  however,  is  not  the  case. 
Strange  to  say,  they  are  chiefly  copies.  A  series  of  original  Drawings,  therefore,  illus- 
trating a  Work  of  this  description,  taken  from  the  finest  specimens  of  Microscopic 
objects ;  such  as  the  minute  structures  of  the  animal  creation — the  respiratory  apparatus 
and  various  locomotive,  manducatory,  visual,  natatory,  and  other  organs  of  Insects 
— portions  of  bone,  skin,  scales,  &c,  &c. — the  structures  of  woods,  plants,  recent  and 
fossil,  ferns,  mosses,  algae ;  also,  the  manner  in  which  the  circulation  is  carried  on  within 
them — the  curious  mode  of  aggregation  in  divers  geological  productions;  and  a  mul- 
tiplicity of  other  highly  interesting  matters,  it  is  thought,  will  not  be  unacceptable  to 
the  public. 

From  the  number  of  years  the  Author  has  been  occupied  collecting  his  materials, 
and  the  thousands  of  beautiful  preparations  which  have  passed  through  his  hands,  no 
ordinary  opportunity  has  been  afforded  him;  and  it  is  with  this  belief,  that  he  now 
comes  forward  with  a  Work  on  this  branch  of  Natural  Philosophy. 


London  .-   Whittuker  and  Co.,  Ave  Maria  Lane. 


ADDENDA    TO    LIST 

OF 
CONSTRUCTED    BY 

ANDREW  PBITCHARD, 

©[pTQga^K]  aim©  g^gTaeii  B^iAiKnyjiFAigTr^siiigg 

162,   FLEET  STREET,   LONDON. 

1.  Pritchard's  Apparatus  for  illustrating  the  Interference  of  Light,  with 

Telescope  and  100  Screens s    '       \^15  15  () 

I"                          -  ditto,  with  50  Screens       ..          ..          .'.'          "'            '      jq  10  q 

^'  ditto  Pocket  Apparatus     . .          . .          . '                               0  8  6 

4-         ~ improved  Eye-piece  Polariscope,  with  Reflector  '          .'.        2  2  0 

th^Jth!  w-8irU1£e?t  exhibits.  the  col°i"-s  more  intense,  and  the  rings  better  denned 
than  the  Slider  Polariscope,  invented  some  years  ago  by  Mr.  P.  and  now  eeneraHv 
used.     It  can  be  applied  to  any  compound  Microscope.  generally 

■  improved  Polarizing  Apparatus  for  the  Microscope      . .        Ill     g 

»„a  ?y  Mr*  P"'S  "ew  "'•'"'ge'pent  of  the  Prisms,  the  field  of  view  is  greatly  extended 
and  any  eye-piece  can  be  used.  gieauy  e.\ienuea, 

— —          —  ditto      ditto      large  Prisms  and  a  double  image  one  . .        4     4     0 
lhe  Apparatus  §4  and  5  fitted  to  Microscopes    .  9  ,.,     , 

8.  Stereoscopes  "        0  K     f) 

10    SwH^f111  Spri,ng^C1°,Cr'  f°rfixing  the  SUn'S  ima&e  in  any  position       8     8     0 
iu.  Fntchards  improved  Gas  Microscopes    ..  ..  ..  "=£18  to 

}};  ~  ditto      di"p      with  polarizing  and  interference  Apparatus 

l~- new  portable  Gas  Generators  and  Holders  , 

andSaL?^ 

13.  Prism  Telescopes  for  shewing  the  lines  in  the  Spectrum 

14.  Pntchard  s  Vertical  Microscopes,  single,  doublet  and  triplet  £5  5s.  to     10  10 

not  SLXJBLK!  ****  "'  *"  const™ted  "ith  thin  piano,  convex  lenses,  and 

U\    T  -—Achromatic  Microscopes  [see  Microscopic  Illustrations]  ^15  to 

16.  Improved  Magic  and  Phantasmagoria  Lanthorns. .      £1   12s.  63   and 

Sliders  of  Astronomical,  Natural  History,  Costume,  and  Comic  subjects. 

17.  Selenite  Ornaments  and  Wedges  for  polarized  Light  0  7 
Jo  SailLS  ?/  LenS6S  f?r  exhibiting  Newton's  coloured  Rings  .' .'  0  10 
on    p  v  i    s  ™Proved,  dumPy  single-image  Prisms,  each      . .        7s.  6d.  to       0  14 

20.  Pritchard's  new  Fine-Adjustment  Microscope  Bodies  ..  .  ni 

f^„This  construction  is  simple,  more  precise  in  its  action,  and  of  more  eeneral  utilitv 
than  any  contrivance  yet  invented  for  the  purpose.  general  utility 

21 .  Microscopic  Objects,  Is.  each  and  upwards,  or  in  cases  at  6s.,  15s.,  21s.and 

These  objects  consist  of  thin  sections  of  Recent  and  Fossil  Woods  Coal    let  PW 

22.  Specimen  Cases,  containing  Examples  of  the  above,  each     8s.  6d.  and       0  15     0 

ACHROMATIC  AND  REFLECTING  TELESCOPES. 

OPERA  GLASSES,  Single,  Double,  and  Solid. 
SPECTACLES    IN    EVERY  VARIETY  OF  MOUNTING,  W.TH    CRYSTAL  AND    CLASS    LENSES. 

ie)  is  aw  s  ss'®  EissmTm,wwmi^T^a 

BAROMETERS  AND   THERMOMETERS.       DOUBLE    IMAGE   PRISMS 

njEOMW  RHOMBS.     BARTON*  IR1S  BUTTONS.     TOURMALINES.      POLISHED   CALCAREOUS  SPAR 

INTERFERENCE  MIRRORS  AND  PRISMS. 

^alamwg  anir  iflurosfroptc  Styparattt*  of  all  femoa. 

}-  Darkirr,  Primer,  s,  Uruve  Cottages,  H  jllowsy. 


8     8     I) 


7    7    n 
0 


3  13 


5     5     0 


'ii